«h ^M) dl^ u- si<^v Field Manual FM 6-20-1 No. 6-20-1 HEADQUARTERS DEPARTMEIMT OF THE ARMY Washington, DC, 5 July 1979

Field Artillery Cannon Battalion

Unless otherwise noted, where the third person singular is used in this publication, the word "he" will be understood to stand for both masculine and feminine genders.

Users of this field manual are encouraged to submit recommended changes or comments to improve the publication. Comments should be keyed to the specific page, paragraph, or line of the text in which the change is recommended. Reasons will be provided for each comment to insure understanding and complete evaluation. Changes and comments should be prepared, using DA Form 2028 (Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms), and forwarded directly to:

COMMANDANT US ARMY FIELD ARTILLERY SCHOOL ATTN: ATSF-TD-TM FORT SILL, OKLAHOMA 73503

The Army Library (ANRAL) ATTN: Military Documents Room 1Ä518, Pentagon Washington, D.C. 20310 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page Introduction v Chapter 1. Field Artillery Cannon Battalion Operations 1-1 Target acquisition 1-3 Meteorology, survey, and technical fire direction 1-7 Tactical fire direction 1-11 Field artillery fire planning 1-16 Plans and orders 1-17 Positioning 1-24 Reconnaissance 1-29 Displacement 1-30 Communications 1-32 Combat service support 1-32 Survivability 1-33 Chapter 2. Offense 2-1 Offensive fundamentals 2-1 Enemy defensive tactics 2-7 Forms of offensive maneuver 2-9 Types of offensive operations 2-12 Movement to contact 2-17 Hasty attack 2-22 Deliberate attack 2-24 Exploitation and pursuit 2-29 Chapters. Defense 3-1 Defensive fundamentals 3-1 Enemy offensive tactics 3-6 Defensive maneuver and operations 3-9 Covering force 3-12 Main battle area 3-15 Supporting light infantry in the MBA 3-19 Delay and withdrawal operations 3-21 Chapter 4. Operations Security 4-1' Enemy intelligence 4-1 OPSEC planning 4-2 OPSEC countermeasures 4-5 Electromagnetic intelligence 4-11 Evaluation 4-13 Recognition and identification of forces on the battlefield 4-13 FM 6-20-1

Page Chapter 5. Combat Service Support Operations 5-1 Organization for combat service support 5-1 Trains operations 5-5 Supply operations 5-8 Maintenance operations 5-17 Personnel support and administration 5-20 Medical support 5-21 Other services 5-22 Chapter 6. How to Train to Fight 6-1 Training philosophy 6-1 Training materials 6-3 Responsibilities 6-8 Training management 6-9 Battalion training 6-9 The training crosswalk 6-15 Appendix A. Divisional and Nondivisional Cannon Battalions A-i Divisional cannon battalions A-l Separate brigade cannon battalions A-8 Nondivisional cannon battalions A-12 Appendix B. Functions of the Primary Staff B-i * The battalion staff B-l Staff functions B-2 Appendix C. Communications C-i Communications-electronics responsibilities C-l Communications-electronics staff officer C-2 Battalion communications platoon C-3 The battalion telecommunications center C-3 The battalion communication system C-3 Communications operations C-5 Appendix D. The Cannon Battalion in Special Environments and in Support of Special Operations D-i Military operations on urbanized terrain D-2 Arctic environment D-4 Desert environment D-6 Mountain environment D-8 Jungle environment D-10 Nuclear and chemical environment D-12 Airborne and airmobile operations D-14 River crossing operations D-16 Support of allied maneuver forces D-18 Counterguerrilla operations D-20 Amphibious operations D-22

in

k FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

Page

Appendix E. Road Marches E-l Planning E-2 Training E-2 Standing operating procedures.. E-2 Preparing for road marches E-2 March columns E-3 March organization E-4 March column control E-5 Road march planning factors E-8 Movement order E-15 Road movement graph E-16 Road movement table E-17 Appendix F. Tactical Scenarios F-l Movement to contact scenario F-2 Deliberate attack scenario F-13 Exploitation/pursuit scenario .... F-23 Covering force scenario F-30 Main battle area scenario F-43 Appendix G. Glossary G-l Appendix H. Relevant References H-l Appendix I. Standardization agreement 2129 1-1 4

IV FM 6-20-1

INTRODUCTION

f*

10> v4 vr TO ^r> k^- 7" j' -«ÄS ••-ift/íy Á.3.

«Tí '-*~îSKZ3*>* «y

In the battles of the next war, effective use of firepower will be more critical than in any land battle the US Army has ever fought. Changes in battle tempo, mobility, and firepower will challenge field artillerymen as never before as they plan, coordinate, and execute fire support.

V FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

The firepower that can be provided by cannon artillery has increased significantly as a result of more lethal munitions, better accuracy, and increased range.

CANNON FIREPOWER HAS BECOME MORE LETHAL

Coverage area: 250m

1970s: 25,000 155-mm SP square meters 570-pound HE 100m 1 WWII: 7,500 L LJ ! i square meters r. ITUS i SL - .i f 150m 1

MOST CANNON ARTILLERY IS MORE ACCURATE.

Caliber World War II 1970s

105-mm 22.1 14.6

155-mm 25.8 11.4

Accuracy ratios by Circular Error Probable (CEP) (charge 7 at 7,000 meters)

VI INTRODUCTION FM 6-20-1

CANNON BATTALIONS OF HEAVY DIVISIONS HAVE AN INCREASED RANGE CAPABILITY 1970s 155-mm SP

(6 guns) ^ -4

WW II

105-mm < .u-i Towed (6 guns) V, -, Kilometers 10 11 18 20

Cannon battalions are found in all US Army corps, divisions, and separate maneuver brigades. They are generally organized with a headquarters battery to provide for command control and some combat service support, a service battery ^ to provide other combat service support, and three firing batteries to provide the firepower. In some battalions, the headquarters and service batteries are combined with a single headquarters and service battery.

Tables of organization and equipment detail manpower and equipment authorizations for US Army units. However, all Army units are organized under modified tables of organization and equipment (MTOE). To determine manpower and equipment authori- zations for a specific unit, it is necessary to refer to the authorization document (MTOE) for that unit.

Cannon battalions are in armored, mechanized, infantry, airborne, and air assault divisions. They are also in field

VII FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

artillery and separate maneuver CALIBER brigades. US Army cannon battalions CLASSIF CATION can be classified into three categories according to the caliber of the cannon in the battalion. As a general rule, light and medium battalions are in infantry, Si airborne, and air assault divisions; ft medium and heavy battalions are in armored and mechanized infantry LIGHT divisions. (120-mm or less) Cannon battalions are part of a combined arms team of tanks, infantry, cavalry, air defense, and field artillery. They are organized to deliver a variety of nuclear and nonnuclear munitions in support of maneuver arms.

This manual describes how cannon battalions fight, how they are organized, MEDIUM and how they operate to support combined arms operations. Battle in (121-mm—160-mm) Central Europe against forces of the Warsaw Pact is the most demanding mission the US Army could be assigned. Because the US Army is structured primarily for that contingency and has large forces deployed in that area, this it- r- manual is designed mainly to deal with such operations. The principles set forth HEAVY in this manual, however, apply to military operations anywhere in the (161-mm—210-mm) world. FM 6-20-

CHAPTER 1:

Field Artillery Cannon Battalion Operations

The mission of the field artillery is to destroy, neutralize, or suppress the enemy by indirect fires and to integrate all fire support into combat operations. Successful execution of this mission demands effective integration of field artillery fires into the scheme of maneuver and swift, exact execution from the time a target is acquired until ordnance is delivered on target.

IN SUPPORT OF THE FIELD ARTILLERY MISSION, THE FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION PROVIDES:

O Fires on enemy command posts and logistical installa- tions.

□ Close support to maneuver DFire support planning and units in combat. coordination resources and facilities to all levels of □Counterfire against enemy supported maneuver ele- indirect fire systems. ments.

1 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

For the cannon battalion to support This chapter will discuss field artillery maneuver forces on the battlefield cannon battalion operations in terms of successfully, it must accomplish 10 basic these 10 tasks and how to survive to tasks. perform them. CANNON BATTALION BASIC TASKS

TARGET ACQUISITION » 4 POSITIONING

METEOROLOGY, SURVEY, » TECHNICAL RECONNAISSANCE FIRE DIRECTION

•Jan AY8001 AY8001 DISPLACEMENT FIRE PLANNING -fallí

TACTICAL FIRE COMMUNICATIONS tlSl CONTROL

COMBAT SERVICE PLANS AND ORDERS SUPPORT

1-2 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION OPERATIONS FM 6-20-1

Target acquisition. Organic resources. The purpose of target S2. The battalion intelligence officer (S2) acquisition (TA) is to is the target acquisition staff a develop target locations coordinator. He insures that organic or with sufficient accuracy so attached target acquisition resources are that they can be attacked. used efficiently and effectively. Direct support (DS) and The S2 works with the fire support reinforcing battalions are primarily officers (FSO), fire support teams (FIST), interested in detecting and engaging liaison sections, maneuver unit S2s, targets that threaten maneuver elements adjacent units, battery fire direction of the supported brigade; e.g., antitank officers (FDO), and any other targeting guided missile (ATOM) positions, information source. He works closely observation posts (OP), and artillery with the supported unit intelligence units. General support (GS) and general officer to provide the best target support reinforcing (GSR) battalions are acquisition support for the operation. primarily interested in targets that A target acquisition capabilities chart concern the entire division; e.g., division may be prepared using visibility combat outpost locations, divisional diagrams from radar sections and second echelon regiments, and artillery observers. This chart is used to plan units. For a detailed description of target coverage for unobserved areas. A copy is acquisiton operations, see FM 6-121 Field sent to the division artillery tactical \Artillery Target Acquisition. operations center (TOC).

TARGET ACQUISITION CAPABILITIES CHART

LEGEND:

^ OBSERVATION POST

O SOUND RANGING MICROPHONES > & RADAR c & t7

m X r -n i : m r *

1-3 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

IS « FIST. Fire support teams located with the supported companies are important parts of the target acquisition effort. They are principal sources of visually acquired targets for the aft battalion and have direct access to targeting information from other personnel of the cs company. Normally, the FIST chief reports information directly to the maneuver battalion fire support officer. The maneuver brigade and DO battalion FSOs pass this information to the direct support battalion S2.

FIST CHIEF PASSES INFORMATION >TQJHE FSO -,

Observation posts. When survey designates the location of the battalion OP, requirements are complete, battalion and coordinates the search for targets. Each observation posts should be established and OP completes a visibility diagram and, if manned by personnel from the survey section. directed, submits it to the S2. The S2 integrates The observers can provide valuable target these diagrams into the target acquisition intelligence, call for fires, and maximize capabilities overlay before it is sent to division observation capabilities. The S2 briefs artillery. FM 6-121 discusses visibility diagrams personnel who will operate the OPs, and target acquisition capabilities overlays in detail.

CO

ñ

VW\

SLÄ

1-4 FIELO ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION OPERATIONS FM 6-20-1

Nonorganic resources.

Weapon locating radar. Weapon locating operations/flre direction center (ops/FDC) radars (WLR) will often be attached to cannon immediately of hostile firing, so the ops/FDC battalions. The S2, working with the S3, can notify the radar of the activity and the determines the general position and sector of sector and direction In which it is occurring. search of the radar. The radar technician then This process is called cuing. The radar sites the radar on the ground to maximize operator then turns on his radar and acquires effectiveness and minimize vulnerability. The the enemy firing unit. battalion survey section provides survey to the radar as soon as possible, or the radar section uses hasty survey to become operational. The radar reports targets to the battalion fire direction center (FDC) where the target is either attacked or passed directly to the division artillery tactical operations center for attack. To decrease its vulnerability to enemy direction-finding (DF) means and subsequent AN/TPQ-37 attack, the radar should be turned on only when enemy mortars and artillery are active. * All personnel must be trained to notify the

Moving target locating radar. The moving target locating radar (MTLR) is usually employed In general support of the division, but usually it is attached to or located with a cannon battalion because of positioning considerations and support requirements (e.g., security and survey). When the radar Is attached to a battalion, the employment considerations for the moving target locating AN/TPS-25A radar are generally the same as for the other radars. FM 6-121 contains additional information on field artillery radars.

AN/TPS-58 t 1-5 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION # an

Sound and flash ranging. Sound and locations with sufficient accuracy to justify fire flash platoons normally are employed in for effect (FFE) but can adjust fire on hostile general support of the division. However, they batteries using sound-on-sound adjustment may be attached to or report to a cannon (usually within one or two adjustments) or battalion In certain situations, such as during observed fire procedures. Targets developed establishment of a hasty sound base prior to using the sound and flash platoon can be either completion of survey. Under these conditions, attacked or passed directly to the division the sound base cannot provide hostile battery artillery TOC for attack.

FLASH OBSERVATION POST A

&

OU W

Field artillery aerial observers. Aerial observer (FAAO) support should be requested observers have the capability to acquire targets from division artillery when other systems not visible to ground means and to cover large cannot provide the desired results. In an active areas rapidly. They are particularly useful in enemy air defense environment, aerial supporting fast-moving situations when they observation may be severely limited unless can fill in the gaps between and see deeper provisions are made for the suppression of than FIST observers. Field artillery aerial enemy air defense for the duration of the missions.

V r:

MOD r^'aoj-ir

œnô RG ET AC ITIO ATlOf U

1-6 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION OPERATIONS FM 6-20-1

Electronic warfare. Electronic warfare (EW) systems can acquire targets through the! analysis of electronic emissions and message traffic. These sites require survey support from ca the field artillery. Division artillery survey 7/W sections can provide this support or coordinate with the battalion closest to the site to provide the survey. On occasion, the division artillery TOC may arrange for certain kinds of target information to be sent directly from the electronic warfare Intelligence operations center to a general support or general support reinforcing battalion. These arrangements would Include guidance for attack of the targets. Fast reaction maHi. to these event-triggered reports is essential. / â?ÈcCTRONIC SIGNAL INTERCEPTION

Jllmn

Meteorology, survey, and massed fires. Validity of met data will technical fire direction. vary depending on the distance between the station and the firing elements. Based on the location of the met station The S3 insures that FDCs and the cannon battalion, the S3 must have the information they determine whether to use or disregard the Sm need to conduct effective data. See FM 6-15, Field Artillery fire direction. This infor- Meteorology. mation includes: Survey. Survey is the means to Meteorology (MET). Met messages accurate locations and directional provide information on atmospheric control for weapons and target conditions that affect projectile tra- acquisition means. Survey establishes a jectories and the efficiency of some target common grid and direction, which allow acquisition equipment. These messages massing of fires. will be sent to the battalion over the field The field artillery battalion survey artillery brigade or division artillery section is responsible for providing command fire net, amplitude modulated survey control to all of the firing elements radio teletypewriter (AM RATT). Bat- and attached radars. A target area and talion ops/FDC section must forward the connection area survey (described in FM met message to the firing batteries to in- 6-121) will also be conducted when sure rapid dissemination andusefor accurate possible.

1-7 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

^S4321i|1234gg^i The amount of TIME and RESOURCES SURVEY «»METHODS available, balanced against REQUIRE- MENTS and the SITUATION dictate the SURVEY METHODS and the resultant accuracies.

REQUIREMENTS TIME SITUATION RESOURCES

Normally, division artillery survey will Mission/accuracy. The mission of provide starting control for battalion survey is to place target acquisition operations; however, this control means, firing units, and targets on a frequently must be assumed and the common grid system. In his mission survey converted to common control. analysis, the commander will give Control will be determined using the guidance to survey personnel concerning most reliable sources available. the use of hasty versus deliberate survey techniques.

The commander's guidance for survey must be clear in advance of the operation. Time. The time available to complete the For example: What will be the policy for survey operation is the most critical surveying alternate, supplementary, and factor in planning. Survey leaders should offset registration positions? How many use the survey techniques necessary to OPs must be surveyed? Much of this provide the best survey data within the guidance can be maintained in the unit prescribed time. A tradeoff between standing operating procedures (SOP), accuracy and time limitations may be but it is the guidance from the made depending on the tactical situation. commander and the subsequent supervision that will insure adequate Weather. Fog, rain, snow, or dust can surveÿ. A decision how and where to reduce optical instrument visibility. survey may depend on several factors: Reduced visibility requires shorter

1-8 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION OPERATIONS FM 6-20-1

distances between stations and more survey parties. The capabilities of the angle turning. During periods of poor enemy to interfere with survey visibility, the commander may choose to operations by denying the use of terrain put his survey effort on locating his or routes are of prime importance. During weapon locating radar accurately so that periods when survey operations are it can locate his firing units. In this restricted, the commander could give situation, the survey instrument azimuth priority of survey to those units gyro lightweight would be used to supporting the main attack or the most establish common direction. Extreme vulnerable area. heat or cold can also reduce survey party personnel efficiency, thus increasing the Registrations provide accurate firing time needed to complete the survey. data. There are several ways to register:

• Precision, high-burst (HB), or mean- point-of-impact (MPI) registrations. Tactical situation. The enemy and friendly situations have a strong • Abbreviated HB/MPI or precision influence on survey operations, since the registrations. disposition of troops may interfere with • Offset registrations. c or restrict movement of survey personnel L and their equipment. Restrictions on • Registrations to the rear also using communications, such as radio silence, abbreviated or complete precision, HB, ♦can greatly reduce the effectiveness of or MPI techniques.

Technical fire direction. Technical fire direction is the process of converting weapons and ammunition characteristics (muzzle velocities, propellant temperature, and projectile weight), weapon and target location, and meteorological information into firing data. The results are time, deflection, and quadrant. Battery and battalion fire direction centers both have a technical fire direction capability. Batteries normally conduct technical fire direction using Field Artillery Digital Automatic Computer (FADAC) with battalion providing tactical fire direction and technical assistance in case of overcommit- ment or breakdown. Detailed procedures for computing firing data are in FM 6-40, Field Artillery Cannon Gunnery. BATTERY FDC FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

Registrations, however, provide the whether to register or not, the following enemy a good opportunity to locate firing chart may serve as a guide. units. When it is necessary to decide

DO YOU HAVE CONFIDENCE IN:

WEAPON LOCATION MUZZLE SHOOT AND m MET? ÏÏ DIRECTION? VELOCITY? MET+VE m

IS THE ACCURACY GAINED BY REGISTRATION WORTH THE VULNERABILITY? AMMO? TIME? REGISTER SHOOT REDUCE LOCATION REGISTRATION # ÏÏ ERROR CORRECTIONS DETERMINE POSITION VE ADJUST FIRE (OBSERVED FIRES) • PREC REG? SHOOT BEST • HB/MPI REG? AVAILABLE DATA ® ABBREVIATED? (UNOBSERVED FIRES) «OFFSET? • TO THE REAR?

The advantages and disadvantages of Weapon calibration improves firing each type of registration are discussed in accuracy. Using valid muzzle velocities detail in FM 6-40. and current meteorology data combined All the met, survey, registrations, and with a precision registration, the precise technical fire direction battalion can deliver accurate massed procedures are degraded if the weapons surprise fires. Chronographs used to are not capable of performing as they are determine muzzle velocity are found in designed to perform. the division artillery and corps support

1-10 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION OPERATIONS FM 6-20-1 command direct support units. All In recommending a policy on the degree weapons should be calibrated as often as of control exercised by battalion FDC, the situation, time, ammunition, and S3 should consider: changes in velocity errors (VE) indicate. When this is not practical, usually # The quality, experience, and state of weapons can be calibrated for those training of the battery and battalion charges most frequently used. FDC. The better the battery FDC, the Fire control alinement teats insure more decentralization is possible. that cannons can be laid accurately on # The tempo of battle. In rapidly moving the target. These tests frequently are situations, decentralization will overlooked in the heat of battle, but the increase responsiveness. most current meteorology, muzzle velocity, and registration data will not 0 The existence of operations orders and help if weapons are not pointed in the SOPs outlining the number of rounds right direction. Technical manuals and shell/fuze combinations for the contain detailed descriptions of these attack of specified types of targets. tests. O The reliability of communications between observers, thÿ battalion FDC, and battery FDCs'. Inability to communicate with the battalion FDC will result in less centralization. Tactical fire direction. # The extent to which the operations being supported are centralized or decentralized. The more centrally Tactical fire direction controlled the operation, the more includes selection of centrally controlled fire direction must number of rounds, shell/ be. MSim fuze combination, and designation of units to fire. Control policy. The cannon battalion Battalion fire direction officer. commander should establish a clear The battalion FDO supervises the fire policy that states the degree to which direction center. Based on the nature of centralized control should be exercised by the target and the guidance of the battalion fire direction center. Control battalion commander and/or the S3, the may range from a highly centralized FDO will decide when to mass fires and situation, in which all fire missions are determine or approve number of rounds sent to the battalion FDC where data is computed and fire commands sent to and shell/fuze combinations regardless batteries, to a totally decentralized mode, of whether the mission was sent to the in which both tactical and technical fire battery or to the battalion. The FDO is direction are conducted at battery level responsible for insuring that the and battalion FDC monitors and batteries and battalion have the same interrupts only if a change is necessary. data, both computer and manual.

in FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

Operations section. The S3 is also attack determined. This is a part of the ' responsible for the operations portion of tactical fire direction process. Target the operations/fire direction section. The analysis to the field artillery battalion operations section prepares the field FDO is the examination of a target to artillery support plan (when assigned the determine its significance to the DS mission), maintains the target list maneuver force, based on guidance worksheet for the battalion, prepares established by the supported maneuver scheduling worksheets (groups, commander, and to determine the preparations, series, etc.), and plans and capability and suitability of battalion coordinates all other battalion cannons and ammunition to attack the operations, such as movements and target. occupations of positions. See FM 6-20, Fire Support in Combined Arms Detailed nonnuclear target analysis Operations. procedures are in FM 6-20; FM 6-141-1, Field Artillery Target Analysis; and in Processing fire missions. When Joint Munitions Effectiveness Manuals targets are received in the FDC for (JMEM) indexed in DA Pam 310-3, Index attack, they must be analyzed quickly of Doctrinal, Training, and Organi- and the best or^ most effective method of zational Publications.

CONSIDERATIONS FOR PROCESSING FIRE MISSIONS

• The target. Tanks and exposed Infantry accuracy to do any more than suppress a require different shell/fuze combinations and general area. The maneuver commander must ammunition expenditures. High explosive know this if he expects the target to be (HE), variable time (VT) may kill exposed neutralized or destroyed. troops, but It will not stop a tank. • The target priority. During peak firing periods, • Terrain in the target area. An example of some targets will not be fired on because there terrain influence is the degrading effects are not enough guns/ammunition to go forests have on VT-fuzed projectiles and around. The decision to attack is based upon improved conventional munitions (ICM). the maneuver commander's assessment of which targets are most critical to the • Effect required. The right shell/fuze operation. combination must be selected and the number of rounds needed to destroy, neutralize, or • Target location. Some targets may be very suppress a target must be determined. close to friendly troops, which may preclude some types of ammunition from being fired. • Ammunition available. During peak firing • Accuracy of target location. It may not be periods or rapid movements, ammunition may possible to locate a target with sufficient be available for only the most critical targets.

1-12 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION OPERATIONS FM 6-20-1

Massing fires. The preferred # Batteries fire In a battalion time on target. engagement method for many targets is Using this procedure, all rounds arrive in the surprise massed fires because the enemy target area simultaneously, eliminating reaction time for the enemy. This method is cannot react and seek protection before particularly lethal against lightly protected he is hit. troops, but It requires accurate target location, common survey within the battalion, valid firing data corrections, and battalion command control of the mission. METHODS OF MASSING FIRES

# Batteries receive target location, report to • Batteries receive target location and fire when battalion FDC when ready, and fire at the ready. Using this procedure, rounds may command of the battalion FDO. For this Impact In the target area for several minutes, method to be effective, firing unit times of allowing the enemy time to react. flight must be about the same, and the batteries must be able to talk to battalion. This method requires minimal coordination, is fast, and can be as effective as a time on target (TOT). IS - i

Optimum target and shell/fuze combination matrix. How to engage targets effectively with respect to shell/fuze combinations and volleys of fire has long been an FDO dilemma. Currently, we have the Joint Munitions Effectiveness Manuals for the various caliber weapons as well as Graphical Munitions Effects Tables (GMET) to assist us in this area. However, these items will not always be responsive to the needs of the next battlefield when engaging targets of opportunity. It is difficult to consider rapidly all munitions effects data. Recommended volume of fire based on the JMEM or GMET data must also be tempered by ammunition availability.

M3 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

An approach to this problem is the matrix also gives area coverage for a ' optimum shell/fuze combination and battery one round and battalion one target matrix (figs 1-1, 1-2, and 1-3). This round to further enhance the FDO's matrix,based on data derived from ability to select a suitable shell/fuze JMEM, does not give percentages of combination and volume of fire. With the effects but rather, in priority, optimum area coverages listed, it may also be an shell/fuze combinations to use against indication to the FDO of when to mass both personnel and materiel targets. This fire.

PERSONNELTARGETS

Numbers listed do not indicate recommended number of rounds.

TARGETTYPE SIZE(m) HE/PD HE/tl HE/VT HE/CP WP/PD HC/tl ICM/AP ICM/DP

SQUAD/SMALL PATROL/SMALL SO 5th 4th 3d 5th 2d 1st UNIT HQ PLATOON/ 150-250 5th 5th COMPANY 4th 3d 2d 1st

BATTALION 250-500 4th 3d 2d 1st

OBSERVATION/ 50 5th 4th 3d 6th 5th 2d 1st COMMANDPOST

Figure 1-1. * Shell/fuze combination is not appropriate for target type to produce a significant number of casualties. ** With maneuver approval, HC/ti can be used in conjunction with HE or ICM to increase enemy command control problems and consequently may indirectly increase effect of HE or ICM on any personnel target type.

Notes. 1. All targets are considered in open terrain as opposed to wooded or marshy terrain. 2. If theHarget area is wooded, the use of HE/VT may achieve an excessively high airburst. . 3. If the target area is marshy, effects of HE/PD are greatly reduced. 4. Optimum shell/fuze combinations are listed in descending order. 5. For all personnel-type targets, one-half are considered standing and one-half are prone on the first volley of FFE and all personnel are considered prone on subsequent volleys. If the personnel are crouching in foxholes, then ICM/DP will have very little effect. 6. HE/CP is considered only when the type target would be expected to have overhead cover.

1-14 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION OPERATIONS FM 6-20-1

MATER I EL TARGETS EXPECTED t EXPECTED AREA OF COVERAGE (m) FRACTION OF TARGET CASUALTIES TYPE SIZE(m) HE/PD HE/ti HE/VT HE/CP WP/PD HC/tl ICM/AP ICM/DP REMARKS T-55 Converged sheet in- ■CM SQUARE CIRCLE (RADIUS) RT = 50 TANK/ 50-250 2d 4th 3d 5th 1st creases percentage APC of damage. BTRY © 266 x 266 150 .15 Converged sheaf sig- BN © 390 x 390 220 .35 MG nificantly Increases BUNKER 50 2d 5th 4th 1st 3d percentage of dam- age. T arget consid- ered to have over- HE SQUARE CIRCLE (RADIUS) PD VT head cover. BTRY © 275 x 275 155 .03 .05 Converged sheaf sig- AAA nificantly more effec- BN © 390 x 390 220 .11 .16 RADAR 50 4th 3d 2d 5th 1st tive. HE/VT approx VAN 3% more effective than HE/PD. Figure 1-3. Z1L157 HE/PD approx2% f This does not consider density of coverage. MEDIUM 50-250 2d 4th 3d 6th 5th 1st more effective than Note. Expected fraction of damage for materiel targets will be .03 or less for a TRUCK HE/VT. bn © except for trucks. Expected fraction of damage for trucks will be slightly less than that for personnel. Percentageof dam- age for PD and VT vir- tually same. Con- FROG 50 2d 3d 2d 5th 4th 1st verged sheaf signifi- cantly increases damage. HE/PD approx 3% FROG- more effective than TACTICAL 50 2d 4th 3d 6th 5th 1st HE/VT. ACRONYMS FOR TABLES 140-mm Damage relatively in- ROCKET significant until an (HC/ti) (ICM/AP) AND 125 2d 4th 3d 5th 6th 1st excessive number of hexachloroethane (smoke)/time improved conventional munitions/ LAUNCH- rounds fired unless antipersonnel ER ICM/DP is used. (HE/CP) high explosive/concrete piercing (ICM/DP) 152-mm improved conventional munitions/dual GUN/ 125 2d 4th 3d 5th 6th 1st See note 3 below. (HE/PD), purpose HOWITZER high explosive/point detonating (RT) (HE/ti) radius of target Figure 1-2. high explosive/time Notes. 1. Notes 1-3 from figure 1-1 apply. ! (TLE) 2. FDO must be familiar with type equipment so that other materiel targets can be equated (HE/VT) target location error to those listed. high explosive/variable time 3. Converged sheaf recommended. If CEP in TLE is 50 meters, virtually no damage to equip- (WP/PD) ment until the number of rounds is excessive; however, damage could be achieved on personnel white phosphorus/point detonating with the equipment.

1-15 FOLDIN FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

A good FDO trains for his job before device. The assets required to neutralize a combat. When the battle starts, there will target vary according to the type and size not be time to ponder voluminous tables of the target and the weapon- or charts. Responsive fires require FDOs ammunition combination used. capable of making sound, instantaneous Destruction. Destruction puts the decisions in an environment of rapidly target out of action permanently. Thirty changing situations. percent or more casualties or materiel damage, inflicted during a short time Field artillery fire planning. period, normally renders a unit permanently ineffective, depending on Field artillery fires are the type and discipline of the enemy planned to achieve one of force. Direct hits are required to destroy AY8001 three effects on the target: hard materiel targets. Targets must be suppression, neutraliza- located by accurate map inspection, by tion, or destruction. The indirect fire adjustment, or by a target desired effect will be acquisition device. The assets required determined by the supported unit vary. However, destruction usually commander, the fire support coordinator requires large expenditures of (FS COORD), or the fire direction officer. ammunition from many units. Destruction of armored or dug-in targets Suppression. Suppression of a target with field artillery is not economical. limits the ability of the enemy personnel Field artillery fire planning at maneuver in the target area. Firing HE/VT creates brigade level is the responsibility of the apprehension or surprise and causes direct support field artillery battalion. tanks to stay buttoned up, reducing their The S3, S2, FISTs, FSOs, battery FDCs, combat effectiveness. Smoke is used to and battalion ops/FDC section are all blind or confuse enemy gunners, involved in field artillery fire planning. observers, and leaders. The effect of Initial guidance for planning field suppressive fires usually lasts only as artillery fires is received in the force long as the fires are continued. This type commander's concept of the operation, fire is used against likely, suspect, or which includes the scheme of maneuver inaccurately located enemy firing and the general plan of fire support. Fire positions and normally requires a low planning begins then and is a continuous expenditure of ammunition. process that takes place concurrently at all levels of command. Neutralization. Neutralization of a target knocks the target out of the battle The focal point for field artillery fire temporarily. As a general rule, 10 percent planning at maneuver brigade level is the or more casualties will neutralize a unit. direct support field artillery battalion The unit will become effective again ops/FDC. Under the battalion when the casualties are replaced and commander's direction, the S3 plans field damage is repaired. Neutralization fires artillery fires in support of the maneuver are delivered against targets located by commander's concept of operation. He accurate map inspection, by indirect fire receives targets from the maneuver adjustment, or by a target acquisition battalion FSOs, the brigade FSO, the

1 15 FOLDCUT 1-16 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION OPERATIONS FM 6-20-1

division artillery TOC, adjacent field implement the plan and other special artillery units, and his own S2 and information on the employment of field attached target acquisition means. These artillery fires in support of the targets are plotted and any duplications operations. This information may be are resolved. Targets that the DS transmitted face to face or by radio on net battalion cannot adequately engage are calls. forwarded to the division artillery TOC or a reinforcing unit, if available. Appropriate FSOs and FDCs are notified © of changes made. The S3 determines in The target list contains all the what schedule or schedules each target information required for the attack of will be placed and issues a fire order targets included in the plan. It is stating when and how the target will be extracted from the target list worksheet attacked and what type and quantity of and may be transmitted by voice, ammunition will be expended on the message, or messenger separately and in target. segments depending on time available. As the targets are received in the battalion ops/FDC, the operations section records the target on the target © list worksheet. After the S3 decides in The schedules are included to assign what schedules the target will be firing units to each target in each included, the operations section places schedule and tell them in what order, the target on a scheduling worksheet. with what type and amount of When the targets are scheduled and the ammunition, and at what time to attack documents prepared, the S3 issues his each target. FM 6-20, appendix I, has field artillery support plan to organic, detailed procedures on the preparation of attached, and reinforcing field artillery the field artillery support plan. units. This may be in the form of a complete field artillery support plan, frag Plans and orders. orders, or oral orders to executing units, depending on the time available. The field artillery support plan is prepared by Command control of the DS field artillery battalion ops/FDC the field artillery cannon and issued to the executing field artillery battalion is established units. i through the assignment of When a field artillery support plan is tactical missions. From prepared, it will contain, as a minimum, these missiqns, the bat- three elements: the basic document, talion commander derives specific fire target list, and appropriate schedules. support responsibilities to the supported maneuver force. Field artillery cannon battalion o missions. Field artillery tactical The basic document provides necessary missions describe in detail the fire guidance for receiving units to support responsibilities of a field artillery

1-17 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION unit and establish the fire support The direct support cannon battalion relationship with a maneuver unit or commander is the fire support another field artillery unit; they do not coordinator for the supported maneuver affect the organizational structure and force, normally a maneuver brigade. the command relationships that result Fires are planned and coordinated with from that structure. Field artillery the maneuver unit, and the battalion is tactical missions are assigned by the positioned where it can best support the force commander on the advice of the scheme of maneuver. If the cannon force artillery commander, who is the fire battalion cannot provide the support support coordinator for the force. required for a planned scheme of Each field artillery tactical mission maneuver, it is the responsibility of the answers the following seven basic FSCOORD to make this known to the questions concerning field artillery supported maneuver commander. The support responsibilities: same cannon battalion should habitually support the same maneuver force in order to provide for good teamwork. # From whom and in what priority does Each direct support battalion trains and the unit answer calls for fire? deploys fire support sections and FISTs. # What is the zone of fire of the unit? It sends one fire support section to the # Who furnishes FIST or FSO? designated maneuver brigade, one to # With whom does the unit establish each of the brigade’s battalions, and a liaison? FIST to each of the brigade’s maneuver # With whom does the unit establish companies. After initial deployment, fire communications? support sections and FISTs will remain # Who positions the unit? with the maneuver unit throughout the # Who plans the fires of the unit? conflict. Fire support sections and FISTs to Field artillery cannon battalions best support the divisional cavalry squadrons meet their fire support responsibilities will be trained and deployed by most of the time through one of four basic divisional general support battalions tactical missions, referred to as direct (headquarters and headquarters battery support, reinforcing, general support (HHB) of division artillery for airborne reinforcing, and general support. Each divisions). mission specifies the particular way of meeting each of the seven responsibilities described above. These responsibilities in The responsibility for immediate each of the7 tactical missions are replacements for casualty losses to fire discussed below and are summarized in support section and FIST personnel and figure 1-4. equipment rests with the field artillery battalion with the DS mission. Similarly, Direct support. A cannon battalion supply and maintenance support should operating in direct support of a maneuver be specified in terms of what the unit is primarily concerned with the field supported unit will provide and what the artillery support needs of only that unit. parent battalion will provide. FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION OPERATIONS FM 6-20-1

RESPONSIBILITIES OF FIELD ARTILLERY TACTICAL MISSIONS

An FA unit General with a Direct Support General mission of—- Support Reinforcing Reinforcing Support

1. A1. Supported nswers1. Reinforced calls 1. Force FA HQ 1. Force FA HQ for fire in priority unit FA 2. Reinforced 2. Own observ- from— 2. Own observ- 2. Own observ- unit ers* ers* ers* 3. Own observ- 3. Force FA HQ 3. Force FA HQ ers*

2. Has as its Zone of action of Zone of fire of Zone of action of Zone of action of zone of fire— supported unit reinforced FA supported unit to supported unit Include zone of fire of reinforced FA unit 3. Furnishes Provides tempo- No requirement No requirement No requirement FIST/FSO**— rary replace- ments of casual- ty losses as required. 4. Furnishes No requirement LO to reinforced LO to reinforced No requirement liaison officer FA unit HQ FA unit HQ 5. Establishes FIST chiefs, Reinforced FA Reinforced FA No requirement communications FSOs, and sup- unit HQ unit HQ with— ported maneuver unit HQ 6. is positioned DS FA unit com- Reinforced FA Force FA HQ or Force FA HQ by— mander or as unit or as or- reinforced FA ordered by force dered by force unit if approved FA HQ FA HQ by force FA HQ

7. Has its fires Develops own Reinforced FA Force FA HQ Force FA HQ planned by— fire plans unit HQ

Figure 1-4. * Includes all target acquisiton means not deployed with supported unit (radar, aerial observer, survey parties, etc.) ** A fire support section (FSO tm) for each maneuver brigade and battalion/cavalry squadron and a fire support team for each maneuver company/ground cavalry troop are trained and deployed by the FA unit authorized these assets by table of organization and equipment. After deployment, FISTs and FSO teams will remain with the supported maneuver unit throughout the conflict.

1-19 FM $-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

Reinforcing. Cannon battalions Nonstandard, missions. In tactical reinforce other cannon battalions that situations where the commander's intent support maneuver forces. When a cannon cannot be accurately conveyed with one battalion requires augmentation of its of the standard field artillery tactical fires to meet the field artillery support missions, a nonstandard mission may be needs of a maneuver force, the assigned. Nonstandard missions reinforcing mission may be assigned to amplify, limit, or change one or more of another cannon battalion to meet that the seven mission responsibilities or spell need. A cannon battalion can reinforce out contingencies not covered by the only one other cannon battalion, but a seven responsibilities. Examples of reinforced cannon battalion can be nonstandard missions are: reinforced by more than one cannon battalion. The reinforcing mission allows a force artillery commander to increase the field artillery support of a 1si Bo (155, SP), 40tlh subordinate cannon unit without a FA: General support reioiorc- attachment. iog 1st Bo, 42d FA (ooS to w exceed 30 perceot of coo- (? trolled supply rate io reinforc- I ing 1st Bo, 42d FA). With this GSR mission requires the cannon noostaodard missioo, the battalion to furnish artillery fires for the battalion will still meet ail the force as a whole and to reinforce the fires A responsibilities of the general of another cannon battalion as a second support reinforcing mission, it priority. A GSR battalion remains under will not, however, expend more the control of the force artillery than 30 percent of its con- trolled supply rate (CSR) in headquarters, which has priority of fires. answering calls for fire from the However, a quick-fire channel is 1st Bn, 42d FA. This revision of established for immediate response to the a GSR tactical mission insures reinforced battalion's need for additional availability of a certain amount fires. The GSR mission offers the force of ammunition for future commander flexibility to meet the operations. requirements of a variety of tactical situations.

General support. A cannon battalion assigned the mission of GS provides field 2d Bn (155, SP), 64th FA: Rein- artillery support for the force as a whole force 2d Bn, 61 sf FA (force and remains under the immediate control a of the force artillery headquarters. The ED positioning authority for2d Bn, GS mission provides cannon artillery 64th FA). This nonstandard immediately responsive to the needs of [L mission changes one of the the force commander. The GS mission is responsibilities of a reinforcing the most centralized of the tactical mission. missions. FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION OPERATIONS FM 6-20-1

soon as possible. Timely warning orders facilitate future operations by alerting units and giving them time to prepare for a 1st Bn (8, SP), 43d FA: General mission changes. They are usually brief support; answer calls for fire oral or written messages. sa from 1st Sqdn, 23d Cav, in p priority after force artillery Operation orders can alert units to anticipate changes. For example: i headquarters. This nonstand- ard mission does not basically affect the unit's tactical mission of general support; it i simply affords a degree of 40 155 responsiveness from this FA SP GSR battalion to a nearby maneuver 41 FA (155 SP on order element that needs fire DS 1st Bde support. Implementation of this revision would probably require no more than agree- ment on a communications channel. This tells the 1st Bn, 40th FA, commander that when the 1st Bde is committed, he is in direct support of the brigade. He can prepare for this mission f the revision of a mission is so complex by establishing communications with hat the standard field artillery tactical the 1st Bde and participating in brigade mission is no longer recognizable, a battle planning. nonstandard mission statement will be issued that specifically addresses each of When the operation begins, orders are the seven responsibilities or other areas oral and brief. Most often they are not covered by the seven responsibilities. mission changes or instructions to move. If the staff and batteries are familiar with Issuing orders. Before a battle, there the commander's operational concept may be time to consider in detail what and the original order, brief orders are must be done to support the maneuver sufficient. force and prepare written plans and orders. During battle, however, the The troop leading process. The use battalion commander may have only a of troop leading procedures allows few hours or minutes to plan before available time to be used efficiently for executing a tactical mission. He will preparation to respond to changing probably issue most of his plans and missions. The process is not rigid. orders verbally using notes—based on Cannon battalion commanders modify it the five-paragraph field order format to fit the mission, situation, and described in FM 101-5, Staff Operations. available time. All the steps, however, When possible, the commander should should be covered, even if each takes only give his orders on the terrain to be a few seconds. Some steps are taken occupied. Warning orders about new or concurrently; some go on continuously changed missions should be given as throughout the mission.

1-21 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

time it starts, and the time and place THE TROOP LEADING STEPS for issuance of the complete order. This permits better use of time A. Receive the mission. available to plan and prepare. A B. Issue the warning order. warning order is usually issued orally. C. Make a tentative plan to accomplish the mission. Make a tentative plan. The D. Initiate the necessary movement commander should make a tentative sequence. plan of how he intends to accomplish E. Reconnoiter. the mission. When the mission is F. Complete the plan. complex and time is available, he may make a fairly formal mental G. Issue orders. estimate, following the procedures H. Supervise and refine. outlined in FM 101-5. When the mission is uncomplicated Receive the mission. Leaders or time is short, he will make this may receive a mission in either an mental estimate very quickly. The oral or written operation order or a commander knows his own fragmentary order. Upon receipt of situation, knows as much about the an order, the leader analyzes his enemy as he can under the specific mission to be certain he understands circumstances, knows the missiom what is to be done and plans the use and what it requires, and applies air of available time. Often the most of this to the terrain in the assigned critical resource when a cannon area. The tentative plan he develops battalion receives a new mission is is the basis for coordination, unit time, especially daylight hours. The movement, reallocation of resources, commander must not waste time if any, and reconnaissance. that can be used by subordinate The cannon battalion mission will commanders for reconnaissance usually be stated in specific terms as and planning of their own. A to who, what, when, and where. The reasonable rule of thumb is: use no how is left to the commander to more than one-third the available decide. He must apply the funda- time for planning by the battalion mentals so that he optimizes the headquarters and leave two-thirds capabilities of his organic, attached, for the commanders and leaders of and supporting systems; minimizes subordinate units. their vulnerabilities; and accom- plishes the mission. His tentative Issue the warning order. A plan is a direct, simple expression of I leader gives a warning order how. immediately after receipt of a warning order from higher Initiate necessary movement. headquarters. He does this by telling The battalion commander will have his subordinates the mission, the B many important matters on his

1-22 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION OPERATIONS FM 6-20-1

mind at this point. Often the driving a map reconnaissance. But if any consideration is the absolute time at all is available and if the necessity to make good use of the commander has the first four steps available time so that subordinate I in hand, he must get out on the commanders and the battalion staff terrain. It is during this reconnais- can reconnoiter, move, prepare, and sance that the commander confirms fit their units and weapons to the his tentative plan or modifies it to ground. magnify every advantage of his If the battalion must move a weapons and afford maximum considerable distance, it should be survivability for his troops. He will usually want some assistants with set in motion immediately based on him to save time and to add their the first rough concept. This permits skills to his. advance parties and surveyors to get on the ground early. Then the Complete the plan. As a result of commander needs to get out on the the reconnaissance, the commander ground and see for himself how to I may not alter his tentative plan, but best employ the combat power of his he certainly will add detail. He will battalion. The commander must refine his concept and plan for fire have a smooth system, a standing support and will focus upon specific operating procedure, to permit all tasks for all units, insuring that all these actions to proceed simultane- fit together simply and effectively. ously so that no time is wasted. Brief oral orders must generate G Issue orders. Most orders are instant movement by every ele- G issued orally, sometimes from a ment of the battalion. When the handwritten five-paragraph field commander is called to receive an order outline and a sketch or overlay. order, he should take with him some If the battalion commander has other person of authority who can made a reconnaissance, he will return to the unit to issue a follow-on usually issue orders from a vantage warning order, prepare the unit, and, point in the assigned area. This if necessary, move it. This person permits him to point out particular terrain features on the ground as can be the executive officer or S3. With these activities under control, well as on the map and eliminates the commander can make his time that might be spent in driving reconnaissance, confirm or modify back to a command post to speak to subordinates who would then drive his tentative plan, and prepare to forward to reconnoiter. The issue his final order while the commander may issue overlays with battalion is moving to its new position. his order, but more often he will have only his own map available with E Reconnoiter. To make best use of control measures sketched on it. He E his forces and fires, the commander then requires subordinate com- must see the assigned terrain. There manders to copy this information on will be times when he can make only their own maps. If the entire

1-23 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

battalion is moving or is already Supervise and refine. The involved in an operation, he may H commander and his staff must issue orders over the radio or by supervise to insure that all messenger, or he may meet each necessary preparations for conduct commander in turn to instruct him of the operation are being made. face to face, while the unit continues These include coordination with the its activity. The commander should supported force and higher make absolutely clear his concept for headquarters, allocation of the operation from beginning to end; resources, survivability considera- that is, how he sees the battle being tions, and any other required fought and what he expects from actions. When the operation is each subordinate leader. The underway, the commander must commander should also prescribe insure that the plan is followed and what actions his subordinate leaders must issue fragmentary orders to should take under foreseeable modify or refine the operation as the situations in the event the situation develops. The requirement commander is out of communication to supervise is continuous and as for some reason. important as issuing orders.

Positioning. i

The term "battalion (bat- tery) position" is defined as that area occupied, or to be occupied, by the battalion (battery) with its elements disposed to provide fire support. Position areas designated in orders, on maps, or on overlays do not constitute a rigid restrictive area for the batteries. They should be considered only as guides to be followed as closely as the mission, terrain, and tactical situation permit. The planning for the selection of any position must include consideration of communication requirements and combat service support.

Position classification. A primary position is a position from which the battery intends to accomplish its tactical

1-24 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION OPERATIONS FM 6-20-1 mission. Plans should be made to Tactical situation. The supported organize and improve the primary force's mission and plans will influence position, although the tactical situation the location of the position and the way it may require displacement at any time. is improved. (Chapters 2 and 3 discuss the selection of positions during An alternate position is a position to offensive, defensive, and covering force which the battery moves when the operations.) primary position becomes untenable or unsuitable for carrying out the assigned Communication. The position areas task. The alternate position must meet all must facilitate communication, the requirements of the primary position particularly with FIST, the supported or so the battery can continue to fulfill its reinforced unit, and force artillery original task. The alternate position headquarters. The position should also must be far enough away to prevent its provide a measure of electronic security being rendered untenable by the same for radios and radars. action that affects the primary position. At least one alternate position should be Defilade. Defilade is protection from selected and prepared (consistent with enemy observation and direct fire time constraints) for each primary weapons by use of a terrain mask. The position. position area should be located in defilade but not so close to the mask that low-angle fire capabilities are restricted. A supplementary position is a temporary position to which the elements of the Defensibility. The position areas firing battery may move to accomplish a selected should facilitate both active and specific mission, such as to attack targets passive defense. The area selected that cannot be fired on from the primary should— or alternate position or to deceive the enemy as to the location of the primary # Be able to be entered without enemy position. Supplementary positions may observation. be occupied to conduct offset registra- # Offer effective cover and concealment. tions, adjust with a roving gun, fire on # Avoid high-speed approaches into the targets beyond the range of the primary position from the forward edge of the position, conduct nuclear missions, and battle area (FEBA) or potential defend the battery against ground breakthrough area. attack. # Have more than one entrance and exit route. Factors affecting the selection of # Have enough space to disperse position areas. equipment and facilities. Mission. The battalion must be able to FM 6-50, The Field Artillery Cannon accomplish its assigned mission from the Battery, discusses the defense of battery position. Position priority goes to positions in detail. The special security nuclear-capable units first, then to DS requirements for nuclear weapons are and reinforcing units, then to GSR and discussed in FM 100-50, Nuclear Unit GS units. Operations in Combat.

1-25 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

Trafficability. The soil within and for each subordinate element, and he between positions must be firm enough to must use this knowledge to provide an support battalion weapons and area that accounts for these considera- ammunition vehicles. tions. For example, if the space provided a battery is not large enough to sustain Weather. Current and anticipated an alternate position, the battery is in a weather conditions and the effect of vulnerable position. Another example weather on the terrain will influence the may be when the S3 needs to place selection of positions; e.g., a low area that batteries in forward supplemental can be occupied when dry may become a positions to engage targets beyond the swamp during or after a rain. range of the primary position. Methods of positioning cannon Enemy counterfire capabilities. The artillery units. In combat there are commander must consider the enemy two general methods of deploying field counterfire capabilities when selecting artillery units in position areas: positions. If the counterfire threat is large, the importance of defilade, # Position each firing battery in a concealment, electronic security, separate location, with the headquar- hardening of positions, and dispersed ters and service batteries positioned routes increases. together or in separate locations.

Effect on future operations. The # Position each firing battery in a position must enable the battalion to separate location. Establish a separate support later phases of the battle or TOC area. Establish a unit trains or, facilitate rapid movement to another when applicable, establish separate position to support the next phase. combat and field trains areas. The S3 must know the types of positions a In each method, firing elements have battery may occupy and the factors positioning priority, and preparation affecting selection of position areas. It is time required to carry out the mission is the S3 who designates the general area minimized. k

This illustration shows separate cannon battery position areas. The headquarters and service batteries are either collocated or in separate position areas. Normally, a battalion would use this method of positioning in a situation that does not require frequent moves by either the headquarters or service batteries.

1-26 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION OPERATIONS FM 6-20-1

* SEPARATE CANNON BATTERY POSITION AREAS

/ftr/t

Oh' iM^lcaMSSi

'S 5£

-esSL^Ss»- m *ö

ADVANTAGES DISADVANTAGES

High degree of passive defense against The combined HHB, svc btry position makes nuclear attack. this position easy to detect and hard to move.

Enemy action against one element of the Command, administration, and local security battalion should not require displacement of are more complex. the entire battalion. Lack of suitable position areas, time, and Enemy detection of the entire battalion is more routes may prevent use of this method. difficult.

1-27 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

This illustration shows separate cannon firing batteries. Normally, a battalion battery position areas, a separate would use this method of positioning in a command post area, a combat trains situation that requires frequent moves by area, and a field trains area. The the command element. Chapter 5 battalion command post (CP) should be discusses combat service support, the located in proximity to the brigade CP employment of unit trains, combat and close enough to command control the trains, and field trains. SEPARATE TRAINS (FLD, CBT), CP, AND CANNON BATTERIES

Na

s. *7 ' j tlasL UJLlÏMi • ‘It J

tL*~

L

xa. KE- £23

n».

ADVANTAGES DISADVANTAGES

Actions taken by an enemy against one Coordination for service support is more element will not necessarily affect other complicated. elements. Local security for the command control Facilitates support of maneuver operations. element is poor. The commander's flexibility is greater. Command, administration, and local security are more complex.

1-28 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION OPERATIONS FM 6-20-1 Reconnaissance. barrage as it occupies a position. available terrain. Types of reconnaissance. There are © three ways to reconnoiter—from a map, Ground reconnaissance is the best from the air, or on the ground. The best method for checking routes and selecting reconnaissance is done by combining all positions. The terrain can be walked on, three techniques. driven on, and looked at from different directions. Communication sites, position entrances and exits, cover, concealment, defilade, and trafficability © can all be checked. However, too much Map reconaissance is simply studying activity may reveal to the enemy where and analyzing a map to get a terrain the battalion plans to go next. appreciation and to determine where to Reconnaissance planning begins as a go and how to get there. This should be result of the commander's initiative, the first step in any reconnaissance. based on his knowledge of the battle, or Position areas and routes can be selected as a result of a change in orders. In either from a map, and this may be the only case, the commander and- his staff option available to the commander and coordinate with the supported maneuver staff. There are dangers, however, in force to insure neither is competing for reconnoitering only from a map. the same terrain. • Actual terrain conditions cannot be The commander should take only the determined. people and equipment necessary to help # Roads, towns, and terrain features may him formulate plans, issue orders, and have changed. select and prepare positions. It is normal # Other units may be in the positions. for the S2, S3, communications- # There may be enemy forces in the area. electronics staff officer (CESO),

1-29 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

reconnaissance and survey officer, and the time and place for party battery commanders to accompany the reassembly. Fires should be planned battalion commander. Composition of a along any march routes and around reconnaissance party (orders group) is the positions to be reconnoitered. generally prescribed in the unit standing operating procedures. FM 6-50, chapter 3, further depicts firing battery recon- Displacement. naissance parties and techniques.

Field artillery battalions One way to reconnoiter: must frequently displace to a provide continuous fire • The battalion commander or S3 support to maneuver warns the staff and battery units. commanders before the unit must displace. A direct support cannon battalion • The battalion commander provides displaces when necessary in order to the battalion executive officer the support the operation or when ordered to information necessary to expedite by the force artillery commander. The the occupation of the new position. battalion commander coordinates battalion movement with the supported unit to determine when best to move, For example: where to move, and when the battalion-^^B must again be ready to fire. • The order for displacement of A reinforcing battalion displaces when headquarters and service battery elements. ordered to by the reinforced artillery unit • Probable routes, start points, release or the force field artillery headquarters. points, time of movement, and route The reinforcing unit tells the reinforced marker use. headquarters how the unit will move, • Probable order of march. when movement starts, when movement is completed, and where the new positions are located. • The battalion commander then A general support reinforcing assembles his reconnaissance battalion displaces when ordered by the party. He points out, on the force artillery headquarters or as ground or on a map, the general requested by the reinforced field artillery location for the position areas and unit, subject to the force artillery the tentative general locations for commander's approval. A GSR battalion each installation. If the commander commander may also recommend new plans to make a personal reconnais- position areas, routes, and displacement sance, a time and place where his times to the force field artillery order will be issued must be commander. designated. If he assigns tasks to A general support battalion displaces members of his party, he designates when ordered by the force artillery 1-30 * FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION OPERATIONS FM 6-20-1

, /eadquarters. The battalion commander continually studies the situation and DISPLACEMENT may : recommend new position areas, CONSIDERATIONS rou|$s, and displacement times to the force field artillery commander. # The method of displacement used by a The displacement method used depends cannon battalion depends on the time on time available, scheme of maneuver of available, the scheme of maneuver of the supported unit, availability of the supported unit, the availability of reinforcing field artillery, traffic reinforcing field artillery, traffic conditions, and enemy activity. There are conditions, and enemy activity. three ways to displace. # When the battalion displaces by echelon or by battery, the operations/FDC In unit displacement, the battalion complex also displaces by echelon to displaces with all elements moving at insure that the battalion is capable of once. This method should be used when delivering fires at any time. Continuous other artillery units can provide adequate communication is maintained with the support during the movement. Unit supported unit, with the reinforcing displacement is the fastest way to move field artillery, with higher field the battalion. However, the battalion artillery headquarters, and between the battalion echelons. cannot support while moving. If it £> becomes necessary to fire after # When time is available, it is desirable to displacement has started, the battalion, have fifth-order survey in the firing or some of its batteries, must conduct an position. Directional control may be 'emergency occupation. Emergency brought into the battery areas by means occupations are described in FM 6-50. of traverse, astronomic observation, or other artillery survey techniques. When the battalion displaces by # When two or more field artillery echelon, one or two firing batteries and battalions displace over the same route, some headquarters and service elements the force artillery commander move in one echelon, while the remainder coordinates the movement. of the battalion remains in position. # When field artillery units must displace When the first echelon is in position and over a route used by units of other arms, ready to fire, the second echelon the force commander coordinates the displaces. movements. When displacing by battery, the # Except in operations involving nuclear battalion can better provide continuous employment, direct support field support than when displacing by echelon artillery units have priority on routes or as a unit. Also, this technique makes over all other artillery. the unit less vulnerable to attack and # When nuclear weapons are present in makes it more difficult for the enemy to displacing units, security must be detect movement. However, more time is provided in accordance with FM required to move the battalion. 100-50. To provide uninterrupted fire support, Displacement procedures will vary from planning for displacement is continuous. unit to unit. However, they should be

1-31 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION described in the unit's standing 9 Specific duties of key personnel during operating procedures. displacement.

For example: (* Communications. • Identify personnel, equipment, and vehicles for the "jump" element. • Identify communication nets to be used. The cannon battalion commander must rely on • Identify specific duties for key H personnel. communications to control elements of his command, gather information, dis- The displacement of the operations/FDC tribute intelligence, and section is a particularly critical move. coordinate fire support. The primary The overriding consideration during means of communication in the cannon displacement is the need to maintain a battalion are radio and wire. capability for continuous operations. The operations/FDC is authorized sufficient Typical single channel radio nets in personnel to man two shifts. Normally, cannon battalions are illustrated in this will form the basis for the breakout of appendix C. The heavy reliance on FM personnel during displacement radio makes artillery battalions operations, one shift moving with the especially susceptible to enemy jump element and the other remaining at electronic detection and jamming. the current location until the jump The size of the battalion wire system element is in position and operational. depends on the length of time a position is“^ Procedures will vary from unit to unit occupied. Generally, the wire system based on personnel and equipment duplicates the installed radio nets used available, the tactical situation, and the by the battalion. When installed, wire displacement distance. These detailed becomes the primary means of displacement procedures should be communication, with single channel spelled out in the unit's tactical SOP and, radio used as an immediate backup as a minimum, should include: system. For details on the field artillery cannon battalion communications, see DISPLACEMENT Appendix C, Communications. PROCEDURES Combat service support. # Personnel, equipment, and vehicles to be displaced with the jump element. # Personnel, equipment, and vehicles to Combat service support remain operational at the old location (CSS) is the process of until the jump element is in position and keeping the maximum operational. number of weapon systems # Communication nets to be used during operational. displacement.

1-32 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION OPERATIONS FM 6-20-1

support operations. Recurring proce- COMBAT SERVICE SUPPORT dures, responsibilties, and reports should PROVIDES: be stated and briefly explained. Information regularly received from supporting or supported units should be • Ammunition • Supply highlighted. An effective SOP will • POL • Administration eliminate the need for lengthy or • Maintenance • Food service complicated orders or instructions during • Vehicle recovery • Medical support operations.

(Each of these areas is covered in detail in chapter 5.) A lengthy, detailed SOP Is often Ignored and may Inhibit the flexibility necessary for The support functions and operations in innovative and resourceful solutions to the battalion by the SI, S4, or any other situations encountered on the battlefield. supervisor must be closely coordinated with tactical operations. A continuous exchange of information among CSS coordinators, the S3, and battery Frequent visits to all elements of the commanders is essential to the success of battalion, particularly by the executive both tactical and logistical plans. officer, will determine if instructions and orders are properly executed. The visits The process is continuous, characterized also provide an opportunity to insure the by a sense of urgency, and always done in firing batteries are getting what they the context of the mission at hand and need when they need it. By closely the commander's concept for accomplish- supervising the implementation of ing it. combat service support plans, the staff An important management tool is a clear officer not only determines how policies and concise SOP that reflects general are carried out, he also determines what and routine aspects of combat service changes to the existing plan are needed.

r SURVIVABILITY.

In order to support, the cannon battalion may have to survive enemy ground, air, and artillery attacks. Positions are selected to enhance survivability and provide continuous support to the maneuver force. FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

Plans should be contained in the unit Li>iPosition^areas^shouldprovW SOP that describe how weapons and soldiers are positioned and shifted to • Early warning. meet an attack from any direction. • Observation. Dispersion usually minimizes the effects • Fields of fire. of an enemy attack. There is no absolute • All-round defense. rule on how much dispersion is required • Cover. between units. It depends on what enemy • Concealment. forces are in the area, whether the • Natural obstacles to slow enemy supported force is on the offense or movement, if possible. defense, the enemy air and artillery Positions should not be situated on major threat, the nuclear situation, cover, enemy avenues of approach. Positions concealment, and—to a large degree— that can be hardened or fortified rapidly terrain availability. are desirable. The commander should select areas where subordinate units can have at least one alternate position. SURVIVABILITY INVOLVES: Positions should be hardened at every opportunity. If available, engineer • Selecting positions equipment can be used to speed up the hardening of positions, create obstacles, • Dispersing units and assist in "dummy" position preparation. Cannon battalions request • Establishing security engineer assistance through the supported force. • Passing information Security is established using observation posts, listening posts, local patrols, and electronic devices. Advance warning or Planning for survival begins with an knowledge about enemy capabilities is analysis of what enemy actions will most vital to establishing a viable battalion degrade the battalion's ability to and battery defense. It is necessary to accomplish its mission. Plans should be aggressively seek this information from developed by considering immediate fire support elements, maneuver units, action status. There are two immediate command posts, division artillery, and action status conditions—"Stay in adjacent units. Information on enemy position" and "move to alternate air, ground, and artillery attacks must be position. " passed quickly to subordinate and adjacent units. Units carrying nuclear "Stay in position" refers to staying in position to accomplish the mission. If the weapons must insure that field storage locations are secured in accordance with incoming fire volume and accuracy are so great that the mission cannot be FM 100-50. accomplished, then the position is Cannon battalions do not have enough untenable and the unit must move to soldiers for all-round defense all the time. fight and survive.

1-34 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION OPERATIONS FM 6-20-1

"Move to alternate position" allows tactical situation requires all available the battery commander to move when the field artillery support for a critical battery begins to receive destructive operational phase, the battalion incoming fires. Such a status may be used commander would probably designate a for a key nuclear delivery unit. "stay in position" status for firing batteries. Headquarters batteries and service batteries should have immediate action # What augmenting field artillery is plans similar to the cannon batteries. available. If the battalion has The commander will probably assign a reinforcing or GSR units available, high priority to the protection of there is less need to assign a "stay in communications, intelligence, opera- position" status. tions, and FDC facilities. Similarly, the commander should assign a high priority • Position-hardening capabilities. If to maintenance and ammunition battery equipment can be dug in, the facilities in the battalion trains area. "stay in position" risk is reduced.

The battalion commander establishes! Risk. The FA battalion commander which status applies to the battalion| must decide whether it is better to stay based upon: in position and shoot or temporarily reduce field artillery support while O The force commander's guidance. If the moving to an alternate position that maneuver commander believes the enhances unit survivability.

Key points

The cannon battalion supports a maneuver force by suppressing, neutralizing, and destroying the enemy. To do that, it must be able to:

# Communicate. • Meet the specified and implied Move to the right place. requirements of the mission. • Furnish the guns with required • Apply the supported command- firing data. er's guidance in the attack of targets.

1-35

FM 6-20-1

CHAPTER Z:

Offense

The primary purpose of offensive operations is to destroy the enemy. Offensive operations may also be conducted to secure key terrain, gain information about enemy strength and dispositions, and occasionally to deceive the enemy. Even though defensive operations are often necessary, offensive action achieves decisive results. The enemy cannot be equally strong everywhere; it is usually possible to concentrate sufficient combat power to outweigh him at a place of the attacking commander's choosing. Even during defensive operations, the commander should never miss an opportunity to attack. This chapter tells the cannon battalion commander and his staff how to support offensive operations. Effective support is based on an understanding of offensive fundamentals, offensive maneuver, and enemy tactics.

Offensive fundamentals.

Six fundamentals guide commanders in 4. Shock, overwhelm, and destroy the conduct of offensive operations. the enemy. Although the application of each may vary from time to time, they are the same 5. Attack the enemy rear. for any offensive operation. 6. Provide continuous mobile support.

1. See the battlefield. See the battlefield. A defender 2. Concentrate overwhelming combat cannot be strong everywhere. To be power. successful, the attacker must know where the enemy is vulnerable. The cannon 3. Suppress enemy defensive fires. battalion commander helps the

2-1 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION M supported commander "see the battlefield" by insuring that target acquisition resources are employed effectively and that the results are interpreted quickly and accurately for target information.

SEE THE BATTLEFIELD

ÙOÜM,

# ^7 iod

£O^Cs

!Q

7^

©

rsOHl SLJ a os

2-2 OFFENSE FM 6-20-1

Concentrate overwhelming trate superior forces in that area rapidly. combat power. While enemy Tanks and mechanized forces are weaknesses may be known from the concentrated on a narrow front to break outset, most attacks begin with a through enemy forward defenses. Field movement to contact, often on a broad artillery fires are concentrated to protect front. When contact is made and an area advancing tank and mechanized forces where the enemy is weak or can be weak- at the point where the main effort is to ened is found, it is necessary to concen- penetrate.

CONCENTRATE OVERWHELMING COMBAT POWER

r

, oil1

,«nr

2- (W% -fDlïïl mi i

«'■'iii a s ■*

V.iillW II'

It,

%

Í 1111«. »<1

PMI(tifeu_^aihû a

23 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

Suppress enemy defensive fires. must be attacked. Field artillery Concentrated forces are extremely counterfire, and sometimes US Air Force vulnerable to enemy fires; therefore, it is (USAF) close air support sorties, are necessary to suppress enemy weapons concentrated in sufficient numbers and and to obscure the vision of enemy duration to substantially degrade enemy gunners who can interfere with field artillery capable of interfering with advancing tanks, mechanized infantry, the main effort. attack helicopters, and close support For attack helicopters and USAF aircraft aircraft. to operate, enemy air defense systems must be suppressed. Electronic support Enemy direct fire weapons are measures and other target acquisition suppressed by the attacker's direct and means can be used to locate air defense indirect fire weapons. Enemy field weapons. Field artillery, and sometimes artillery, which can also slow or stop an electronic countermeasures, are attack and interfere with command post employed to suppress or disrupt enemy and combat service support operations, air defenses.

SUPPRESS ENEMY DEFENSIVE FIRES

Ëm

ss

SÛ

'WJ

2-4 OFFENSE FM 6-20-1 * Shock, overwhelm, and destroy that become stalled or disorganized are the enemy. When an enemy weak point bypassed by fresh units. Forces are is found or one is created, the attack shifted as necessary to exploit enemy pushes through with maximum speed, weaknesses as they are revealed. Hasty surprise, and violence. Prepared attacks are conducted to overcome enemy positions are bypassed when possible resistance. Deliberate attacks are and cleared only when necessary. conducted only when necessary because Leading battalion task forces that are they take time to plan and organize and temporarily stopped must not delay the are usually costly in execution. advance of the division. Attacking units

SHOCK. OVERWHELM, AND DESTROY THE ENEMY

$ a % i ss

\ /

2-5 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

/ Attack the enemy rear. When enemy forward defenses are penetrated, the attack drives relentlessly toward the enemy rear to destroy field artillery, air defenses, command control, and logistics installations. As the enemy defense begins to give way, success is exploited viciously. Field artillery fires are shifted and massed as necessary to destroy enemy command control, field and air defense artillery, and logistics installations. ATTACK THE ENEMY REAR

2-6 OFFENSE FM 6-20-1

SUPPORT FORWARD

LINE OF CONTACT

I i

LINE OF CONTACT

Provide continuous mobile strengthens a hasty defense if given support. For tank and. mechanized sufficient time. ^forces to advance, continuous mobile Normally, a deliberate defense is orga- ^Ncombat service support is necessary. nized into a reconnaissance and security i^Field artillery units must carefully plan zone and three successive defensive ) movement to keep pace with maneuver belts. Each defensive belt is a series of units. Fuel and ammunition expendi- mutually supporting, self-sufficient pla- tures are apt to be high, but lack of fuel toon-size and company-size strongpoints and ammunition must not be allowed to echeloned in depth. Strong mobile slow or stop the advance. Inoperable reserves, normally tank heavy, are combat vehicles must be repaired as far retained as a counterattack force. forward as possible and returned to battle Obstacles are constructed both forward quickly. Those that cannot be repaired of and within each defensive belt to slow forward must be immediately replaced. the attacker's advance and to canalize him into fire traps or killing zones.

The reconnaissance and security zone is Enemy defensive tactics. established to deceive the attacking force and make it deploy before reaching the first defensive belt. This zone may extend The enemy defends in two ways—hasty from 20 to 30 kilometers beyond the main defense and deliberate defense. For a defensive belt. Normally, it is manned by hasty defense, the enemy uses cover, reconnaissance elements from the concealment, and positions that are division's second echelon and elements immediately available. The enemy from the forward-deployed regiments.

2-7 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

Company and platoon strongpoints are defense bulwark. This belt is organized organized in forward positions behind around reinforced motorized rifle units. reconnaissance elements. These Its purpose is to stop and destroy the elements offer stubborn resistance before attacker by establishing platoon and delaying to prepared positions in the company strongpoints deployed main defensive belt. laterally and in depth and by establishing firetraps where units can be The main defensive belt may be 15 to 20 destroyed and counterattacked with kilometers deep and is the enemy's tank-heavy reserves.

DEFENSIVE BELTS

Reconnaissance and Security Zone

Up to Protected by contact and delay forces (army's second echelon tank and 30 km motorized units) while its main defense belt is being established. Subsequently manned by elements of the main defensive belt. 0 Main Defensive Belt Up to 20 km Manned by elements of the army's first echelon divisions.

8 to 10 km

f Second Defensive Belt X X Manned by army's second echelon divisions, including 10 km X the tank division, after completing its task in the security X zone. This belt contains the army's main and alternate CP and portions of the army reserve force.

8 to 10 km & Third Defensive Belt 10 km Contains the bulk of the army reserve force and front second echelon forces (usually elements of the tank army and some army group reserves). ■0

2-8 OFFENSE FM 6-20-1

The'purpose of the second defensive belt, Forms of offensive maneuver. also organized around reinforced \ motorized rifle units, is to stop any attacker that penetrates through the To understand how the cannon battalion main defensive belt. supports offensive operations, it is Tank-heavy forces in the third defensive necessary to understand how maneuver belt are used to counterattack. . forces conduct offensive operations.

DELIBERATE DEFENSE i iMÉ n i mi-■*-*»*» MAIN MAIN DEFENSIVE DEFENSIVE '¡ufó ¡»«6 mdk m\ % mmrax BELT BELT

BSP wii SECURITY SECURITY ZONE ZONE

rp Ci c ^

py BR PT-76 BRP M

AHACKING FORCES

2-9 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

The intent of the commander and the Envelopment. In an envelopment, the best direction of approach to the enemy attacker passes around enemy strength will dictate the form of maneuver used by to strike on a lightly guarded flank or an attacker. The commander's intent into the rear of the enemy defense. If no may vary from time to time but usually open flank or gap in the enemy defense can be described in one of four ways: system exists, gaps can be created by fires, fire and maneuver, or a deception operation.

Success often depends on speed and on preventing the enemy from reacting in Attacker's Intentions time with sufficient force to slow the attack. It may be necessary to fix the Overrun and destroy a weaker enemy enemy in place from the front by a CD in position. supporting attack or by some other means that will delay enemy reaction to © Fix or hold an enemy force in position. the enveloping force. The enemy is then forced to fight in several directions or Rupture and pass through enemy abandon his positions. © defenses to secure a deep objective.

Pass around enemy main defenses to Penetration. In a penetration, thee © strike him from the flanks and attacker concentrates forces to strike a rear causing him to fight in an an enemy weak point, breaks through the unexpected direction or perhaps in two position to rupture his defense, holds the directions. shoulders of the gap created, and advances rapidly to the objective. Enemy positions can be approached Successful penetration depends upon the from the front, flank, or rear. Two forms ability of the attacker to suppress enemy of maneuver can be used—envelopment weapons, to concentrate forces and penetration. sufficiently to overwhelm the defender at In a single attack, different units at the the point of attack, and to pass sufficient same level may use different forms of force through the gap to secure the maneuver. In a division attacking to objective quickly. When this is rupture enemy defenses so as to exploit accomplished, the commander has two into the enemy rear, one brigade may be options. He may continue forward to required to fix some enemy units in rupture successive defense lines and position, while another passes around ultimately enter enemy rear areas, or he those positions to destroy them from the may turn forces to roll up enemy flank, and the third is poised to move positions from the flanks. The through the hole created. Within that penetration may be preferred when the first brigade, one battalion task force enemy is overextended or he does not fixes enemy forces while another attacks. have an exposed flank.

2-10 OFFENSE FM 6-20-1 \

ENVELOPMENT

✓ida X Uli tad.

X

WD REGIMENTAL ARTILLERY GRGROUP

>*vEiy CES FIXE ENVELOPING POSITION X FORCE m X

*c J** PENETRATION

iifii'i—

OBJJ

/ /

AHALlpN OL UGH ENEMY u u p ;DEFENSE;ANOHOLT)^^ <#SHOULDERS;OEPENETRA'TION. *S‘ S BATTALIONS READY N / TO PASS THROUGH AND N ^ ADVANCE TO OBJECTIVE ■vsi

2-11 X FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

Types of offensive operations. t

Movement to contact. Whenever US Army forces are on the offense and are not in contact with the enemy, they are moving to contact. Most attacks begin with a movement to contact. The purpose of movement to contact is to gain contact with the enemy. It is done in a way that risks the smallest possible part of the force while the bulk of the force is available to respond immediately when contact is made. When contact is made, the commander can develop the situation further by maneuvering forces, concentrating forces, and attacking.

MOVEMENT TO CONTACT

|-l-| COVERING I I FORCE

□ ADVANCE GUARD □

¿tu-3" Ö □ FLANK FLANK □ a□ □ □ MAIN BODY GUAR GUARD Ö Ö Ö □xx «*2 XX □

1. _ REAR □ GUARD

2-12 OFFENSE FM 6-20-1

MEETING ENGAGEMENT

itiÁ ENEMY POSITION udL

ADVANCE GUARD MAKES CONTACT œMBmmnEm O uJ

MAIN AHACK «fe w

Meeting engagement. A meeting information about the situation, and engagement occurs when a moving force issue orders for action immediately. contacts a moving or stationary enemy force about which little is known. The Bypass. An enemy force that poses a action ceases to be a meeting engagement negligible threat to the attacker may be when the situation has been developed bypassed. If the enemy force does and other actions are undertaken, such represent a significant threat, it must be as a hasty or deliberate attack. destroyed or fixed in position. Any bypassed enemy must be reported so that following forces will not be surprised. The primary goal, when contact is made, is to gain the upper hand by overcoming While the maneuver force may bypass the enemy rapidly before he can react some enemy units, it will be necessary to effectively. To do this, the commander contain others until they can be must have his force in a good posture destroyed by following forces or until when contact is made, develop good they surrender. Because the attacker has m 2-13 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION the initiative, the force assigned the task If a hasty attack is to be executed, of containing the enemy may be smaller fragmentary orders are issued than the force contained. It carries out immediately to set in motion battalion its mission by using direct and indirect task forces, field artillery, attack fire suppression, pinning down the helicopters, and close air support in enemy force so that it cannot maneuver sufficient strength to break through against or fire effectively on bypassing weak spots or to envelop open flanks. forces. Speed is most important. If momentum is lost, the hasty attack can fail. Some attacks may be deliberate from the The attack. When contact is made, outset when good information about the information about the situation must be enemy is available. Such attacks usually reported to higher headquarters as start with a passage through a force in quickly as possible. Of immediate contact. importance is the size of the enemy force Normally, there will be two broad options and the commander's assessment of his available when a deliberate attack has chances for success. As the battle breached enemy defenses successfully. develops, the availability of combat and The first is to press forward with combat support resources becomes committed forces toward the next echelon increasingly important. of enemy defenses or the enemy rear area.

THE HASTY ATTACK

COVERING FORCE M

\$Tr ACKS^NpjDEIEBl X X.

COVERING FORCE REST OF DIVISION \ i KEEPS MOVING \ ' W ADVANCE GUARD y ¡«hk! SbC

FLANK FLANK GUARD GUARD MAIN BODY % OFFENSE FM 6-20-1

The second is to turn left or right to roll up more enemy positions, one after another, from the flank, while another force exploits the breach.

Exploitation and pursuit. The ultimate objective of combat operations is to destroy the enemy forces. Exploitation and pursuit accomplish this objective. A breakthrough may be achieved gradually or abruptly. Enemy defenses often consist of belts, echelons, and lines of positions. Having broken through one, it is often necessary to break through another. The more rapidly this can be done, the less likely succeeding defensive lines will be fully prepared. When it can be recognized that the enemy is having trouble maintaining the overall continuity of his defense, the attacker .orders exploitation and pursuit.

Exploitation. The purpose of the exploitation is to prevent the enemy from reconstituting an organized defense or executing an orderly withdrawal. This can be done by advancing rapidly toward the enemy rear area, bypassing small pockets of resistance, and destroying lightly defended and undefended installations and'activities. The exploitation is usually executed on á broad front with divisions or brigades moving abreast. A terrain objective, often a considerable distance away, is assigned to the exploiting force. It may be a critical communication center, a mountain pass, or other area which, if captured, significantly contributes to the disruption of organized enemy resistance. The objective may simply be an orientation point for fast-moving forces.

2-15 FM 6-20-1 PIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

# Pursuit. The purpose of pursuit is to % An encircling force—to envelop the destroy completely an enemy force that fleeing force, cut its escape route, and- has lost its ability to defend or delay and in conjunction with the direct pressure is attempting to disengage and force—attack and destroy the enemy withdraw. Unlike the exploitation where force. the attacking force seeks to avoid enemy Normally, a follow and support force is combat units and destroy the enemy employed also in exploitation and pursuit support system, the pursuit focuses on operations. It is used to— the major enemy force. Terrain objectives may be assigned to orient pursuing forces # Destroy bypassed enemy units. and will usually be very deep into enemy Relieve in place any supported units that have halted to contain enemy territory. Pursuit operations require: forces. $ Block reinforcements. # Secure lines of communication. © A direct pressure force—to deny enemy # Guard prisoners, key areas, and units any chance to rest, regroup, or installations. resupply by keeping them in flight. 9 Control refugees.

THE PURSUIT osrs R BE DESTR æ

wr.

•x

yys Ik vc' ys=

Sfi

DIRECT PRESSURE CD FORCE

2-16 OFFENSE FM 6-20-1

THE CANNON BATTALION IN OFFENSIVE OPERATIONS The comrnande^^^naneuvë^rorc^r^lî^^rîsîv?wîl^xpëcnîîs^üppoîim^ field artillery to accomplish the following: MOVEMENT TO T5OTÏÏÏTCTÏÏÏHT CONTACT ATTACK PURSUIT it- iiama Provide Immediately responsive Soften enemy defenses before the Suppress pockets of resistance to fires to lead company teams. attack by prearranging short, be bypassed. violent preparations. Suppress enemy Indirect fire Support hasty attacks required to positions. Neutralize or suppress hostile overcome resistance that cannot forces, weapons, observation be bypassed. Attack deep targets with massed posts, and electronic jammers that fires. could Impede the attack. Fire on retreating enemy units to slow, demoralize, and destroy Suppress enemy air defense and Suppress the enemy on the objec- them. direct fire positions. tive, obscure his vision, and screen friendly movement. Screen friendly maneuver units Suppress enemy rear guard and with smoke. Neutralize resistance during the strongpolnt units. final assault. Mass fires on chokepoints along Isolate the objective with fires the enemy's retreat routes. beyond and to the flanks.

Break up counterattacks and pre- vent enemy reinforcement during the consolidation.

The remainder of this chapter tells how the cannon battalion accomplishes movement to contact, attack, and exploitation/pursuit in terms of the 10 basic tasks discussed in chapter 1.

Movement to contact.

The movement to contact is characterized the relatively small amount of maneuver by decentralized control and extremely power forward. responsive fire support to compensate for FM 6-20

2-17 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

During the movement to contact, field The S2 should brief FAAOs before each artillery support must be poised to mission on: provide immediate fires to the lead company teams. The most pressing requirement is for fast suppressive fires. # Nets and call signs to be used. The following considerations are critical # Available field artillery. to successful support of a movement to # Enemy forward air defenses. contact. # Any specific information desired by the pilot or observer.

The battalion target acquisition plan Target acquisition. must be integrated with the supported Target acquisition re- force target acquisition plan. Based on JU. sources should be posi- established target acquisition priorities tioned well forward to maximize range and the maneuver commander's capabilities and to provide early guidance, the battalion S2 establishes detection of enemy mortars and artillery priorities for target acquisition assets that could impede the forward movement under battalion control. FISTs and FSOs of maneuver forces. Normally, each usually receive the same priorities direct support field artillery battalion through maneuver channels. will have at least one weapon locating radar attached from the division artillery target acquisition battery (TAB). The DS battalion S3 must insure that the WLR is displaced forward as the movement to Survey/met. When the contact progresses. Normally, radars will movement to contact be positioned within the defensive begins, displacements will perimeter of one of the firing batteries, be frequent and formal survey control and survey control will be extended from may give way to hasty survey the battery position to the radar site. The techniques. If friendly forces have DS battalion S2 orients radars, assigns recently operated in the area, the cannon sectors of scan, and gives cuing battalion reconnaissance/survey officer instructions, unless otherwise directed by should request (through the division division artillery. Field artillery aerial artillery survey officer) any information observers are a valuable source of available regarding survey already battlefield information. Cannon established in the area. battalions have no organic FAAO capability but can request FAAO support from division artillery. The cannon The battalion S3 must keep division battalion S2 plans FAAO missions to artillery informed of planned moves so complement other target acquisition that the division artillery met section can means such as weapon locating radars, be displaced to stay within valid met fire support teams, and fire support range of cannon battalions supporting officers. the movement to contact.

2-18 OFFENSE FM 6-20-1

Fire planning. During planned targets that can be handled movement to contact, without overloading the system, field artillery fire plan- degrading responsiveness, or exceeding ning must focus on: the controlled supply rate. 0 Providing immediate fires to suppress The FSO needs to insure that FISTs plan enemy direct fire weapons. targets based on good judgment and good # Providing smoke to screen the company information. He must step in whenever it team movement. is becoming apparent that the FIST chief is planning "measle sheets" that will The FIST chief and the company team needlessly overtax the logistics system commander select targets along the route and the cannon battalion's capability to of advance and submit them through the respond rapidly with planned fires. battalion FSO to the DS battalion fire Targets submitted to support the direction center. Only essential targets movement to contact can be designated should be planned. Too many targets as "priority" suppressive targets by the result in confusion and could delay company team commander. A platoon is responsive support. The FSO should be in laid on each priority with firing data on the best position to judge the number of the guns and rounds fuzed. It is then

CO/TM FIRE PLANNING

AB1142 AB 1148 42 + 09 Btt47 09

AB 08 ABU 08 11

4 1B1145 161144 46 47 48 149 46 47 48 49 YES ONLY TOO MANY ESSENTIAL TARGETS TARGETS

2-19 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION necessary to insure that priority targets Plans and orders are "purged" as the company team moves (dedicated battery). If past them. Screening smoke may be used % batteries are dedicated extensively during the movement to during a movement to contact, they are contact. totally responsive to a maneuver When smoke is requested, the FSO should company team to the exclusion of all consider using the maneuver battalion other maneuver elements. The result is a mortars to build the smokescreen (rapid high degree of responsiveness (30 rate of fire) and field artillery to sustain seconds plus time of flight on priority it. If FAAOs are available, they can be targets) to the lead company team. used to adjust in and maintain the Dedicated battery tasks have certain smokescreen while the FIST chief focuses implications that the S3 must take into his attention on the other fire support consideration during the planning effort: needs of the company team. • Dedication is recommended by the cannon battalion commander and approved by the maneuver brigade commander. Once dedication is in effect, it can be terminated only by the Tactical fire control. brigade commander. Conditions for Suppressive fires will be termination of dedicated status are critical during a move- listed in FM 6-20, appendix B. 1 ment to contact. Targets can be • A dedicated FM net (normally the' suppressed with a battery or less designated battalion fire net assigned depending on target size; therefore, fire to the battery) must be provided. The DS control should be decentralized. FISTs battalion and the FSO only monitor this and FSOs should call suppressive net. missions directly to battery fire direction • The DS battalion FDC should not send centers. The battalion FDC monitors, fire missions to the dedicated battery. follows the progress of the mission, and is • The DS battalion FDC must be prepared prepared to provide additional fires when to augment the dedicated battery's and where necessary. Remember, the fires. When possible, dedicated battery effects of suppressive fires last only as missions should be monitored and long as the fires are continued. followed in a "do not load" status by the Suppressive fires must be continued for nondedicated batteries. If the target as long as the target being engaged can requires expenditures that exceed the dedicated battery's capability, the DS affect friendly elements adversely. High battalion can respond immediately explosive/variable time, improved with additional fíres. conventional munitions, and smoke are the munitions best suited for suppressive Dedicating a battery results in a fires. The figures in chapter 1 list, in tremendous increase in fire support priority, optimum shell/fuze combina- immediately available to a company. tions for various personnel and materiel Batteries are dedicated only during a targets. movement to contact, when adequate

2-20 OFFENSE FM 6-20-1 field artillery is available, the enemy range or may be masked by a terrain situation is vague, and contact is feature. Remember, battalion FSOs expected. have a retransmission capability and can act as a communication link between the FIST and the DS battalion/batteries when necessary. Dedicated batteries Positioning/di splace- get dedicated fire nets. Only FIST ment. In a movement and battery personnel talk on this net. to contact, the impetus Wire should not be played down just is forward, and the key word is move. The S3 should have positions planned because of frequent moves. Wire should be laid if possible, particularly between at least two moves ahead. Route and FSOs and the DS battalion. Radio nets position area reconnaissance should must be opened selectively based on be continuous. Dedicated batteries volume of traffic. The DS battalion FDC should be positioned with 80 percent of is net control station for all battalion fire their range extending beyond the line of nets. The nets must be policed of departure to minimize the need for early extraneous traffic. Short transmissions displacement. If FAAOs are available, lessen our vulnerability to enemy radio the S3 should instruct them to note and direction-finding and jamming stations. report positions and areas forward that are suitable as firing battery or trains locations. Position areas selected and outes planned must be coordinated with Ihe maneuver force in whose zone the routes or positions are located. The fire ft Combat service sup- support officer is located where the action m port. Class V should be is and provides timely advice to the forward. Ammunition in maneuver commander as the operation excess of the unit's carrying capability is progresses. If an unexpected acceleration stockpiled when necessary. If the unit in the advance rate of the lead company displaces before this stockpiled team occurs, the FSO should notify the ammunition is fired, follow-on units DS field artillery battalion FDC (trains) can police it up. The S3 and S4 immediately so that firing batteries can must coordinate closely on the be alerted and movement orders can be positioning and movement of ammuni- issued. tion. Normally, dedicated batteries will not be moving while dedication is in effect. Smoke, HE, and ICM will be in heavy demand for the suppression and screening fires critical to lead company Communications. When teams. This type of ammunition is the movement to contact stockpiled at the dedicated battery I begins, wire will give way position. The S3 must keep the executive to radio as the primary communication officer, S4, and battalion ammunition means. FISTs moving with the lead officer informed of all battery moves so company teams may exceed radio that combat service support, particularly

2-21 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION • ammunition trucks, can be dispatched to must prepare to handle this increased the proper location. Because of the load, move weapon locating radars frequent moves, special efforts must be forward on short notice to keep up with made to keep the ammunition and other the attack, and acquire and deliver combat service support truck drivers suppression of enemy air defense (SE AD) apprised of firing locations and usable fires if FAAOs and close air support routes. Echeloning trains to keep the (CAS) are to be used. Sound and flash resupply movement forward should be may not be available if the battle has considered. been moving rapidly.

Hasty attack.

Fire planning. In the hasty attack, there will The primary concern in the hasty attack is not be much time to plan to react quickly with fire and maneuver to fires—maybe minutes. The requirement maintain the momentum of the attack. for the attack develops rapidly, and the FM 6-20 maneuver force may attack from the march. This means that FISTs and FSOs must stay keenly attuned to the battle progress and anticipate fire support. Anyi time enemy resistance increases rapidly,7 Hasty attacks are frequently an FISTs and FSOs should size up the extension of or a part of movement to situation and begin planning. contact, exploitation, or pursuit. They are characterized by the swift application of combat force to overcome enemy hasty defenses and to maintain offensive Fire support teams and fire support momentum. A cannon battalion may be officers should develop hasty fire plans to required to support a hasty attack by one support this attack, planning fires short element of the supported force while other of, on, and beyond the objectives. These elements are still in a movement to planned fires must include suppression contact. Considerations for supporting and obscuration of enemy overwatch hasty attacks are similar to those for positions and will be, of necessity, supporting a movement to contact. informal and include only minimum, Additionally, cannon battalions essential targets. Additionally, planning supporting hasty attacks should consider should consider continuing the the following tasks. movement to contact when the hasty attack is completed. Often, the maneuver force executing a hasty attack will not Target acquisition. stop after the attack, but will continue Targets acquired by FISTs movement to maintain momentum. See and FSOs requiring close FM 6-20, appendix I, for details on support fires will increase. The battalion deliberate and hasty fire planning.

2-22 OFFENSE FM 6-20-1

Plans and orders. £ Normally, there is not enough time to plan and execute a scheduled preparation. Plans and orders will be informal—oral, personal contact, or FM (frequency modulated) communication. The FSO must inform the DS battalion as soon as the supported force anticipates hasty attacks in any portion of the brigade zone. If a company team with dedicated battery support executes a hasty attack, the dedicated mission should be terminated, allowing for increased, coordinated mass fires. FM 6-20, chapter 4, explains procedures for terminating dedicated battery support.

Displacement. Untime- ly displacement that would reduce the amount of field artillery support in position and ready to fire must not occur during the hasty attack. If numerous hasty attacks are in progress and repositioning of fire units is necessary, movement by battery should be conducted. This allows for maximum fire units in position and ready to fire at any given time. Be prepared to displace forward rapidly if hasty attacks are successful.

Communications. Increased calls for fire from FISTs and FSOs will increase the volume of radio traffic and may necessitate opening additional fire nets. Operations security (OPSEC) must be stressed, since the enemy can be

2-23 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION expected to increase his direction finding Field artillery support for a and communications jamming in the forward passage preceding a area of the hasty attack. See chapter 4 for deliberate attack. OPSEC countermeasures.

Target acquisition. Weapon locating radars Deliberate attack. 4» should be positioned just behind the line of contact to take maximum advantage of their range Deliberate attacks concentrate forces and capability. If sound/flash is available, it fires to create a hole in the enemy also should be well forward and should defenses and then rapidly push forces complement the coverage of the weapon through to secure deep objectives in the locating radars. The locations selected enemy's rear area. for target acquisition resources must be FM 6-20 coordinated with the moving force to insure that they do not interfere with the forward movement of that force. When a commander determines that he has encountered a strong enemy force in well-prepared positions that a hasty attack cannot overcome, he may order a deliberate attack. A deliberate attack Fire planning. The aims at a penetration on a narrow front moving force commander or an envelopment around an assailable may or may not want a flank, seeking to move deep into the preparation planned. If surprise is a key enemy's rear. It is characterized by more factor, he will probably go without a detailed knowledge of enemy positions, preparation. Suppressive fires should be deliberate planning, and greater volume planned on known or suspected enemy of supporting fires. A deliberate attack direct and indirect fire weapons may be preceded by passing a fresh, locations, smoke mixed with HE/VT and highly mobile force through a force in point detonating on command contact. During the forward passage, observation posts, and screening smoke forces are concentrated in a small area in the area of the passage. Remember, and are extremely vulnerable to enemy both the moving force and the stationary action. For this reason, a passage must be force are planning fires in the same zone. well planned and executed rapidly. The FSOs from both forces must compare Passing one force through another and consolidate target lists and resolve imposes unique considerations for duplication before the lists are sent to the supporting field artillery. DS cannon battalion for scheduling.

2-24 OFFENSE FM 6-20-1

Plans, orders, coordi- final agreement must provide field nation. The moving force artillery support for both forces, but field artillery commander emphasis should be placed on giving must establish liaison with the maximum support to the moving force. stationary force field artillery commander as early as possible to determine how the passage will be supported, what responsibilities each Positioning. The station- field artillery unit will have, and what ary force field artillery coordination will be required. The should be positioned far following specific information must be enough forward to— exchanged: # Permit engagement of deep counterfire targets that could interfere with the Current targeting information. passage. # Provide the capability to augment the Good field artillery positions and routes of march in the area (priority of fires of the moving force field artillery field artillery positions goes to the field without the need for untimely artillery with the passing force). displacement.. Target acquisition capabilities. Survey control. The moving force field artillery should be Coordination of communication nets. positioned as close to its designated Available intelligence about the enemy. routes as possible and should plan to Meteorological data. displace by battalion if reinforcing field Usually, the mission of the field artillery artillery is available. The reinforcing with the stationary force is modified to field artillery answers calls for fire from "augment the fires" of the field artillery the FISTs/FSOs while the DS field with the moving force. The details of this artillery is moving. When the DS field modified mission must be worked out in artillery has passed through and has advance to include: reestablished communications with FISTs/FSOs, the reinforcing field # How calls for fire will be answered. artillery displaces forward by battalion. # What radio nets will be monitored. If reinforcing field artillery is not # How liaison will be accomplished. available, the DS field artillery should # Planned targets. move by echelon to insure that field artillery is in position and responsive to the needs of the moving force at all times. Normally, this coordination is accomplished by the supporting field artillery S3s. Field artillery with the stationary force is still DS to that force Reconnaissance. The and will only augment the fires of the field artillery with the moving force field artillery when it does stationary force should not interfere with the DS mission. The provide information on routes and

2-25 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION # suitable positions in the zone to the field Target acquisition. If artillery with the moving force. Priority possible, weapon locating of positions is to the moving force field radars should be located artillery. Positions selected should close to firing battery areas, and provide cover and concealment to reduce available survey control should be vulnerablity to enemy air attack. Moving extended from the battery area to the force field artillery and the stationary WLRs. As the attack gains momentum, force field artillery should coordinate the S2 and S3 must plan jointly the position locations to preclude a forward displacement of target "bunching up" of field artillery units that acquisition resources. Weapon locating would present a lucrative target to the radars must be included in the DS enemy. cannon battalion's survey plan. During the attack, consolidation of objectives is a critical time for maneuver forces. They will be vulnerable to enemy counter- attacks by indirect fire. As objectives are taken, WLRs must be displaced forward rapidly to areas near the objective so that Communications. Wire they can range the ascending trajectory communications should be of incoming rounds. laid to the maximum ex- tent possible. Coordination should be accomplished face to face, by wire, or by messenger to preclude lengthy FM traffic. Radio transmissions should be minimized and kept as brief as possible to Survey, meteorology, avoid compromising the situation. V and registration. The considerations for move- ment to contact apply. Hasty survey may be the rule for fire unit locations and target acquisition resources when the Field artillery support for the attack begins. The DS cannon battalion deliberate attack. Field artillery S3 must coordinate his plans for forward support for the deliberate attack is displacement with division artillery to characterized by: insure that the division artillery met section is displaced forward as the attack # Detailed planning based on time progresses. Met + VE should be used in available and more detailed knowledge lieu of registrations. Remember, the of the enemy. enemy is defending. His target # Available time to develop the enemy acquisition resources are emplaced and situation and develop detailed, ready to detect firing battery locations effective preparation targets. based on firing, especially during long # Time to reposition units before the registration missions. If mets are not attack commences. available or if muzzle velocities are not

2-26 OFFENSE FM 6-20-1

current, registrations away from the planned, the DS battalion might find it primary azimuth of fire are considered. necessary to include all fire units for The DS battalion S3, with the battalion which it has fire planning authority in reconnaissance/survey officer and FIST the preparation. When this situation chief, will establish registration points in exists and targets of opportunity appear the brigade zone for DS and reinforcing that require immediate engagement, the field artillery. If general support and S3 (or FDO) must take fire units from the general support reinforcing field artillery preparation that are engaging lower battalions desire to register their priority targets. Response time must also batteries in the brigade zone, they must be considered because antitank guns coordinate through the DS field artillery (ATG), antitank guided missiles, and battalion. The DS battalion coordinates artillery fires can slow or halt a all registration points with the supported maneuver force's forward momentum. If brigade through the brigade fire support a fire unit is engaging a preparation officer. Rearward registration points will target close to the target of opportunity, take considerable coordination and prior the S3 or FDO should consider pulling warning of friendly units in the vicinity that unit from the preparation, giving it a of the chosen registration points; range or lateral shift correction to bring however, the increased accuracy and the rounds close to the target, and then enhanced survivability by minimum telling the FIST to adjust the rounds on exposure of trajectories to enemy target. • detection devices make the effort Units diverted from a preparation for worthwhile. targets of opportunity reenter the preparation schedule at the time they finish firing the target of opportunity and shoot the next target shown on the schedule. No attempt should be made to Tactical fire control. As fire targets missed in the preparation. the attack gains momen- The preparation is on a time schedule tum, calls for fire will that is carefully coordinated with the increase and the cannon battalion may scheme of maneuver. Maneuver forces be faced with more targets than it can expect preparation fires to be shifted and effectively engage. When this situation lifted at specific times. If units pulled occurs, the FDC must respond first to from the preparation do not reenter at the calls for fire from the maneuver element current time indicated on the schedule of that has priority of fires. Priority of fires fires, their fires could extend past the is specified in paragraph 3a(2) of the completion time ordered by the supported force operations order, but commander and jeopardize maneuver may be changed by frag order as the forces. The S3 notifies the maneuver S3 attack progresses. about targets not fired during the Requests for immediate fires during a preparation and, if requested, engages preparation may occur during a the targets as soon as possible after the deliberate attack. If many targets are preparation is completed.

2-27 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

Fire planning. Prepara- FM 6-20, appendix I, contains detailed tion fires are normally instructions for scheduling groups, planned to support a delib- series, and programs of targets. erate attack. Planned targets oriented on known or suspected enemy defensive positions ahead of and on the flanks of the attacking force, and on known or Reconnaissance, posi- suspected enemy direct and indirect fire tioning, and displace- positions and command observation ment. All considerations posts are most common targets. Detailed for movement to contact apply except instructions for planning preparations those portions discussed for the dedicated are contained in FM 6-20, appendix I. battery. Reconnaissance for new positions to support the attack must be continuous. In displacing forward, the When planning preparation fires, the DS DS cannon battalion commander/S3 cannon battalion should consider: must insure that sufficient field artillery is always in position to support the • Stockpiling class V at fire unit locations maneuver force. If no reinforcing field prior to firing the preparation. artillery is available, the DS cannon • Availability of ammunition. battalion should displace forward by • Obtaining a valid met within 1 hour of leapfrogging batteries. Suitable the time that the preparation is to be fired. locations for hasty occupations should be • Insuring that batteries scheduled to fire identified along the routes to facilitate the preparation are in position and the conduct of emergency occupations ready to fire before the preparation (hip-shoots). If reinforcing field artillery commences. is available, forward movement should • Requesting ammunition for immediate be by echelon and staggered between the expenditure (ammunition in excess of a DS and reinforcing cannon battalions. unit's basic load that can be drawn in Displacement will be controlled by the anticipation of heavy ammunition DS cannon battalion S3. expenditures). Requests for ammuni- tion for immediate expenditure must be approved by the requesting unit's next higher headquarters. Combat service support. Considerations for move- As the attack progresses, FISTs and ment to contact apply, FSOs may request that groups and series except those portions pertaining to the of targets be planned to support specific dedicated battery. As the attack phases of the attack. They may be progresses, resupply lines will become requested "on call" or to be fired at a extended. Trains should be well forward specific time. Suppression of enemy air and located in areas that afford good defense and counterfire programs will be trafficability and a suitable landing area planned as directed by higher for helicopters in case aerial resupply is headquarters or by the supported force. used.

2-28 OFFENSE FM 6-20-1

Exploitation and pursuit. Target acquisition. A cannon battalion DS to an exploiting brigade Exploiting forces strike swiftly to deep should request that two WLRs from the objectives to cut lines of communications division artillery target acquisition and surround and destroy enemy forces. battery be attached. With two radars, the FM 6-20 S3 can leapfrog them forward, keeping one in position ready for cuing The purpose of the exploitation and instructions while the other is displacing pursuit is to prevent the enemy from forward. reconstituting an organized defense or conducting an orderly withdrawal and to annihilate the retreating enemy force. Meteorology, survey, Supporting the exploitation is similar to and registration. The supporting a movement to contact except field artillery battalion that dedicated batteries are not with the exploiting force should considered to support an exploitation. coordinate with division artillery to Other considerations discussed under insure that the met station is displaced movement to contact apply to forward in time to provide continuous exploitation. Additional field artillery met support. Registrations will be considerations for supporting exploita- minimal during the exploitation or tion and pursuit follow. pursuit since batteries will be moving

SUBTENSE DETERMINED DISTANCE CONVERGENCE EXPLOITATION AND RELATION OF c: TRUE AZIMUTH PURSUIT REQUIRE TO TRUE AZ HASTY SURVEY 60x1 BASE GRID AZIMUTH TECHNIQUES. ' GRD AZ

SUBTENDED POLARIS ANGLE ★ KOCHAB * =★— * *

tUlKWm.

IS

2-29 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

rapidly and most fires will be in response Communications. The to requests from fire support teams and battalion FSOs have a fire support officers. Consideration is retransmission capability. given to registering in conjunction with If company teams are advancing rapidly an observed fire mission ¿/the target and and FISTs are moving out of FM fire unit can be accurately located. If met communication range, the retrans- is available, muzzle velocities are mission capability is used to relay from current, and fire units are accurately the FISTs back to the DS battalion and located, met + VE is considered. Survey batteries. A communication link should will be limited to hasty techniques when be maintained between the exploiting the exploitation/pursuit commences. force and the field artillery supporting the force in contact.

Reconnaissance. In Combat service sup- the exploitation and pur- port. During the exploita- suit, the cannon battalion tion and pursuit, advance will displace frequently. The commander, may be slowed more by vehicle executive officer, and S3 must breakdowns and fuel and ammunition continuously insure that new positions shortages than by combat losses and are reconnoitered. Time may preclude enemy action. As a general rule, 4 to 6 ground reconnaissance and air days of all supplies should be carried. reconnaissance should be used whenever Disabled vehicles that can be readily air resources are available. Fire support repaired should be towed forward to be teams and fire support officers can repaired at the earliest opportunity. provide information on possible Priority of resupply should be to class V, positions and routes as they advance petroleum, oils and lubricants (POL), and with the maneuver force. Field artillery repair parts. The ammunition officer aerial observers should also be tasked to must insure that ammunition trucks be on the lookout for suitable position dispatched to firing batteries know where areas whenever they are airborne. The the batteries are located and what routes field artillery with the follow and support are to be used. It will not be uncommon force are told where the good positions for batteries to be displaced forward and routes are so that they can use them while class V resupply operations are in as they move forward. progress.

Appendix F contains scenarios that discuss the considerations presented in this chapter within the framework of a tactical situation. OFFENSE FM 6-20-1

Key points \ V'

Movement to Contact 'Use immediately responsive i Plan suppressive fires for company dedicated battery support to lead teams that do not have dedicated company teams. support. Use smoke to screen friendly 'Plan and fire priority suppressive movement. targets in support of lead company teams. ' Shift suppressive targets forward as lead company teams advance. * Plan fires to support hasty attacks.

Attack

* Schedule and fire a preparation to •Isolate the objective with fires soften enemy defenses before the beyond and to the flanks. attack. > Neutralize hostile forces that could •Displace forward as the attack impede the attack. progresses while simultaneously maintaining the capability to 'Fire to support the assault and provide adequate, responsive fire consolidation of the objectives. support to the brigade.

Exploitation and Pursuit

1 Suppress pockets of resistance to be •Keep up with the forward momem- bypassed. tum of maneuver forces while •Suppress enemy rear guard and maintaining the capability to strongpoint units. provide responsive support. 'Mass fires on chokepoints along enemy withdrawal routes.

2-31

FM 6-20-1

CHAPTER 3:

Defense

The purpose of defensive operations is to kill enough enemy soldiers and destroy enough enemy equipment to convince the enemy that his attack is too costly to continue. From time to time defensive operations are conducted for other major purposes—to concentrate forces elsewhere on the battlefield; to gain time; to preserve forces, facilities, or installations; or to control essential terrain. This chapter tells the cannon battalion commander and his staff how to support defensive operations. Effective support is based on an understanding of defensive fundamentals, defensive maneuver operations, and enemy tactics.

Defensive fundamentals. Armored and mechanized divisions use both their mobility and firepower to best US Army forces should expect to be advantage in an active defense, outnumbered at the onset of hostilities. economizing forces in less threatened When fighting outnumbered, it is areas to concentrate against main enemy especially important that the defender thrusts. In an active defense, while the defeat the attacker and survive with a larger force is defending, its subelements force that is able to continue military may be counterattacking or disengaging operations. Ideally, the defender should to concentrate forces elsewhere. destroy each echelon in turn and be able The concept of an active defense is to to engage the next with an effective defeat the attacker by confronting him fighting force. If the defender is fixed by with strong combined arms teams the enemy and subsequently destroyed, fighting from battle positions organized or if the defending force is so degraded by in depth. As the enemy attack moves into successive losses as to become the defended area, it encounters fires of ineffective, the battle will be lost. increased intensity delivered from the

3-1 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

front and especially the flanks. The around which the battle pivots while defender constantly shifts forces to take other units fight from mutually maximum advantage of the terrain and supporting battle positions nearby. put himself in a favorable posture to Regardless of why the defense is attack. Wherever possible, obstacles are undertaken or how it is described, several used to stop, slow, or canalize the enemy fundamentals govern the conduct of all attack, particularly in areas covered by defensive operations. These fundamen- the defender's weapons, or where the tals are common to all levels of command, enemy will be especially vulnerable to even though their application may vary attack by the defending force. at each level depending on the resources When the enemy attack begins to falter available to the commander. and his elements are exposed, the defender can often destroy even more Understand the enemy. Com- enemy by attacking. Counterattacks manders and staffs must have a may also be necessary to reoccupy thorough understanding of the enemy in critical terrain. order to defeat him. This means knowing To slow the attack so there will be more about his weapons, tactics, maneuver time to engage many targets, the doctrine, and fire support capabilities. defender may need to occupy certain This knowledge can provide the defender terrain for extended periods of time. In the edge he needs to defeat a numerically such cases, strongpoints may be superior force because if enemy moves established by companies or battalions. can be anticipated, then combat power In a well prepared strongpoint, the unit in can be decisively applied where it will the strongpoint must hold onto terrain hurt the enemy the most.

UNDERSTAND THE ENEMY

(QO, y *s# ENEMY DOCTRINE

»

3-2 DEFENSE FM 6-20-1

See the battlefield. The defender enemy similar information of his own must undertake aggressive operations to forces as he maneuvers to counter the learn where the enemy is, how he is enemy, and seek an opportunity to organized, which way he is moving, and attack. Fire support teams and other in what strength. As the battle unfolds, field artillery target acquisition means the defender must seek to establish a are often the commander's primary continuous flow of information, deny the means of combat information. SEE THE BATTLEFIELD

*3/ , jri

ISV.

issf

2»

OIL-/CS

3-3 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION • Concentrate at the critical times fifth of the division's front to meet and places. The defender must decide breakthrough forces that may number exactly when and where he will 20-25 battalions. Remaining ground is concentrate his forces; he does this based then covered with air and ground on the results of his combat information cavalry, remaining battalions, and and intelligence-gathering operations. attack helicopter units. He must also decide how much force will be required to defeat the enemy within Field artillery fire can often be the terrain and space limitations of the concentrated without moving firing defensive area. batteries. In extended areas, however, It may be necessary to concentrate up to field artillery batteries must be moved to six or eight maneuver battalions on one- positions within range of the main battle. CONCENTRATE AT CRITICAL TIMES AND PLACES

'Wu,

ES » «F '¡¡b vir,

3-4 • DEFENSE FM 6-20-1 Exploit the advantages of the the open. The defender can shoot from defender. The advantages of the stationary platforms or positions while defender are numerous and permit a an attacker must move. The defender can numerically inferior force to defeat a shift forces from prepared position to much larger attacker. Perhaps the prepared position swiftly so as to defender's greatest advantage is the concentrate for successive engagements. opportunity to become completely The attacker must feel his way over the familiar with the terrain prior to battle. terrain, seeing each new compartment The attacker cannot do this. The defender for the first time. The defender can plan can prepare the ground in advance by communications, control measures, fires, building obstacles and firing positions and logistical support in advance to fit and improving routes between battle many predictable situations. The positions. Because of his unfamiliarity attacker must adhere to a predetermined with the terrain, the attacker can only course of action and risk being guess about the preparations the outmaneuvered, or he must alter his defender has made. The defender can plans as the battle develops and suffer fight from cover while the attacker is in from uncoordinated effort.

EXPLOIT YOUR ADVANTAGES AS DEFENDER pa /, mm m. SELECT TERRAIN POSITIONS |

CAMOUFLAGE AND HARDEN POSITIONS

00 00

I PROVIDE SURVEY CONTROL

3-5 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

• Fight as a combined arms team. ENEMY INTELLIGENCE TARGETS As friendly units converge on the critical battle site, brigade commanders commit them to combat according to their • Command control headquarters. weapon capabilities and movement of the enemy force. The first increment of O Mortar and field artillery locations. combat power available is usually the • Antitank locations. massed fire of all field artillery in range. Even if artillery fire does not destroy many armored vehicles, it causes tank crews to stay buttoned up, reducing their Reconnaissance elements will not fight effectiveness. Field artillery can unless forced to do so, but they will effectively discourage enemy infantry provide targeting information. If the from dismounting to attack defending reconnaissance element becomes dug-in antitank weapons. Field artillery engaged, following advance guard forces can also smoke overwatching forces may make a hasty attack. This attack is covering the enemy attack. to breach the defender's position or reduce the defender's strength so As tank and mechanized battalions movement can continue. The attacking begin to arrive, the brigade commander force will use main battle tanks, infantry cross-reinforces as necessary and fighting vehicles, artillery, air defense assigns battle positions and missions to artillery, and engineer units. Usually, the the commanders. hasty attack is launched from the march. | The attacking force will not wait for reinforcement from the main body as the enemy believes that a rapid attack with limited resources may find the defender without a completely organized defense. If the enemy's hasty attack is successful, Enemy offensive tactics. the attacking elements will re-form into columns and continue to move.

The enemy often attacks during periods of reduced visibility. He normally organizes for an attack with two echelons Following an unsuccessful hasty attack, at each level of command. His formations the enemy division or army commander are preceded by reconnaissance elements can— and an advance guard. These elements contain light tanks, lightly armored vehicles, motorcycle elements, and # Order his forces to assume a defensive posture. augmentation as required. Reconnais- sance units attempt to bypass pockets of 9 Divert his remaining forces toward resistance, seek lightly defended areas, another area. and pass intelligence to the advance guard and main body. Order a breakthrough attack.

3-6 DEFENSE FM 6-20-1

ADVANCE GUARD OF A MOTORIZED RIFLE DIVISION

r DIV RECO

OINT ^ ADVANCE ï DETACHMENT [Ml

5-10km

ADVANCE m (% GUARD

MOTORIZED RIFLE DIVISION ADVANCE TO CONTACT

15-2

(Bum

au¿£¿vL 'busk

POIN 8km

lOk 03BÛ

10km

FIRST ECHELON

10km

UÁ xu SECOND ECHELON

3-7 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION # Preparation for the enemy's break- strike that can last 30 minutes or longer. through attack is detailed. Normally, Targets such as antitank weapons and planning for it begins before the artillery positions will be attacked movement to contact is started. Enemy continuously with indirect fires as the doctrine is to position combined arms enemy maneuvers to exploit the fires. As teams well forward and attempt to the enemy closes on objectives, indirect envelop rather than make a main fires will be shifted to other planned assault. However, to the defender in the targets. Deep targets also will be attacked breakthrough area, this attack will during the preparation, and aircraft may appear as a main attack. be used to extend these fires against targets beyond mortar, artillery, and The enemy usually initiates a rocket range. breakthrough with a massive artillery MOTORIZED RIFLE BATTALION DEPLOYMENT FROM MARCH tvt 1 km or less FINAL DEPLOYMENT

ted.

000000000 ooooooooo ooooooooo o

km Stntípnmflíeploys into platoon 6 SE OYMENT colOmns 1-3 km from FËBTf

NT•nflinfri £0*

* U o * rl A Battalion deploys intâcompa N TANK columns 4-6 km frofc TEBA* * PZ. m 0 äMP

3-8 DEFENSE FM 6-20-1

If the breakthrough is successful, the # Attempt to fix a part of the defender's enemy will re-form into column forces in some areas while continuing formation and move toward deep the attack in other areas. objectives. They will bypass pockets of resistance near initial defensive # Launch an attack against a different positions to maintain attack momentum area of the defense with large second and to reach the defender's rear area echelon forces. rapidly. Defensive maneuver and When a breakthrough attack does not operations. rupture the defender's positions, the enemy commander can— The defense is planned in as much detail as time and resources permit. Normally, • Commit more forces to relaunch or the battlefield is organized into three continue the attack. areas as shown.

DEFENSIVE BATTLEFIELD ORGANIZATION

tefes»» a«

COVERING FORtnPÄR (see note /a.

% MAIN BATTLE AR ¡a. (see note AS'

m * 5££ <2 'sm ^mVISION REAR AREA I /W

Notes. 1. When the division begins the defense 2. Depiction of three brigades in the with forces in contact, a covering main battle area (MBA) is for force area (CFA) normally will not be illustrative purposes. The actual established; forward brigades, number of brigade headquarters however, will establish security as forward depends on the specific required. tactical situation.

3-9 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CAMNON BATTALION

Covering force area. The CFA an active defense, whether it be employed begins along the line of contact and in the CFA or MBA. When directed to do extends rearward to the forward edge of so, the covering force hands off the the main battle area. The mission of the enemy to MBA brigades, then moves to a covering force is to find the enemy and designated area in the MBA, and fight him with sufficient force to cause prepares for operations there. him to deploy, plan an attack, and concentrate forces to attack and thus The covering force is normally tank reveal the location and direction of his heavy. A covering force operating in main effort. This must be done front of a division could well consist of up sufficiently far forward to permit forces to four or five tank-heavy battalion task in the main battle area to concentrate forces (TF) or cavalry squadrons, and forces to destroy the enemy main effort. attack helicopter, field artillery, air To do this, the covering force must strip defense, and engineer units. The covering away enemy reconnaissance units, force may be controlled by either the defeat the advance guard, force the division or corps. Provisions are made to enemy to deploy his main body, defeat change command arrangements in the hasty attacks by the main body, and course of battle as enemy strength and cause the enemy to bring up artillery and intentions are developed. second echelon forces to organize a deliberate attack. As the enemy shifts forces, brings up artillery, and masses for Main battle area. The decisive battle a main attack, he will reveal his strength is fought in the main battle area where and plan of attack. The covering force forces are concentrated to destroy the may have to attack vigorously to destroy enemy main attack. As a result of reconnaissance or advance guard concentration, forces will usually be elements or to divert the enemy pressure unequally distributed laterally. Thus, from one area to another, thus there will be differences in the way dissipating mass and moderating combat forces fight the defensive battle, momentum. A covering force also seeks depending upon whether they are in the to keep from the enemy the actual area where forces are concentrated or in location of the main battle area; to do the area where forces are economized. this, the covering force may have to fight Since the defender cannot be strong forward of the MBA until a specified time everywhere, some risks must be taken. so that MBA preparations can be This is particularly true when forces are completed. moved to concentrate against the main enemy effort. Less threatened areas are covered by air and ground cavalry, The covering force takes up the fight as attack helicopter units, or by battalion far forward of the MBA as possible. Its task forces operating over wider areas. In battalions and squadrons fight from a the main battle area, tank-heavy task series of coordinated, mutually forces are concentrated in depth along supporting battle positions. Therefore, to the major avenues of approach into the units in the covering force itself the battle area to be defended. However, some main is very much like the action of any unit in battle area brigades can expect to be

3-10 DEFENSE FM 6-20-1

organized initially with mechanized located on a terrain feature critical to the infantry-heavy task forces in situations defense or one that must be denied to the where a strong covering force is enemy. It is the cork in a bottleneck established. Task forces from the formed by terrain, obstacles, and units. It covering force join the fight in the MBA is developed to defeat an attack from any when they become available. direction. When the division commander has Counterattack. Offensive action is determined where he intends to employ necessary to gain the initiative, maintain his forces, brigades are designated to the continuity of the defense, and to control battalions defending in the main reposition forces to defeat following battle area. The division commander enemy echelons. The defender should designates areas in which brigade counterattack whenever there is an commanders are expected to fight their opportunity to destroy enemy units. A forces. counterattack may be conducted by Battle positions are selected for division, brigade, or battalion. occupation by units as large as a Counterattacks are planned in great battalion task force and as small as a detail, but—like hasty attacks—are platoon. Brigade and battalion executed rapidly. In any event, it is commanders direct the fight by necessary to concentrate sufficient specifying which battle position their combat power to destroy the enemy force, units will occupy and what they will do as some of the defender's inherent there—defend, support, attack by fire, or advantages are forfeited when he block. becomes the attacker.

Battle positions are occupied, vacated, Reserve. The traditional concept of one and reoccupied as the battle develops. element being held in reserve for every The division commander and his brigade two elements committed is a luxury not commanders plan the maneuver of available to the outnumbered defender. battalion task forces from one battle He must commit as much of his combat position to several others. When the power to the battle as soon as possible in battle commences, forces can be order to destroy the enemy rapidly. His concentrated quickly and can be "reserve" consists of mobile units, not redirected equally quickly to another heavily engaged, that can be concen- area of concentration. trated where the enemy main attack Strongpoints. In some cases, division occurs. These forces are generally or brigade commanders may direct that a deployed in depth along major avenues of strongpoint be emplaced by a approach. Their inherent mobility mechanized unit—usually a battalion. enables the commander to rapidly The strongpoint is essentially an concentrate them by lateral movement in antitank "nest" that cannot be overrun critical areas of the battlefield. It is quickly or bypassed by tanks. It can be imperative that the enemy's main thrust reduced by enemy infantry only with the be fixed accurately because forces that expenditure of much time and are concentrated to meet it leave other overwhelming forces. A strongpoint is sectors of the MBA lightly defended.

3-11 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

Rear area. Divisions will control the Since units in reserve will usually be area ánd forces behind brigades. The committed to the fight in the MBA by division main command post and placing them under the operational supporting units not located in the MBA control of brigades, they usually will be normally are located in the division rear. located in the MBA from the outset.

THE CANNON BATTALION IN DEFENSIVE OPERATIONS

The brigade commander conducting defensive operations will expect his supporting field artillery to—

Disorganize, delay, and weaken the enemy before he attacks. Strike him as he attacks to strip away his air defense and reconnaissance. Slow him down, cause his tanks to button up, and suppress his direct fire weapons. Counterfire to suppress or neutralize his indirect fire support. Mass fires on attacking elements in the main battle area. Fire beyond the MBA to weaken second echelon battalion.

The remainder of this chapter tells how the cannon battalion accomplishes defensive operations in terms of the 10 basic tasks discussed in chapter 1.

Covering force.

Covering forces slow, delay, and wear breakthrough attack. Forces in the down the enemy. They exert sufficient covering force area must make the enemy pressure to cause the enemy to form for a reveal the location of his main thrust. FM 6-20

3-12 DEFENSE FM 6-20-1

Target acquisition. moves become rapid and frequent. Target acquisition ele- Priority for survey will be to firing ments positioned in the battery positions and target acquisition covering force area must be included in assets in that order. If registrations are the battalion's plan for repositioning. required, they are fired to the rear or to Weapon locating radars require the right or left of the primary azimuth of approximately 15 minutes to prepare for fire or from offset positions. If mets are displacement after the order to displace is valid and calibration is current, met + VE given. If a cannon battalion has an is used in lieu of registrations. attached WLR, the S3 will order its displacement. When possible, the WLR should be located close to one of the firing batteries. When the enemy situation Tactical fire control. dictates displacement of the battery, it is "van *V5| In addition to reinforcing also time to displace the weapon locating field artillery, cannon radar. New locations for the WLR are battalions in direct support of covering recommended by the S2. These locations force elements normally receive should be oriented on the area of the augmenting fires from MBA field enemy's main effort as it develops artillery battalions. The locations of because that is where he will concentrate MBA units must be kept current and his indirect fire support. Weapon locating plotted on charts and overlays to radars and sound/flash bases require facilitate the fire direction officer's survey control. decision on when and where to employ their fires. When engaging tanks with field artillery, the FDO should select available shell/fuze combinations that Meteorology, survey, will cause enemy tanks to slow down and and registration. Can- button up, increasing their vulnerability non battalions support- to engagement and destruction by the ing covering force operations coordinate covering force's antitank capability. with the force artillery headquarters to Cross attachment of field artillery insure that meteorology support is batteries is common when organizing for available. Division artillery (or the field covering force operations. A direct artillery brigade designated as force support battalion may have an 8-inch artillery headquarters for the covering battery attached. Remember, 8-inch force) will establish forward met stations batteries have no smoke or illumination in the covering force area. The cannon capability. battalion S3 must insure that communications are established and maintained with the met station. Sufficient time should be available to Fire planning. Initial establish formal survey in initial targeting information will positions; however, subsequent positions be sketchy and consist may receive hasty survey, especially if primarily of fires planned on likely

3-13 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION approach routes beyond the supported able to engage targets that can be force's direct fire range. As the battle acquired by target acquisition elements develops and targeting information available to the supported force. The becomes more exacting, the fire planning battalion commander, S3, S4, and effort will focus on: reconnaissance/survey officer should look for routes and positions whenever # Fires on the approaching enemy to slow possible. Primary and alternate positions his advance. must be selected and coordinated early so # Fires to assist the disengagement and that survey and prestocking of repositioning of friendly maneuver ammunition can be accomplished. elements. Selected positions and routes to those # Fires on enemy penetrations. positions must be coordinated with the maneuver force in whose zone the routes The task force FSO submits targets based and positions are located. When the on his knowledge of friendly elements in covering force battle starts, the situation relation to the! approaching enemy force will develop rapidly. All units (maneuver and the location and capabilities of and field artillery) must be prepared to available field artillery. displace quickly. The maneuver commander will be moving his forces based on the enemy situation as it Plans and orders. develops and artillery must not interfere Because of wide frontages with the movement of maneuver forces. If in the covering force, it will terrain permits, cross-country moves not be uncommon for cannon battalions rather than road moves should be to be in direct support of battalion-size planned to avoid any refugee congestion task forces. When this occurs, the direct along roads and highways. support battalion commander becomes the fire support coordinator for the maneuver battalion and the battalion FSO becomes the assistant FSCOORD. To aid deception, cross attachment of Reconnaissance. Field field artillery batteries will be common. artillery positions should This provides for calibers across the be selected away from covering force front representative of enemy high-speed avenues of approach what the enemy would expect to find and should provide adequate cover and when confronted by US armor/ concealment. Position locations that can mechanized divisions. present the enemy with long range fields of fire into the position are avoided. Reconnaissance for subsequent positions is continuous and is by ground Position! ng/di splace- reconnaissance where possible or by a ment. Field artillery combined map and air reconnaissance L==il^| units should be positioned when air elements are available and time initially far enough forward to be precludes a ground reconnaissance.

3-14 DEFENSE FM 8-20-1

Careful planning and timely execution of Main battle area. displacement must be done to insure continuous support for the maneuver force. The bulk of the defending force is deployed In the main battle area, since this Is the area the defender chose for Communications. When decisive battle to defeat the enemy. Forces In the MBA are prepared to the covering force battle concentrate to defeat the enemy's main begins, wire will give effort. way to FM radio as the primary means of FM 6-20 communication. FM nets should be opened selectively based on the volume of radio traffic. Wire communications should be established between the field The cannon battalion, as part of the MBA artillery battalion and the task force defense, has many advantages: use of FSOs whenever possible. This will covered and concealed positions, survey significantly reduce the amount of FM to allow for massed fires, and battery traffic and will facilitate the passage of position areas hardened and prepared in long messages; e.g., target lists, depth. The enemy must expose his force maneuver control measures, and to our artillery fires while moving, fight situation reports. Communication links on the terrain that the defender has pre- should be established between covering pared, and try to destroy or suppress force battalions. hardened positions that take full advan- tage of available cover. Following are key considerations that apply to cannon battalion operations in support of MBA forces. Combat service sup- port. Consideration should be given to central- izing all ammunition sections under the Target acquisition. operational control of the battalion Field artillery target acqui- ammunition officer. This provides a high JU. sition elements should be degree of control and the maximum oriented on the enemy's main effort, amount of flexibility in terms of resupply since that is where the enemy can be operations. It also enables the expected to concentrate his indirect fire ammunition officer to concentrate support. Weapon locating radars should support to priority units. As the covering be positioned approximately 5-7v force battle develops and battery moves kilometers behind the forward edge of the increase, special efforts will be required battle area to increase lateral coverage to keep individual truckdrivers aware of at, and immediately forward of, the changing battery locations. FEBA. Sound/flash bases (if available to

3-15 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION the cannon battalion) should be targeting information should be positioned with their bases oriented on requested from FSOs with covering force the enemy's main thrust. A sound/flash elements regarding: base covers approximately a 10-kilo- meter front and should be positioned to # Enemy forward elements. complement coverage provided by # Indirect fire weapon systems and weapon locating radars. As the MBA command observation posts. forces are repositioned, target acquisition 0 Command posts, communication elements should also be repositioned. The facilities, and reserves. S2 and S3 must monitor the developing battle jointly to avoid a situation that Since covering force units have been in necessitates simultaneous displacement contact with the enemy throughout the of all available target acquisition covering force fight, they can provide resources. Displacement should be valuable targeting information to MBA staggered so that some coverage is forces. always available.

Positioning/displace- . ment. Normally, MBA Fire planning. The field artillery units will critical fire planning task initially be positioned in supplemental initially will be to support positions forward of the main battle area the passage of covering force elements to provide additional field artillery into the main battle area. Fire support support to the covering force. officers with covering force elements will be submitting planned targets along predesignated passage routes. The FSO knows the locations of the passing elements, and he will control the planned Positions should be selected that— fires in support of these elements. Covering force elements do not break 0 Are far enough forward to range contact after change of control is beyond the covering force's initial positions. implemented. They continue to fight as 0 Are along routes that facilitate they reposition into the MBA and will displacement into the MBA. require immediately responsive fire 0 Provide good cover and concealment to support. DS cannon battalions minimize vulnerability to enemy air supporting MBA brigades will be attack. responsible for providing planned and immediate field artillery support to covering force elements repositioning into the supported brigade's zone. The cannon battalion DS to the MBA If defensive targets are to be fired when brigade positioned in front of the enemy the enemy attacks into the MBA, main effort may have to be positioned

3-16 DEFENSE FM 6-20-1

outside the brigade area to avoid the path of the enemy main'effort. The position selected must be coordinated with the maneuver commander who "owns the terrain." This is best accomplished by contacting the cannon battalion DS to the brigade and requesting that battalion to make the necessary coordination. The division artillery command/intelligence net (FM, secure) can be used because both DS battalions are on that net. Displacement should be planned to provide maximum cannon units in position and ready to fire at all times. Main battle area field artillery should be echeloned in depth, and displacement should be by battery whenever possible. Displacement is coordinated with reinforcing field artillery to avoid, as much as possible, simultaneous ^displacement of DS and reinforcing fire Imits.

Communications. Max- imum use is made of wire in the main battle area. As soon as MBA locations are deter- mined, the wire laying effort should begin. The communications-electronics staff officer should be informed of new positions as soon as they are selected so that wire teams can be dispatched to the new locations and begin the wire laying effort prior to displacement. Moves will be less frequent in the MBA than in the covering force, and every effort should be made to maximize wire communications. Wire should be dug-in or overheaded as time permits.

3-17 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

Communications must be established support fires increases, it may be between the MBA DS battalions and the necessary to establish quick-fire fire support teams and fire support channels direct from FISTs to the officers of the task forces with the reinforcing field artillery battalion. covering force to be positioned in the brigade battle areas prior to change of control. This is best accomplished by having the MBA DS battalion monitor the frequencies being used by the FISTs/FSOs at the time change of Combat service sup- control occurs. FISTs/FSOs continue to port. The availability and use the same frequencies, and MBA DS resupply of class V will be cannon battalions will answer calls for critical because of the heavy expendi- fire on these frequencies until all tures anticipated during the MBA fight. covering force elements being supported If an unusually large expenditure of have withdrawn into the main battle ammunition can be predicted, the S3 area. Advantages of handling should consider ammunition for communications in this manner at immediate expenditure. (Chapter 5 change of control are: explains the implications of ammunition for immediate expenditure.) The S3 must keep the battalion ammunition officer 'rA • It precludes covering force FISTs/ aware of the class V status of the fin FSOs from having to change frequen- units. All ammunition sections should be cies at this critical time. centralized under the ammunition officer's control. This enables him to # It precludes issuing additional concentrate the resupply effort to fire Communications-Electronics Opera- units that are experiencing extremely tion Instructions (CEOI) extracts to high volumes of fire or are becoming FISTs/FSOs in the covering force and critically short of ammunition. If a fire reduces the possibility of CEOI unit is running dangerously low on class compromise. V and if the battalion cannot resupply the unit immediately, the S3 should # It precludes early use of MBA FM nets consider shifting class V from an and possible detection by enemy adjacent fire unit. If a battery runs out of jammers prior to the MBA fight. class V, the S3 should shift immediately its critical planned targets to another fire unit in range and reposition field artillery units as necessary to cover the battery's zone. These actions should be FM nets should be opened selectively, accomplished before the fact if the S3 can and only when the volume of necessary predict with any degree of certainty that FM traffic dictates. As the MBA fight a fire unit will run out of class V before it develops and the demand for close can be resupplied.

3-18 DEFENSE FM 6-20-1

Supporting light infantry in the The linear position defense emphasizes MBA. interlocking and overlapping observa- tion and fields of fire along the FEBA to preclude penetration or loss of specific While armored and mechanized forces terrain. Forces are employed well conduct' an active defense, infantry forward in prepared positions to stop forces conduct a position defense by enemy forces as far forward of the FEBA concentrating forces along likely enemy as possible. Small reserves reinforce, avenues of approach before the battle thicken the defense, block penetrations, begins. Infantry may organize the main or conduct small counterattacks to regain battle area in two ways. terrain.

A LINEAR POSITION DEFENSE

3-19 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION • The position defense in depth contains a series of mutually supporting battle positions arrayed in depth with forces remaining in position except for local or internal movement. Depth is derived from initial positioning—not maneuver. Infantry may employ mounted or dismounted security forces forward of the main battle area.

Considerations for supporting light infantry in the MBA are essentially the same as those discussed previously for supporting armor/mechanized forces in the MBA.

A POSITION DEFENSE IN DEPTH

x o 101 v\

*

3-20 DEFENSE FM 6-20-1

against successive battle positions to ADDITIONAL PLANNING overcome each in turn. Just when the enemy has everything organized, when CONSIDERATIONS FOR SUPPORTING his artillery is starting to fire, and his LIGHT INFANTRY ground units are starting to maneuver, the delaying force moves to its next set of battle positions. The enemy must then go through the same time-consuming # Organic 105-mm (towed) howitzers process once again. have less range and fewer ammunition options (no nuclear capability or dual Concept of the withdrawal. A purpose improved conventional withdrawal is an operation in which all munitions). or part of the force disengages from the # Massed fires are critical to canalize the enemy. Its purpose is to move a force out enemy ánd reduce his mobility to the of an area in order to employ it elsewhere. level of the defender. The timing of the decision to disengage is 0 Close defensive fires are more common critical; made too late, the decision could because units reposition less fre- be impossible to execute. In some cases, it quently. might be less dangerous to fight an action to its conclusion than to break 0 Counterfire becomes more critical due contact to fight elsewhere. In other cases, to less armor protection for friendly it may be necessary for part of the force to forces. attack to allow the remainder to 0 Selection of firing battery position disengage. In disengaging from the areas should take into account the enemy, it is most important to put limited cross-country capability of the distance between the disengaging force 105-mm (towed) howitzer. and the enemy as quickly as possible, preferably without the enemy knowing about it. Disengagement and withdrawal Delay and withdrawal are best accomplished under cover of operations. darkness, or during other periods of limited visibility, even though command control may be more difficult. Concept of the delay. Normally, delay operations are conducted when Considerations for cannon there are insufficient forces to attack of battalions supporting delay and defend, making it necessary to trade withdrawal operations. Field space for time. Delay operations are artillery support for delay and conducted much like the active defense, withdrawal operations is similar to except that, while the purpose of the support for the active defense. defense is to STOP the enemy, the Additionally, the following considera- purpose of the delay is to SLOW the tions apply: enemy, often for a specified time. When a Positioning and movement. In delay force is delaying, some of its subordinate and withdrawal operations, artillery units may be counterattacking, some should be positioned in depth and moved defending, and some disengaging to by battery or echelon to provide move to other positions. Delay operations maximum continuous fire. Field artillery are conducted to force the enemy to take supporting a force in a delay will displace the time to concentrate, again and again, as necessary to provide these fires. In

3-21 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION # withdrawal, GS units will usually move will have to be hauled from ammunition early, before the maneuver units, and DS supply points (ASP) in the rear of the and reinforcing units will move with main force all the way forward. It may be their supported forces. As maneuver possible to pre-position some ammuni- forces displace, field artillery units stay tion in reserve, but this should not be in range of the forces in contact. done if there is any threat of deep enemy penetration. If distances are great and Survey. Survey should not present a road networks are inadequate, mobile problem during retrograde operations ASPs should be established. Field artil- because units will probably be covering lery units will be displacing frequently the same terrain they have been over and will require a large amount of fuel. previously. Survey control may already Planners must keep this in mind and will be established, and it may only be necessary to extend it where needed, time request additional tank trucks and other permitting. POL support when required. Enemy advances may require the abandonment of nonoperational equipment. Unit per- Combat service support. Resupply sonnel must be well trained in destruc- may become a serious problem, tion procedures and prepared to destroy particularly with respect to ammunition in place any equipment that cannot be and POL. In all probability, ammunition evacuated.

Appendix F contains scenarios that illustrate cannon battalion support of defensive operations within the framework of a tactical situation.

Key points

^►Plan fires to disorganize, ^►Suppress enemy direct and delay, and weaken the enemy indirect fire weapons. before he forms to attack. ►► Mass fires on attacking enemy Strip away enemy air defense in the MBA. and reconnaissance. Plan fires for economy of force Keep enemy tanks buttoned up. areas.

3-22 FM 6-20-1

CHAPTER 4: Operations Security

This chapter tells the cannon battalion commander and staff how to apply operations security measures in combat. The enemy has a sophisticated all-source intelligence system. That system includes resources that can monitor communications, can locate all types of emitters, can control agents located deep in rear areas, and can see the battlefield from overhead. To survive and function in this environment, the cannon battalion commander and his staff must understand the enemy intelligence system and how to plan for and use OPSEC measures and countermeasures.

Enemy intelligence. gence is generally timely and has a 24- hour, all-weather capability. Its resources are generally limited in their The enemy has intelligence-gathering ability to identify, classify, and locate resources that fit into three distinct possible artillery targets accurately. categories: They are vulnerable to deception and # Electromagnetic intelligence from jamming. ' emitters. # Imagery from overhead platforms. # Human intelligence from agents and Imagery intelligence. Imagery direct observation. intelligence is derived primarily from thermal, infrared (IR), and photographic sensors carried by overhead platforms. Electromagnetic intelligence. The enemy's imagery data can be the Electromagnetic intelligence is the most accurate for producing intelligence, enemy's primary means of collecting but it is limited by weather and tactical intelligence. This intelligence is countermeasures. It frequently lacks derived from electronic detection and timeliness, and thus it is used primarily exploiting emissions from communica- to confirm what may have been tion equipment, radar, and navigational discovered initially by other intelligence aids. Enemy electromagnetic intelli- means.

4-1 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

ENEMY INTELLIGENCE-GATHERING RESOURCES ENEMY ELECTRONIC HUMAN RESOURCES RESOURCES IMAGERY Agents Radio intercept RESOURCES Line crossers Radar intercept Photo Recon units g Direction finding . Infrared V Patrols r Radar surveillance S/ Thermal \X , PWs Jamming Æ/ Night vision Refugees Early warning radars^^ devices . Visual ^

Human intelligence. Human intelligence (HUMINT) includes directly _ observing enemy forces; studying report^^^^ from agents; exploiting prisoners^^ analyzing documents, equipment, and waste left by enemy units; employing long-range patrols; establishing listening and observation posts; interfacing with local military or paramilitary forces; and — most important—analyzing reports from frontline troops.

OPSEC planning.

Not all enemy intelligence-gathering resources mentioned will be available to the enemy all the time. Therefore, the extent to which OPSEC is used depends largely on the enemy's intelligence- gathering capability in the area. To tie OPSEC and the enemy's intelligence capability together, the battalion

4-2 OPERATIONS SECURITY FM 6-20-1

• . operations/intelligence section must first analyze the battalion's OPSEC vulnerabilities, decide on countermea- sures, and then review the effectiveness of measures taken. Enemy capabilities. The first step in OPSEC , planning is to estimate the enemy's intelligence-gathering capability. The S2 does this by coordinating with other units and agencies.

ESTIMATING THE ENEMY'S INTELLIGENCE-GATHERING CAPABILITY itiiWi

ADJACENT DIVISION SUBORDINATE C-E OFFICER UNITS ARTILLERY UNITS

What are the enemy s What intelligence collection resources does the enemy intelligence collection commander have in the capabilities? battalion's zone?

OPSEC RESPONSIBILITIES IN ANALYSIS

S2 S3

Estimates enemy Determines Determines \ intelligence sensitive areas countermeasures to capability protect essential elements of friendly information

4-3 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

Sensitive areas. The second step in from the enemy to make the operation OPSEC planning is to determine the successful, are called essential elements sensitive aspects of the operation. The S3 of friendly information (EEFI). does this with information provided by all other battalion staff officers. He must EEFI is gathered by enemy intelligence answer the question: "If known by the from indicators—signatures, profiles, enemy, what information and what staff and patterns. Individually, they may not actions in what time frame can be conclusive, but collectively they may compromise the operation?" These provide the enemy with a good indication sensitive aspects, which must be kept of US intentions and order of battle.

EXAMPLES OF EEFI Information Staff Actions

Friendly force plans. Requests for replacements. Ammunition resupply rate. Cannibalization of vehicles. Attached or reinforcing artillery. Movement of CSS elements. Disposition of our forces on the line of Significant changes in radio traffic. contact. Proposed battery and battalion locations. Time operation will commence. EXAMPLES OF INTELLIGENCE INDICATORS Signatures Profiles Patterns Come from unit presence. Come from unit activity. Come from doing things the same way.

Moving target locating radars Moving combat service support Artillery is always located in a tree indicate division artillery level unit. forward indicates attack. line. Flashes and booms that do not Two met balloons in one area Radars or retrans are located on move may Indicate an artillery unit. indicate possibly two div arty type reverse slope of highest hill. headquarters. Two or more M577s together Increased commo usage before indicate a possible tactical Sudden increase in radio traffic each move, then lapsing into operations center. indicates possible displacement. listening silence indicates movement to contact. Diesel smells mixed with cordite Three-round high explosive indicate a firing unit. spotting (HES) registration by an 8-inch unit indicates a possible nuclear mission.

4-4 OPERATIONS SECURITY FM 6-20-1

Estimate enemy intelligence capability

ANALYSIS

Protect EEFI Determine EEFI

When enemy intelligence capability and EEFI have been determined, the next step is to determine how the EEFI can be protected. The S3 does this by planning countermeasures for the enemy intelligence-gathering capability in zone.

OPSEC countermeasures.

The S3 determines if countermeasures will be used, and if used, on which indicators. More than one countermea- sure may be required to protect an indicator, because there may be more than one way for the enemy to detect the indicator. Not all indicators require protection, but they contribute to the operation by enhancing the deception plan. For example, communications may be increased to cause the enemy to believe an attack will be launched in an area away from where the attack will really take place.

4-5 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

COUNTERMEASURES DECISION PROCESS

Start

Determine indicators

Can the indicator No countermeasure be detected by no is necessary enemy intelligence?

] yes

Is the activity which Would the activity, if causes the indicator detected by the enemy, Don t absolutely essential to no be useful evidence in no the success of the V portraying the deception do it operation? plan?

Can the indicator be Would the activity, if protected from enemy detected by the enemy, Apply detection by yes be useful evidence in no counter - implementing portraying the deception measures countermeasures? plan?

no

Will the enemy's detection of the (The risk will no indicator jeopardize be assumed) the operation?

Will the concept of the operation no Use deception be changed? V

Ives

4-6 OPERATIONS SECURITY FM 6-20-1

OPSEC countermeasures are derived operations, it may lead to patterns that from the four main parts of OPSEC: may cause needless casualties; therefore, deception, information security, patterns must be disguised to preclude physical security, and signal their exploitation by the enemy. security (SIGSEC). All are interrelated Division or corps formulates deception and must be considered simultaneously plans. The responsibility to execute a for each operation when applying part of the plan may be given to the countermeasures. division artillery and its subordinate units. The division artillery staff will give guidance to the cannon battalion commander about what deceptive

Deception measures will be used. This guidance is integrated into the unit's EEFI. Within the framework of this guidance, the S3 decides which deceptive countermeas- ures must be used. However, any Signal Information OPSEC execution of the deception counter- security Security measures must be closely coordinated with maneuver operations. Without this coordination we might, for example, dispense smoke in our area and blind a Physical security friendly tank unit that is overwatching other maneuver units.

Examples of deceptive countermeasures:

Deception. Deception is Camouflage—hide equipment so the Cl that part of the OPSEC enemy cannot detect it, or establish aimed at misleading the camouflage where the enemy can detect it enemy about current or that misleads him regarding unit intended operations. De- locations. ception also includes meas- Decoy equipment—make the enemy ures that prevent the enemy from believe units or positions exist that in fact spotting a pattern of actions. It is used to do not. confuse the enemy when actions by units Smoke—obscure more areas than are could obviously provide information necessary for the operation to confuse the about their intentions. enemy about where, for example, river crossings will be made. Patterns come from doing things the Fake positions—make the enemy same way they have always been done. believe units are being positioned in an They are usually part of standing area that is not where the operation will operating procedures or what is be executed. considered standard doctrine. Although Offset firing positions—move guns or an SOP establishes order to routine batteries away from primary positions to

4-7 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION T • prevent the enemy from locating the Emphasize subversion and espio- positions and to confuse the enemy nage directed against the Army regarding how much field artillery is in (SAEDA). All personnel must be aware the operational area. of their responsibility to report Roving guns—confuse the enemy conversations with people—military or regarding primary weapon locations and civilian—who do not have a need to how much artillery is available. know, but who ask questions about the Split batteries—make the enemy unit. believe there is more artillery available, thereby significantly increasing his Enforce noise and light disipline to target acquisition problem. prevent direct observation. Unconventional positions—emplace Dispose of waste that would help the batteries where the enemy would not enemy develop order of battle expect them to be—for example, in the open or on forward slopes. The enemy information. expects the field artillery to emplace in the trees and he will target likely position Brief the troops at the last possible areas. moment regarding an operation. The tradeoff of increased security versus well informed troops must be considered in Information security. doing this. The commander must decide Information security which is more important. prevents disclosing opera- tional information through Do not permit CEOI information— 2 written, verbal, or graphic frequencies and call sighs—to be^^B communications. Person- written on windshields. nel should be warned that unintention- ally releasing operational information Physical security. and the contents of classified documents Physical security is may compromise an operation. protecting operational Information security should not be information or activities by confused with EEFI. Those elements that using guards, barriers, and make up EEFI come from more than anti-intrusion devices. Its written, verbal, and graphic communi- use limits or denies enemy access to cations. facilities, areas, equipment, documents, and personnel. Countermeasures of this type are also aimed at enemy human Information security countermeasures intelligence. are directed against human intelligence.

Examples of information security Examples of physical security countermeasures: countermeasures:

Discuss operation planning only Safes for classified documents. with those individuals who need to Listening and observation posts to know and who are actually involved in detect enemy activity before it can affect the planning. the battalion.

4-8 OPERATIONS SECURITY FM 6-20-1

Patrols to gather information and detect listening silence, and proper radiotele- enemy activity. phone procedures. Electronic security is Guards to secure critical or sensitive protecting noncommunications emitters installations, such as nuclear weapons. by actions such as proper radar position- Barriers to prevent enemy direct access ing and antenna siting. into battery or battalion locations. A challenge and password system to prevent unauthorized entry into position Field artillery electronic signatures and areas. profiles come largely from violating Foxholes and crew-served weapon signal security and from poor planning. positions — both howitzers and For example, if before every attack the machineguns are fortified, so weapons volume of communication changes can be used effectively if a position comes under direct attack. significantly due to administrative, Air and ground security for convoys. logistical, and operational support conversations, a discernible pattern can Small arms to defend against air attack. be charted as shown below.

Signal security. Signal With analysis,. the enemy can predict security is protecting that there will be an attack 12 to 15 hours operational information by after a dramatic increase in communi- using communications cations volume or 2 hours after the security (COMSEC) and initiation of listening silence. To electronic security (ELSEC) eliminate this indicator, a graph of the techniques. Communications security battalion's communications should not includes using authorized communica- show dramatic changes in communica- tion codes, secure voice equipment, tions levels.

VOLUME OF MESSAGES

Discernible pattern fj\

Nondiscernible pattern Œ WÈIÉËÈM H-24 H-18 H-12 H-6 H-2 H hour

4-9 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION m Examples of signal security counter- firing, and then for the shortest time measures: possible. Separate secure and unsecure radios. Employ a random transmission Employ short transmissions. schedule. Authenticate transmissions. Use listening silence. Employ authorized codes only. Employ wire. Because the field artillery relies heavily Set radios on low power. on radios to communicate and on radars Use secure voice transmissions. to acquire targets, SIGSEC is of prime Remote rtidios and antennas. importance. Without SIGSEC, the Employ directional antennas. battalion becomes vulnerable to enemy Use decoy antennas. electromagnetic intelligence and Turn on radars only when they are winning the battle becomes more needed to locate enemy units that are difficult.

ACTIONS THAT INCREASE US VULNERABILITY

Revealing locations of units by clear text or unauthorized code or cipher Failing to Using omnidi- authenticate rectional antenna calls for fire and providing a 6400-mil signal for intercept

Referring to location by reference to Continually terrain features using radars

US ARMY UNITS MAY NOT BE ABLE TO FIGHT AND WIN UNDER THESE CIRCUMSTANCES.

4-10 OPERATIONS SECURITY FM 6-20-1

Electromagnetic intelligence. The following DF countermeasures can be used to confuse the enemy and deny him the ability to refine the unit's location to the critical 350-meter Electromagnetic intelligence is the field accuracy. In using these counter- artillery's greatest vulnerability. The measures, care should be taken to insure field artillery and communication units that acceptable communications are are highest on the enemy targeting maintained at the same time that the priority list. This is especially true for unit's DF vulnerability is lessened. nuclear capable units. Therefore, the cannon battalion can expect that it will have a higher percentage of communica- tion links destroyed than any other unit. DIRECTION-FINDING This difference will be caused by intense enemy direction finding and jamming COUNTERMEASURES activity. GgBSZZ’ - — - - US forces can still operate effectively within this environment by maximizing g Use low power whenever practical. the efficiency of available equipment and H Use horizontally polarized directional by using sound, commonsense antennas where tactical utility permits (sending and receiving stations must have like countermeasures. Communications and polarity for maximum efficiency). radar discipline, security, and I ■ Remote antennas i kilometer or more. lesourcefulness are the basic counter- Care should be taken not to jeopardize other measures by which the US will shield friendly units that may be in the remeted area. electromagnetic emissions from hostile ■ Use decoy antennas. observation. ■ Transmit as quickly as possible, then get off the air. Organize message content As an example, the enemy DF network is beforehand to minimize transmission time and consider not transmitting the message by the primary means by which he can radio or telephone if alternate means exist. locate US units through radio g Site radio station with obstacle transmissions. It works best when it can between it and the enemy to reduce detect electromagnetic emissions lasting possibility of intercept. This is referred to as 25 seconds or longer. This DF equipment antenna masking. will give the enemy a general location as ■ Use roving command post tech- to where the unit is with an accuracy of niques. 500 to 1,000 meters. Through a H Train radio operators. combination of this general DF 0 Take special care in positioning information, terrain analysis, and radars and microwave transmitters. S Take special care in positioning comparison with other intelligence jammers near field artillery. sources such as aerial photographs, the Ü Use encryption devices to prevent the enemy will locate the unit's position more enemy from refining DF locations with accurately. The unit can expect to receive measurement data provided through poor enemy artillery fire when that refined COMSEC. Use proper call signs. circular error probable location is ¡y Use dummy load (antenna) for accurate to 350 meters or less. maintenance and tuneup procedures of radars.

4-11 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

■ Employ random transmission, rather hill, cliff, or stone building. This will than working on a schedule, to reduce the modify the transmission wave in a enemy's ease of interception. directional way. ■ Do not peak traffic before an attack. ■ Use retransmission capability. ■ Establish cuing procedures for radars to enhance short operating time. POOR ANTENNA MASKING

The leaders of the cannon battalion must emphasize the use of these counter- measures—particularly two: use of low power and directional antenna. Studies have shown that a combination of low power and directional antennas plus high frequencies significantly reduce the enemy's ability to locate units by DF. Anything that can be done to decrease his locating ability will increase the GOOD ANTENNA MASKING survivability of US cannon battalions. New equipment has become available to help place the proper emphasis on these techniques. \ M With the addition of the AT 984 long wire antenna to field artillery tables of organization and equipment (TOE), available. In combat, extensive use will be made of these directional antennas, of antennas that have been directed at the distant receiver, and of field expedient directional antennas.

The jeep antenna, AT 912 or AS 1729, can be made bidirectional by tying it down Situations may arise where it is not and pointing it at a right angle to the practical to make an antenna directional direction of desired transmission. This or the antenna on hand does not provide also makes the antenna horizontally the necessary range to the desired polarized and difficult for the enemy to receiver. TC \l-h,What's Up: Know How locate by DF. to Repair and Fabricate Antennas, covers those cases and gives detailed A fast way to make an omnidirectional guidance on the construction of field antenna directional is to mask it behind a expedient antennas.

4-12 OPERATIONS SECURITY FM 6-20-1

Evaluation.

During training, the division OPSEC element will conduct evaluations to establish an OPSEC data base. It will then analyze this collection of data to discern possible patterns and deficien- cies. The G3' should disseminate these results to those units in need of assistance. The results of this analysis will help in eliminating patterns and enhancing battlefield survivability.

In combat, either the OPSEC posture of a unit is strong or there may be no one left alive to perform evaluation once the shooting has stopped. At the cannon battalion level, the S3 should evaluate the effectiveness of the OPSEC measures taken during an operation and correct ^ny deficient applications. He should ^Iso insure that the battalion's parent meadquarters receives the results of his findings and corrections so that others may benefit. The ultimate measure of the effectiveness of applying OPSEC measures is survivability.

Recognition and identification of forces on the battlefield.

The United States, when conducting operations within the NATO Alliance, must be prepared to use the procedures agreed to in the ratification of STANAG 2129, Recognition and Identification of Forces on the Battlefield. Details of the agreement are included as appendix I to this publication.

4-13 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

Key points O

For the field artillery, OPSEC measures have two goals—increased survivability and mission accom- plishment. Essential elements of friendly information must be protected or disguised. Patterns can be detected. Signal security must be stressed. OPSEC measures are effective in combat—if the battalion has planned and trained for their use before the battle.

4-14 FM 6-20-1

CHAPTER 5: Combat Service Support Operations

This chapter tells the cannon battalion commander and staff how combat service support operations are executed. The purpose of combat service support operations is to put the maximum possible number of operating weapon systems on the battlefield. While the division support command (DISCOM) and corps support command (COSCOM) are organized to provide a variety of combat service support to divisional and nondivisional units, their most important functions are to—

ARM FUEL FX MAN

weapon systems. And they must do this as far forward as the tactical situation permits in order to return inoperable weapon systems to the battle as quickly as possible.

Organization for combat service batteries. In some battalions (105-mm support. battalions of the airborne and airmobile divisions and the separate infantry brigádes), CSS is provided by a combined headquarters and service battery. The cannon battalion provides a variety of combat service support to its batteries. ' It is the support link The following organic combat service support between batteries and divisional or corps elements are generally found in cannon support units. Organic CSS elements are battalions. located in both headquarters and service

5-1 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

Personnel administration center. battalions). The medical section is The personnel administration center, responsible for organizational which is assigned to headquarters maintenance on all battalion medical battery and supervised by the Si, equipment. handles all battalion personnel and Communications platoon head- administrative support. quarters. The communications platoon Medical section. The medical section headquarters performs organizational in the headquarters battery stocks and maintenance for communications- provides medical supplies for the electronics equipment in the battalion battalion aid station. The aidmen who headquarters and headquarters battery are deployed to the batteries are assigned and maintenance on firing battery to the medical section and are directly communications-electronics equipment supervised by a physician's assistant that cannot be accomplished by the (battalion surgeon in nondivisional batteries.

HEADQUARTERS BATTERY

PERSONNEL MEDICAL COMMUNICATIONS ADMINISTRATION SECTION PLATOON CENTER HEADQUARTERS

Supply section. The supply section, an organizational element of the service battery, requests, receives, and issues all classes of supply except ammunition, medical supplies, and repair parts.-

Maintenance section. The mainte- nance section, also an element of the service battery, is responsible for performing organizational maintenance COMBAT SERVICE SUPPORT OPERATIONS FM 6-20-1 services on all equipment in the battalion target locating radars and—except for except communications-electronics and the airborne and infantry brigade—a medical equipment. It performs meteorological section. These sections organizational maintenance that cannot are authorized mechanics. Supply and be accomplished by battery maintenance maintenance functions in the direct personnel. The maintenance section also support field artillery battalions of the stocks and provides repair parts and airborne and airmobile divisions are performs battlefield recovery and combined into one section or platoon. evacuation. Each battery in the cannon battalion has a limited combat service support Ammunition trains. The battalion capability. A battery headquarters ammunition section is an element of the normally has its own maintenance, mess, service battery. It is supervised by and supply, and communications sections. receives orders from the battalion Operational considerations may require ammunition officer who performs the some or all of these elements to be ammunition supply and resupply centralized at battalion. For example, functions for the battalion. The number consolidating personnel administration, of battalion ammunition sections varies supply, ánd food service personnel and according to organization. Most equipment in the service battery can battalions have three. provide firing battery commanders more Certain battalions are organized with time to concentrate on the tactical additional, or modified, combat service situation. Support is then provided to the support elements. For example, the field firing battery on a user basis. Also, each artillery battalions in separate brigades firing battery usually has an ammuni- are assigned weapon locating or moving tion section.

SERVICE BATTERY

SUPPLY MAINTENANCE AMMUNITION SECTION SECTION TRAINS

5-3 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

DIVISIONAL

centralized and integrated materiel D I management for all classes of supply and maintenance except medical, cryptographic, S and maps for units assigned to the division. c Maintenance, supply, and transportation o support is provided by the maintenance, M supply, and transportation battalions in the DISCOM. The divisional cannon battalion The divisional cannon battalion receives coordinates its combat service support combat service support from the divisional through the DISCOM forward area support support command. The division materiel coordination officer (FASCO), who is usually management'center (DMMC) provides located in the brigade support area.

N0NDIVISI0NAL

« oC s administrative and logistical support will be c provided. The COSCOM is specifically tailored o to support the units assigned to the corps. IVI Normally, COSCOM units are formed into area support groups, which provide combat service support on an area basis. Combat service support is managed by the COSCOM materiel Normally, nondivisional cannon battalions management center. This center should insure receive combat service support from units in that the battalion receives required combat the corps support command. Nondivisional service support even though the battalion may cannon battalions may be supported by move from one support group area to another. DISCOM units when the situation dictates; however, this exception must be clearly The cannon battalion in a separate maneuver specified. The DISCOM may require brigade receives combat service support from augmentation to provide this support. When a the brigade support battalion. This battalion nondivisional cannon battalion is attached to a supports the separate brigade just as the division, the corps G3 specifies what DISCOM supports the division.

5-4 COMBAT SERVICE SUPPORT OPERATIONS FM 6-20-1

Trains operations. while minimizing exposure to enemy fires. • Displacing the trains as required to insure continuous support. The battalion S4 is responsible for the battalion trains. The S4 and the battalion Trains organization. The battalion executive officer generally work together trains organization is based upon the to supervise trains operations. Such battalion mission, the enemy, the terrain, support operations should consider— and the resources available. They may be • Positioning service support resources organized in a single location or in a dual to insure timely and flexible response location.

SINGLE LOCATION: UNIT TRAINS

If logistical resources are centralized in one Unit trains may be appropriate In slow-moving location, they are called unit trains. This option or static situations, when firing batteries have provides: organic or attached support, or when the tactical situation forces the trains to be a Centralized coordination and control of self-contained and self-sustaining operation. logistical personnel and equipment. A unit trains setup would consist of the entire Enhanced security. service battery and those headquarters elements not located with the battalion IA single base for combat service support command post. I activities.

DS MAINT PAC CONTACT TEAM MESS TEAM SB N)

BN . y - MAINT AMMO r PIT fifi VA-" SVC BTRY ïa MAINT

AID 33 STATION SI/S4 ( J T 1s

5-5 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

DUAL LOCATION: COMBAT TRAINS AND FIELD TRAINS

Echeloning trains into combat (forward) and petroleum, oil and lubricants; ammunition field (rear) trains provides: sections; selected maintenance support teams; and a battalion aid station. The field trains, including the personnel administration center, (immediately responsive forward support (tailored to the tactical situation. the remaining maintenance sections, battalion ammunition trains, and the supply and food service sections, are positioned with ready I Flexible resource usage. access to the brigade trains or some other combat service support element farther to the Increased resource survivability. rear. The battalion executive officer and S4 position themselves where they can best Combat trains provide responsive support control the battalion logistical operations— forward and meet the requirements for the perhaps the executive officer with the combat tactical situation. Combat trains can include trains and the S4 with the field trains.

r* r* r*

r- COMBAT TRAINS r

FIELD TRAINS

Positioning the trains. The battalion S4 coordinates with the executive officer and S3 and selects trains locations. The combat trains must be far enough forward .to be responsive.

5-6 COMBAT SERVICE SUPPORT OPERATIONS FM 6-20-1

ä.Built-up areas are good locations for trains because they provide cover and concealment for vehicles and sheltered areas for ~s maintenance operations at night. When a built-up areas are used, trains elements should occupy buildings near the edge of the area to reduce the chance of being trapped. rOC

However, turnaround time, communica- A GOOD TRAINS LOCATION tions requirements, or other mission- HAS: related considerations may require that the field trains be located elsewhere. Trains displacement. Proper • Defensible terrain. positioning of trains can minimize • Sufficient space to disperse vehicles and displacements and increase the quantity activities. and quality of support. When reposi- Concealment from hostile observation. tioned, the trains are displaced by Firm ground for ammunition and fuel vehicles. echelon to permit continuous combat A water source. service support to the battalion. A suitable helicopter landing site. Trains security. Planning and A good road net to the cannon batteries and to establishing security for the battalion adjacent or rear support units and supply trains is the S4's responsibility. points. Paramount among defensive considera- • Suitable communications with forward command and firing elements and with rear tions should be defense against air support units. attack. Executing trains operations. The battalion S4 is responsible for selecting a battalion supply route for resupply, The S4 must coordinate with adjacent evacuation, and maintenance support. units and the maneuver commander who The proposed route must be coordinated "owns" the area when selecting a trains with the S3. This route extends forward location. from the support units in the brigade or The field trains location may be selected division support area to the batteries. by someone other than the S4 if the field Coordination with adjacent combat, trains are positioned with another combat support, and combat service element such as a maneuver brigade support units is necessary to insure trains. Such a location facilitates adequate movement of support resources coordination between battalion both forward and to the rear. Alternate personnel and representatives from routes should also be selected and forward direct support units and coordinated and their locations enhances security for battalion elements. disseminated so service support

5-7 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

operations can continue if unexpected battlefield changes occur.

Supply operations. PRESCRIBED LOAD

A prescribed load is that quantity of Supplies are those items required to combat essential supplies and repair equip, maintain, or operate the battalion. parts authorized by the major commander for classes II and IV, to be Supply operations are determining on hand or carried on the unit vehicles requirements and requesting, procuring, to enable the unit to sustain Itself until storing, and distributing items to fulfill resupply can be effected. Normally, a those requirements. prescribed load consists of supplies for 15 days. Batteries stock some combat-essential supplies and repair parts called prescribed load or, in the case of ammunition, basic load. Normally, the minimum stockage level is directed by a BASIC LOAD higher command, such as division or corps or, in some cases, by Department of A unit basic load Is based on the type the Army publications. Prescribed loads and number of weapon systems In the enable a unit to initiate and sustain battery. The distribution of the basic load should be prescribed by standing combat operations until resupply can be operating procedures. Normally, basic effected. loads are prescribed for battalion-sized When possible, supplies are delivered units or smaller. Basic loads for field artillery units are expressed In terms of directly to the firing batteries. This is unit number of rounds of ammunition by distribution. If the batteries must draw type per weapon. The size and makeup supplies from a distribution point, this is of the basic load are designed to supply point distribution. Direct delivery provide sufficient ammunition to meet of critical items from division or corps the anticipated combat needs of a unit until normal resupply Is accomplished. support units to the requester is another distribution method. This is throughput distribution. Distribution priorities for critical items are determined by the battalion S3 based on recommendations from the S4 and the battalion operational requirements. Normal supply priority is class V, POL, and repair parts.

Supplies are grouped Into 10 major classes. The following is a brief E description of each class as it impacts on r the cannon battalion.

5-8 COMBAT SERVICE SUPPORT OPERATIONS FM 6-20-1

Class I: Rations. Class I items for the division forward supply point. Usually, battalion are requested by the cannon rations are picked up by organic battery food service sergeant from the transportation, but they may be delivered supporting divisional or COSCOM direct direct to the unit by division or corps. For support class I supply point. Rations are some operations, additional operational requested by number and type meal only rations, food packets, ration supple- (meal, combat, individual (MCI), ments, health aids, or standard menu standard B ration, theater menu). items in amounts of greater than normal menu allowances may be required. These are provided to units when rations are Divisional battalions draw rations from issued. a DISCOM class I distribution point. Non divisional battalions draw rations How a unit feeds and what rations are from a COSCOM general support class I served are important considerations. The point. When nondivisional battalions are normal combat meal will be the attached to a division, the battalions individual combat meal—commonly should draw their class I items at the called the "C" ration. Crew feeding from

CLASS I: RATIONS

I

o o o

nTTTUw&a

XX PERS SVC 3>r d DISCOM DMMC UP *5 XX

Vi äst COSCOM COSCOM MMC d PEAS SVG

ii

5-9 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION these canned rations will be the usual Food service (or supply) trucks can tow method. To meet battlefield contingen- water trailers to the batteries as part of cies, there should be at least a 3- to 5-day the normal load. Water is available at supply of such rations on every vehicle. distribution points established by engineer units and, when authorized, Occasionally, serving hot meals ("B" from local sources. rations) is desirable. The S4—or his designated representative—develops a Class II: Supplies and equip- feeding plan, with instructions ment. This class applies to all supplies concerning HOW and WHEN to feed. and equipment (except cryptograph- Sometimes battery food service elements ic) prescribed by tables of organization can move with the battery and prepare and equipment, common tables of and serve meals in position. It is often allowances (CTA), and prescribed load best, however, to centralize preparation lists. Class II supplies include clothing, supervised by the senior food service individual equipment, tentage, tool sets, sergeant in the battalion trains location. and administrative supplies. When a

CLASS II: SUPPLIES AND EQUIPMENT

BATTALION TRAINS 5 o mm

DISCOM DMMC

xx

S®31- C0SC0M C0SC0M XX — - >. MMC is

«3 Requisition Distribution

5-10 COMBAT SERVICE SUPPORT OPERATIONS FM 6-20-1 class II item is lost, destroyed, or worn when a unit submits a request or sends a out, cannon batteries send replacement tanker to the supply and transportation requests through the battalion S4 to the (S&T) battalion class III forward DISCOM or the supporting supply distribution point in the brigade trains battalion for nondivisional battalions. area for resupply. The division materiel The supply section picks up class II items management center (MMC) receives from the forward supply section with the status reports from the forward area brigade trains or the supporting support coordinator and coordinates COSCOM supply point for nondivisional requirements and priorities with the S&T battalions and delivers them to the battalion. Each supported unit in the requesting unit. In some cases, corps or division area submits a periodic forecast divisional support units may deliver for bulk fuel and packaged products critical items directly to the requesting (grease, oil, and lubricants) to the unit. division materiel management center, indicating any change to the previously Class III: Petroleum, oil and experienced supply rate. Throughput lubricants. Petroleum resupply begins

CLASS III: PETROLEUM. OIL AND LUBRICANTS FFBA I BATTALION jgjëÉ üfllh'K Y. - O D" BRIGADE Y TRAINS B

DMMC Y nDISCOM

xx—£ 9 3a*

COSCOM COSCOM m MMC —> Y o O O ° O O O^Q O 'O

° ° ° Forecasts $ Distribution

5-11 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION shipment of bulk class III supplies is Class V: Ammunition. The S4 plans accomplished on a routine basis direct to for class V operations, and the consuming division units or as far ammunition officer supervises resupply forward as practicable. A combination operations. unit and supply point distribution method is employed. Short-range The S3, S4, and ammunition officer must requirements go to supporting direct continually coordinate and exchange support units to insure bulk petroleum information concerning ammunition. availability for immediate needs. Each must know the required supply rate Individual vehicles may be refueled at (RSR) submitted to higher headquarters, direct support or general support mobile the controlled supply rate (CSR) filling stations located throughout the established by higher headquarters, and corps area. POL and packaged products the authorized basic load. This are repositioned from the division information must also be provided to the materiel management center like other battalion and firing battery com- classes of supply. manders. Battery refueling operations are carried The tactical situation may warrant out in two ways: The fuel truck is taken requesting extra ammunition for to battery gun and vehicle positions, or preparatory fires. With higher vehicles are moved alternately to headquarters approval, the ammunition centrally located fuel trucks. Moving fuel on hand in a unit may temporarily exceed trucks to the vehicles is the quickest the basic load. This approval is explicitly refueling method. When vehicles are for ammunition for immediate moved to the tanker, other classes of expenditure. Such ammunition is drawn supply can also be replenished in the on the premise that it will be expended same location. The battalion standing within the next 24-hour period. Higher operating procedure should prescribe headquarters considers this ammunition procedures for both types of refueling, expended when issued. If circumstances and procedures should be practiced beyond unit control preclude expenditure during field training. within that time frame, then ammunition excess to the basic load is reported to higher headquarters during each 24-hour Class IV: Items for which reporting period until that excess is allowances are not prescribed. expended or redistributed to other units. This class of supplies includes items such as construction, camouflage, barrier, and fortification materiel. Requisitions for Class V supplies are obtained by supply regulated class IV items (fortification point distribution from ammunition and barrier materiel) are submitted supply points located in the corps area. through command channels. Nonregu- On occasion, the COSCOM may lated items (small quantities of nails, establish ASPs farther forward in the common electrical, plumbing, and division area. The DISCOM, working similar hardware items) are requested or with COSCOM, may establish ammuni- obtained from the supporting direct tion transfer points (ATP) in the brigade support unit. support area. Normally, corps

5-12 COMBAT SERVICE SUPPORT OPERATIONS FM 6-20-1 transportation vehicles deliver ammunition to designated ATP locations. Each ATP includes corps and divisional personnel, equipment from the division supply and transportation battalion, and ammunition resupply vehicles from the cannon battalions. The ATP concept pertains only to high density and tonnage ammunition such as tank and field artillery gun ammunition.

Ammunition may also be delivered by surface or air from the corps or DISCOM directly to the battalion or battery area.

CLASS V: AMMUNITION

o o 5

BRIGADE H B TRAINS n DISCOM n

xx y* as*

C0SC0M Ossf

I £ Distribution

5-13 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

The airborne DISCOM habitually operates mobile ATPs In the division support area. In the airmobile division, ammunition^ A distribution points are located in the division support area and in each brigade support area.

■KHN

The battalion ammunition officer must tailor the battalion ammunition train SUCCESSFUL RESUPPLY and the battery ammunition sections to DEPENDS UPON: optimize support. The mission, tactical situation, and locations of the battery and the battalion support elements will • Carefully estimating requirements based on determine how this is done. usage, experience, known limitations, and the type of firing anticipated. The firing battery ammunition sections • Efficiently employing vehicles and personnel may operate independently, merely to insure a sustained resupply effort. stopping at the designated control point • Anticipating demands for critical needs and adapting to changing situations. to authenticate transportation orders. In • Routinely exchanging Information between this case, the ammunition officer holds battalion and batteries concerning resources battalion resources under his control, required, resources available, and factors selectively augmenting one or more bearing upon resupply. firing batteries with battalion trucks and personnel. While this technique is suitable under some circumstances, it is Class VI: Personal demand not an efficient way to operate, especially items. Class VI includes personal in a fast-moving situation. The items sold through COSCOM post ammunition officer must always know exchanges (PX). Requests for support are the location and disposition of all the submitted by the Si through adminis- battalion's resources. trative channels when no PX is available. Ammunition sections may be centralized under the operational control of the Class VII: Major end items. The battalion ammunition office** This issuing of major end items (howitzers and provides maximum flexibility for tanks, for example) is closely controlled continuous resupply operations and through command channels. Issue priorities for the replacement of battle or concentrated support for priority units. other losses are established based upon Centralized supply can range from a item availability, unit mission, and the daily resupply convoy for the entire tactical situation. Requests from battalion to a continuous movement of divisional units are processed by the single vehicles to and from the ATPs and division materiel management center. ASPs. Noridivisional unit requests are

5-14 COMBAT SERVICE SUPPORT OPERATIONS FM 6-20-1 processed by the COSCOM materiel management center. Class VII items may be delivered to the battalion, or the battalion may be required to pick up the items from a designated support unit. In some cases, weapon system replacement items (howitzers) may be provided to the battalion with crew, fuel, and ammunition. Glass VIII: Medical supplies. Medical supplies are obtained for divisional battalions by the medical section from the divisional clearing station located in the brigade support area. Nondivisional battalions obtain medical supplies from the COSCOM class VIII supply point.

CLASS VIII: MEDICAL SUPPLIES

o o 5 Tí

DISCOM

as*!*

COSCOM

I t i Distribution

5-15 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION • Class IX: Repair parts. The cannon medical repair parts. Usually, the battalion stocks repair parts based on a maintenance section manages repair prescribed load list (PLL). High demand parts for its parent unit. Each battery repair parts are usually stocked by PLL can be managed separately, or PLLs battery maintenance sections. Other can be collocated at battalion level. repair parts (except medical and communication) are stocked by the Repair parts are issued in response to a battalion maintenance section. specific request or by direct exchange. The battalion obtains repair parts from Normally, communications-electronics the divisional forward support repair parts are stocked by the battalion maintenance company located in the communications platoon, although the brigade trains area. Repair parts are battalion commander may choose to let delivered to battery maintenance the maintenance section keep the sections in response to submitted records. The medical section stocks requests.

CLASS IX: REPAIR PARTS

O o

MS BRIGADE DS TEAM TRAINS vs* « DSU

DMMC

S5 XX 2?

■zac C0SC0M C0SC0M MMC *

Requisition i Distribution

5-16 • COMBAT SERVICE SUPPORT OPERATIONS FM 6-20-1 Class X: Nonstandard items. use. Preventive maintenance prevents These items are intended for supporting minor shortcomings from becoming nonmilitary programs such as major deficiencies that require extensive agriculture and economic development. repair. Preventive maintenance must be Those items not included in supply worked around the tactical situation. The classes I through IX are requested, effort is facilitated by using appropriate maintenance records. These records obtained, and delivered by the S4 just as provide a method for recording the class IV items are handled. operation, equipment condition, Maps are obtained by the S4 from the maintenance accomplished, and supply and service company based on modifications to equipment. requirements established by the S2. The S2 distributes maps to battalion units as FM 6-50, The Field Artillery Cannon required. Battery, chapter 18, contains a thorough discussion of battery preventive maintenance operations. Maintenance operations. Battery maintenance operations are limited to certain organizational Maintenance is keeping materiel in maintenance services and minor repairs. serviceable condition or restoring it to a Maintenance tasks that cannot be done serviceable condition. A successful by battery personnel within a reasonable maintenancen program depends upon a time must be done by battalion oncentrated effort by all personnel in maintenance or communications platoon he cannon battalion. The battalion personnel, who will either assist or do the mmotor officer serves as the battalion work. commander's principal maintenance staff officer. As with other combat service The combat environment will likely dictate support functions, the commander can that organizational maintenance personnel, centralize the maintenance effort. organized In maintenance support.teams, be well forward. Vehicles and weapon crews must When maintenance sections are be trained and prepared to make as many consolidated, maintenance support adjustments and repairs as possible. Small teams should be organized for temporary class IX Items with high usage rates should be attachment to firing batteries. These held as far forward as possible In section teams can be dispatched to battery areas vehicles. when repairs or services beyond the operator or crew capabilities are required. If equipment becomes inoperable, it This allows the battalion motor officer should be repaired onsite. If onsite repair flexibility in supporting the batteries. Requests for support can be answered by is not possible, the equipment must be teams tailored to handle the problem either evacuated, towed to a collection encountered by the unit. point, or destroyed in place. reventive maintenance includes Howitzers. Disabled howitzers that systematic servicing, inspecting, cannot be repaired by the crew are correcting initial failures before damage repaired by organizational maintenance occurs, detecting and correcting abuse, personnel. In such cases, the motor and teaching proper equipment care and officer should dispatch a maintenance

5-17 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

support team from the trains to examine the howitzer and repair it onsite. If the A HOWITZER howitzer cannot be repaired there, it should be evacuated by battalion RECOVERY METHOD maintenance personnel. If the repair requires direct support maintenance, the battalion maintenance section evacuates the howitzer to the supporting forward EH support company. If time is short or o evacuation capability does not allow this, / o the howitzer may be moved to a maintenance collection point along the supply route where it can be picked up later by the forward support company. Vehicles. Disabled vehicles will be repaired or evacuated in the same manner as howitzers. Communications equipment. Operator maintenance for communica- tions equipment is done by battery personnel. When a piece of communica- tions-electronics equipment requires organizational repair, the equipment is repaired by the radio mechanic from the communications platoon onsite or at the battalion communications platoon headquarters. If equipment requires direct support maintenance, it is evacuated by the communications platoon to the supporting maintenance battalion forward support company. Cryptographic equipment that requires repair is evacuated to cryptographic maintenance contact teams. Medical equipment. Organizational maintenance for medical items is accomplished by the battalion medical section. Medical equipment requiring maintenance above the organizational level is evacuated through medical channels to the medical company located in the brigade support area or a comparable COSCOM element.

5-18 COMBAT SERVICE SUPPORT OPERATIONS FM 6-20-1

Individual and crew-served repaired by battery or battalion weapons. Individual and crew-served personnel. Repairs that are beyond the weapon maintenance is done by soldiers organizational maintenance capability and crews and by battery armorers or are accomplished by a direct support artillery mechanics. If the weapon is not maintenance team onsite or the item is reparable, a direct support maintenance evacuated to a direct support forward support team is requested from the company. forward support company to repair the weapon onsite. If onsite repair cannot be If howitzers or vehicles are abandoned, done, the weapon will be evacuated for the command in whose area they are repair. If the weapon cannot be repaired found is responsible for recovery. quickly, a replacement should be Recovered howitzers and vehicles are requested. inspected, repaired, and placed in operation at the lowest level possible. Those requiring extensive repairs or Other equipment. Other unit salvage are towed to a designated equipment, such as generators, is collection point.

EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE AND EVACUATION PROCESS

Btry attempts to repair. Unrepaired howitzers and dGs, yae Jlî-* ¿er1 vehicles are evacuated to bn collection. ES

Bn maintenance or DS contact >-c team attempts to repair. Unre- parable equipment is evacuated to forward support maintenance collection point. >-C

Equipment not reparable at DS level is lost to unit. Replacements 3—C are issued, i v •fTPyr"~BI

5-19 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

CABLE Inclement weather and road conditions may require field expedient recovery techniques. Such techniques are described in FM 20-22, o Vehicle Recovery Operations.

The battery evacuates salvage to the Personnel support and battalion maintenance point on vehicles administration. making supply trips to the rear. Battalions usually operate a single collection area for salvage and captured The Si supervises personnel and enemy materiel near the battalion administration support in the battalion. maintenance point. Items evacuated to battalion are in turn evacuated to the Personnel management. Personnel rear. management includes classification, Captured materiel is collected and assignment, reclassification, reassign- evacuated under supervision of the S2. ment, appointment, promotion, Battalion logistical resources may be reduction, efficiency reports, conduct and required to evacuate captured supplies. evaluation reports, efficiency ratings Captured enemy vehicles and equipment transfers, separations, and reenlistment may sometimes be used to supplement for battalion personnel. These functions organic transportation and materiel are performed primarily by the battalion rather than being evacuated. Regardless personnel administration center (PAC). of disposition, captured materiel is Batteries have a very limited administra- always reported to the next higher tive capability. headquarters.

Vehicles or equipment may be destroyed Maintenance of unit strength. to deny their use to the enemy. The Batteries submit daily strength reports to decision to destroy equipment is made the battalion Si, who forwards a only on authority delegated by the battalion consolidated report through division or corps commander. Destruc- division artillery or field artillery brigade tion procedures should be contained in to the division or corps adjutant general. the battalion SOP. Casualty feeder reports, to include witness statements, are also processed by The cannon battalion may be authorized the battalion SI and forwarded directly to cannibalize or remove parts from to the adjutant general in accordance damaged equipment or vehicles to return with established procedures. These other equipment or vehicles to combat. reports, together with authorized Cannibalization policies are established position vacancies, are the basis for by the division or corps commander. requesting individual replacements.

5-20 COMBAT SERVICE SUPPORT OPERATIONS FM 6-20-1

Normally, the Si, in coordination with toried, and forwarded to appropriate the battalion executive officer, graves registration elements. Military determines assignments for individual equipment found with the remains or in replacements. For critical skills, the S3 or unit storage is turned in to the battalion commander may establish assignment S4. If battlefield conditions do not permit priorities. immediate evacuation, remains are left In an active nuclear environment, the at a location designated by the Si for subsequent evacuation. Isolated and battalion S3 is responsible for determining a unit's potential to operate mass burials are performed only when in an area contaminated by radiation. He authorized by appropriate authority. In does this by comparing radiation either case, complete information, including overlays, must be forwarded damage reports submitted by battalion through channels to the appropriate units with the operational exposure agency. guidance (OEG) established by the battalion commander. The amount of radiation exposure previously suffered Prisoners of war. The SI has staff by individual replacements may also responsibility for handling of prisoners influence unit assignments. of war (PW). He coordinates with the S3 for guards to evacuate prisoners, the Personnel services. Leaves, passes, physician's assistant (or surgeon) for command information, postal service, treating and evacuating wounded religious activities, exchanges, financial prisoners through medical channels, and service, legal assistance, welfare, special the headquarters battery commander for services, and rest and relaxation guarding PWs at the collection site. The maintain morale. The battalion PW collection point is usually at a trains commander is responsible for insuring location. PWs are evacuated as directed these services are fairly and impartially by higher headquarters. provided to his soldiers.

Collection, identification, Medical support. safeguarding personal effects, and evacuating dead from the battle area. These activities are Medical support within the battalion is monitored by the battalion Si. Remains provided primarily by the medical are placed in pouches by either medical section. The section operates the evacuation (MEDEVAC) teams or aid battalion aid station, which is located as station personnel. Dead are evacuated far forward as the tactical situation with their personal effects to a graves permits. 3 registration collection point using Each battery is provided E^n aidman, who available transportation. administers routine or emergency Personal effects found on the body are medical treatment. He also insures that never removed. Personal effects in a unit casualties that must be evacuated are storage are quickly screened, inven- properly prepared and moved.

5-21 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

Personnel with minor wounds and how serious their wounds are, casualties illnesses are treated at the battalion aid may be moved directly from the battery station, which is supervised by the position to the clearing station or to a surgeon or physician's assistant. corps combat support hospital by Patients requiring further evacuation are division or corps ambulance, normally given emergency medical treatment and aerial. The battalion aid station requests prepared for movement. and monitors aeromedical evacuation. Batteries should also be knowledgeable Patients evacuated from the battalion go of MEDEVAC request channels. The to the division clearing station providing general evacuation process is shown area medical support. Depending upon below.

J ? 4 + + TOMBâT EVACUATION CLEARING AID UNIT SUPPORT STATION STATION HOSPITAL HOSPITAL

FIELD AMBULANCE AIR AMBULANCE WALKING LITTER USAF AIRCRAFT FIELD AMBULANCE ARMORED AMBULANCE AMBULANCE TRAIN AIR AMBULANCE AIR AMBULANCE

Note. Any medical facility may be bypassed when condition of patient warrants and the evacuation means permit.

Commanders and battalion medical Other services. personnel are responsible for training soldiers in first aid procedures and insuring proper hygiene and sanitation. Transportation. Additional transpor- Command emphasis placed upon tation may be required to supplement the immunizations, mess sanitation, field battalion's organic resources for such sanitation, and good safety practices will requirements as hauling additional class significantly reduce the battalion's III and class V supplies, moving large losses due to nonhostile casualties. amounts of barrier materials, evacuating

5-22 COMBAT SERVICE SUPPORT OPERATIONS FM 6-20-1 damaged materiel, and accomplishing defense company or the supply and administrative movements. Requests are service battalion in the COSCOM forwarded through S4 channels to the support group. division transportation officer (DTO) for divisional battalions or to the COSCOM Laundry. Laundry service is provided movement control center (MCC) for by the COSCOM—field service general nondivisional battalions. support companies forward for divisional Bath and clothing exchange. Bath batteries and direct support supply and and clothing exchange service may be service companies fornondivisional requested from the divisional chemical battalions.

Key points

► The cannon battalion must receive responsive combat service support. ^ This support must be as mobile as the cannon battalion and must be well forward. The cannon battalion has a personnel administration center, medical section, communications platoon, supply section, mainte- nance section, and ammunition trains. ^ Service support elements may be grouped at a single location (unit trains) or at dual locations (combat trains and field trains). ► Maintenance is performed at the lowest level capable of repair.

5-23 J FM 6-20-1

CHAPTER 6: How to Train to Fight

This chapter tells the cannon battalion commander and staff how to train the battalion to fight. A cannon battalion can provide accurate, responsive, effective support only if it has been trained to do so. When not in combat, training is the Army's number one priority. Training must receive the personal commitment of every leader. This means that the battalion commander, all officers, and all noncommissioned officers must accept the statement that training is the number one priority and direct their energies toward making that a reality.

Training philosophy.

To defeat an enemy proficient in the art of periods during the year. To be ready to war who has the capability to employ perform its combat mission, a unit must devastating firepower and massive train as it will fight—and train numbers of men and equipment, the continually. Reliance on lock-step battalion commander and staff must methods, classroom-type instruction, exact the maximum capability from their and cyclical testing programs is not the soldiers and equipment. The challenge to way to get a unit combat ready. confront such an enemy may come at any time. To meet this challenge, the battalion must achieve and maintain the highest possible proficiency levels. Units "The best form of welfare for the troops can no longer afford to "peak" for one is first-class training." particular event and then fall off combat —GEN Erwin Rommel readiness. This practice produces units that are ready for combat for only brief

6-1 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

TYPICAL PROFICIENCY CURVE OF AN ORTT-DRIVEN BATTALION

COMBAT loo 9 READY 8°0: 70- GO- NOT COMBAT «!- READY ¡I- 10- I i i i i i i i i i i r JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC

To be combat ready, training must be a broad mission-type order issued at realistic, and junior officers and higher headquarters becomes a detailed noncommissioned officers must be "how to do it" by the time it reaches the totally involved. Training should be trainer. This tendency should be avoided initiated with mission-type orders, which because it stifles the trainer's initiative need have only three parts: and tends to detract from imaginative and realistic training. Battalion commanders tell battery commanders <2> what is to be done—battery commanders What is to be done—what the com- are responsible for determining how to mander issuing the order expects to be accomplish the mission. accomplished. <£> What is not to be done—what controls, "Sergeants are leaders. Sergeants' limits, or constraints the commander business is leadership. Therefore,the issuing the order considers necessary sergeants must be trained as leaders— to impose on his subordinates, not as administrators. For the cement primarily for the purpose of coordi- nating their actions. that bonds together good weapons, sound tactics, and effective organiza- tions into winning battle teams is training—training to develop excellence What resources are available to in the skills of leaders and soldiers, to accomplish the task. the end that they have both the capability to fight the tough battles and Note the absence of the word how. The win, and the conviction that they can fundamental difference between what and must fight hard and well, and that, and how is the key to understanding the if they do, and have a little luck, they'll win against all odds." mission-type order. Often there is a tendency to prescribe how the job should —GEN Donn A. Starry be done—to embellish an order. Too often

6-2 HOW TO TRAIN TO FIGHT FM 6-20-1

Training materials. can assist the training manager in developing a systematic approach to individual training by MOS in the unit. Training effectiveness can be enhanced Each task is identified as either being by using training materials effectively. taught through formal schooling such as: These materials, properly used, can help solve problems created by a limited- Basic combat training (BCT). resource environment. Some examples Advanced individual training (AIT) are: (one-station unit training (OSUT)). Basic noncommissioned officer course Commander's (supervisor's) (BNCOC). manual. The commander's manual Primary noncommissioned officer provides a complete list of critical tasks course (PNCOC). for each military occupational specialty Or being taught through supervised on- (MOS), skill levels 1 through 4. The list the-job training (SOJT). SOJT tasks are a identifies tasks, gives references, and unit training responsibiity. AIT-taught indicates where a soldier receives tasks that are not practiced on the job training for each task. This document require scheduled refresher training.

tfANOAU For example, the commander's manual for 13E lists "prepare surveyed firing CON* chart" as a critical task on page 2-2, lists FM 6-40 and training extension course (TEC) lessons as references, and * indicates that a soldier receives this initial training at AIT. It also tells where refresher training should be done.

INC in t/it/i 0 n m Hrn son CM# " m OSA3t 173 cr tm o< — m UK. On 2 o MARY r- m zc AIN INC nr TASK NU MATERIALS SKILL LE CHAPTER 2: COMMON TASKS SECTION 1: MANUAL FIRE DIRECTION PROCEDURES 061-280-1000 Prepare and Tranimit FM 6-30 Messages to Observer FM 6-40

061-280-1001 Prepare a Surveyed FM 6-40 Firing Chart TEC Lessons 250-061-6301-F thru . AA A

6-3 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

Soldier's manual. The soldier's trainer's basis for training and manual is the single most important field evaluating training; and it is the training manual the individual soldier has. It is manager's yardstick for measuring each also an important training tool for the soldier's proficiency. trainer and the training manager. The soldier's manual tells the soldier (by skill level) specifically what he must be able to do in his grade and MOS. It contains tasks peculiar to a given MOS and duty position and common tasks required of all soldiers regardless of MOS, such as “MosT^Si first aid. ñ The soldier's manual is the individual pp0irof/o» soldier's personal job reference; it is the

V.iïiîH ««un

1

FM 6-13E1/2 081-831-1

PERFORM MOUTH-TO-MOUTH R A DRAFT DIAC MAS

CONDITIONS

Given an unconscious casualty who has stopped breathing and has no heart- t.

K. ly mouth-to-mouth resusitation and external heart massage ty resumes breathing or until you are lie relieved. 'U. 25 TRAINING

eathing (artificial respiration).

ethod is used except when soldier has a crushed face or is in nt.)

ith soldier lying on back, position yourself at side of his head.

b. Place one hand behind his neck to keep his head in a face-up, tilted- back position. Pinch his nostrils with thumb and index finger of other hand and let same hand press on his forehead to keep head tilted backward.

NOTE: For adults: First 4 breaths - Full and quick; thereafter - 1 every 5 seconds. -ASA. ■A.

6-4 Job book. The job book is a record of proficiency maintained by supervisors on each soldier by MOS. Tasks listed in the job book are identical to those listed in the respective soldier's manual. The job book contains common tasks as well as duty position tasks. It is a record of each soldier's proficiency in his present duty position and is the primary working document for firstline supervisors as they train the individual soldier. Skill qualifîcation test. The skill qualification test (SQT) determines the soldier's proficiency in his current skill level and his qualifications for advancement to the next higher skill level. The SQT emphasizes hands-on performance. Using SQT results, leaders can determine individual training weaknesses and group weaknesses ^vithin the unit by MOS.

ïtecord SQTs are taken once,every 2 years (unless the soldier fails to verify in his current skill level or he voluntarily selects to be retested annually). This means that testing selected soldier's manual tasks may be required periodically to provide feedback on the current individual training status in a unit. Also, unit-administered individual evaluations such as those presented in appendixes C and D of FM 6-50 are valuable in maintaining proficiency. Training extension courses. TEC audiovisual lessons provide training for soldiers in common, branch-related, or MOS-related subjects. TEC lessons are designed to permit soldiers to study individually at their own speed or with a small group that has the same training need. TEC tapes and the Beseler audiovisual device can form the core of a battalion learning center. FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

Army training and evaluation program. The Army training and TRAINING TIP evaluation program (ARTEP) tells battalion personnel what they must be able to do to accomplish their collective An ARTEP user should distinguish mission. ARTEP requirements are Immediately between section outlines (e.g., written as performance-oriented training cannon section) and major mission operation Objectives with a measurable or outlines (e.g., battalion tactical operation). Observable standard. Using the ARTEP, Section outlines include tasks that individual sections can use to train —usually performance can be evaluated, independently. Major mission outlines include weaknesses identified, and training tasks for the entire unit (e.g., the battalion). programs developed to correct deficiencies. The ARTEP is. also the starting point for combined arms training. Fire support OIPARIMíNI OHHEMMV teams and fire support officers, when ARMY TRAINING AND EVALUATION training with their maneuver counter- PROGRAM parts, should train to ARTEP standards. £ •Dr Service school instructional • O material. The United States Army^^^ «*08u**ri*s Field Artillery School (USAFAS)^^^ "««W-TOrTMilui, MUMWJ publishes the Field Artillery Catalog of i ««HiSSs Instructional Material, which lists the KiOMniifur. losnn OlftlCT SUPPORT following material available to support rv CiwoRuiir?s field artillery training: • Individual, section, staff, unit, or MOS-related courses. Subject matter includes communications and elec- tronics, counterfire, gunnery, tactics and combined arms, and weapons. • Programed texts on specific subjects (e.g..battalion survey planning, observed fire procedures, and simultaneous observation) that can be used to supplement training. ARTEPs are designed for collective • Approximately 200 "how to" TV tapes training rather than individual training. that discuss, for example, adjusting The ARTEP is a "continual" training field artillery and mortar fire, program with specific performance constructing firing charts, and the objectives, and there is no requirement responsibilities established by field for an annual formal evaluation. Field artillery missions. artillery ARTEPs are the primary • Professional development corre- diagnostic training tools for section, spondence courses for officers and battery, and battalion level training. noncommissioned officers (NCO). _

6-6 HOW TO TRAIN TO FIGHT FM 6-20-1

• These include officer's basic and Attendance at these courses by a advanced courses, nuclear target maximum number of qualified personnel analysis, NCO cannon basic and from the battalion'will improve advanced courses, and various specialty courses. individual skills, training skills, and unit combat readiness. • Correspondence courses for individual soldiers needing supplementary study materials on subjects such as care and Training and Audiovisual handling of artillery ammunition and Support Center. The local Training firing battery operations. and Audiovisual Support Center (TASC) can provide audiovisual aids, graphic training aids, and training support items To obtain copies of this catalog, write to: to battalion trainers. The TASC COMMANDANT US ARMY FIELD ARTILLERY SCHOOL publishes a catalog listing available ATTN: ATSF-CR-TS materials for each post or area. For FORT SILL, OK 73503 example, the prescribed nuclear load (PNL) mockup boxes used to simulate realistic PNL containers for training can Professional development be obtained through the TASC. TASC courses. AR 351-1 outlines the has the capability to build training professional development program for support items based upon design or soldiers and noncommissioned officers. blueprints provided by units.

5*^

Æadtus 1/1

Fort Sill OM«h or*)« Of# H-* □

U U 'M \~rr\ tf&K: 3CH

Tl O' 0 CÂ& ?/^7¿ Atm * S JJ.

6-7 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

Devices and simulators. Using Responsibilities. TOE equipment and live firing for training is not always possible or desirable. Therefore, devices and simulators must be used to augment Training responsibilities are established training. Devices and simulators can by commanders. This requires replace some live fire field training, commanders and all unit leaders to be compensate for resource or area well trained and abreast of current constraints, and supplement live fire training techniques and tactical training periods. The training manager doctrine. It means active supervision and or trainer determines the best mix of live leadership emphasis are essential to training and simulation based on his execute the unit's training program. available resources and the unit's Within the battalion, responsibilities training status. should be divided between the training manager (battalion commander) and the trainers. SOME AVAILABLE Training manager. TC 21-5-7, TRAINING DEVICES Training Management in Battalions, addresses how the battalion commander AND SIMULATORS manages training within the battalion. His responsibilities are to— The M31 (14.5-mm) field artiller> • Set training goals and priorities ana trainer provides realistic training for fire allocate resources to support battery or direction sections, forward observers, survey section training plans. teams, and howitzer sections at low costs. The M31 Is effective for diagnosing training • Train the staff and battery command- weaknesses and developing teamwork and ers. technical proficiency before firing service • Understand and properly use training ammunition. materials. • Know the skill level distribution by MOS in the unit. The artillery direct fire trainer M55 will 9 Establish training programs for the provide howitzer crews with a means to train in unit. direct fire procedures. The M55 is an • Establish a systematic method of Inexpensive method for developing and feedback on training progress. sustaining the coordination skills required in direct fire procedures. One artillery direct fire trainer (ADFT) kit is Issued per battalion. Trainers. The trainer's responsibilities are to— • Prepare and plan challenging and Maneuver-oriented wargames can realistic training. provide FIST chiefs and FSOs an excellent 9 Conduct training. opportunity to train with other members of the combined arms team. An in-depth discussion • Continuously evaluate the training of this subject can be found in FM 6-20, Fire proficiency of the unit, section, or Support in Combined Arms Operations, soldier and develop training to chapter 7. eliminate deficiencies.

6-8 HOW TO TRAIN TO FIGHT FM 6-20-1

The principal trainer is the NCO who is the man in the Army responsible for the © — training of the individual soldier. The Training managers must knoiv trainer is the doer. Training must be exactly what tasks are required to be hands-on and performance oriented. The mastered. This includes tasks from the trainer must understand and be able to soldier's manuals for each MOS and perform every task required of his tasks required by the ARTEP for each subordinates. His key references are FM section and unit in the battalion. 21-6, How to Prepare and Conduct Military Training, the appropriate — ARTEP, and soldier's manuals. Training managers® must verify that trainers in the unit can perform each task they are responsible for Training management. training. Each trainer must also know how to accomplish each ARTEP task his The Army training management system section must be able to perform. Trainer is the framework within which a competence can be verified by battalion is trained. The training administering diagnostic tests using management system incorporates soldier's manual and ARTEP tasks. training concepts, responsibilities, and tools and is designed to achieve and TASKS COME FROM A sustain a high state of training NUMBER OF SOURCES readiness. This management system is responsive to individual and collective training needs. It is a multistep process, and each step is supported by training materials and resources. 3 M ?1 S Training management is a continuous process of evaluating current proficiency and identifying shortfalls, planning the training necessary to achieve desired proficiency, and conducting realistic training. Throughout this process, feedback is used to monitor the program and make adjustments. $ Battalion training.

Fundamental requirements. A When these fundamental requirements successful training program can start have been completely satisfied, a only after two fundamental requirements training program can be developed and are accomplished: executed.

6-9 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

Evaluating. The first step in and weaknesses that can serve as the developing a training program is to find basis for intensive training in critical out which tasks individual soldiers, the operational areas. various sections and batteries, and the battalion already know how to do. A mini-SQT (round-robin in the motor Section chiefs, battery officers, and the pool) will allow assessment of individual battalion commander all evaluate training proficiency. It may also reveal training, but with different perspectives. individual weaknesses that affect the Here are some methods for evaluating unit's overall mission. For example, if the training: mini-SQT indicates that cannoneers do Observation of task performance is not store ammunition properly or 13Es normally the most frequent and effective are not proficient in registration form of evaluation the trainer can use procedures, then an answer to a question during actual training. This gives the such as "Why is the unit's registration leader a quick and accurate picture of sporadically invalid?" may have been how well soldiers and the unit are found. trained. Requesting feedback from subordi- An unannounced tactical exercise nates (briefings or informal chats) is using evaluators from within or outside critical. When a commander first arrives the battalion to evaluate the unit and its in a unit, the entire command has more various sections using ARTEP standards experience in that unit than he does. can give the leader a more detailed picture of how well soldiers and units are A trained. » \ A command post exercise not only I wonder just what is the identifies training weaknesses but best method of evaluating enhances staff operations when used to my batteries, sections, and evaluate the battalion staff. For realism, the scenarios in FM 71-1 and FM 71-2 can soldiers. be used as a starting point. Using a tactical exercise without troops (TEWT) provides for face-to-face O interaction within the chain of command O and does not waste troop time while the o leaders are training. o

Reviewing previous evaluation reports (operational readiness training (ORT), emergency deployment readiness exercise (EDRE), operation readiness evaluation (ORE), annual general O inspection (AGI), nuclear surety inspection (NSI)) may indicate strengths

6-10 HOW TO TRAIN TO FIGHT FM 6-20-1

The decision on which evaluative performance. This is probably best suited techniques, or combination thereof, to to a situation in which individual soldiers use can be based on a subjective analysis in the unit are competent but a collective of what the current level of training is training gap exists in ARTEP task within the battalion. If there is doubt, the performance. place to start is with individual soldier evaluation rather than to waste Another way is to plan and organize ammunition and other resources on a for training along MOS lines; that is, unit or section level evaluation that only group all soldiers in the same MOS shows that the individuals are not yet within the battalion together for competent in performing soldier's training. This is useful in newly formed manual skills. The key point of the entire battalions where there is no established evaluation process is to make sure level of individual expertise. It is also problems are identified and a training helpful for certain technical and low- program is developed to correct those density MOSs. This method provides a problems. controlled environment with qualified Planning. To develop a usable training subject matter experts and allows plan, there are certain steps the manager soldiers to work at their own pace. A real must take: problem with certain MOSs such as 13E, 36K, and 63C is that often there is only Analyze training and determine one qualified NCO supervisor in the echelon of training. battalion and no NCO supervisors are Set priorities and allocate resources. available in the batteries for assistance Design a workable training standing and training. The quality of training operating procedure. received by soldiers in the batteries is a Get systematic feedback of training direct reflection of the supervisor in progress. charge. With a key MOS such as 13E, for example, a battalion cannot afford to By analyzing evaluation results from the have one or two batteries unable to meet general to the specific, training strengths ARTEP standards because their fire and weaknesses can be identified. From direction center supervisors are not these, a list of collective and individual competent. The solution may be to training objectives can be developed. The consolidate this training under the training program should be based on supervision of the battalion's technical these objectives. fire direction expert. In most instances, however, the preferred method is to let the The commander then determines at section leader do the training. which echelon—battalion, battery, section, soldier—training will be done. A third way is to combine the two ways just discussed. That is, some One way is for the battalion commander MOSs, such as 13E, are consolidated to give the battery commander under the supervision of the battalion maximum flexibility to plan, organize, chief computer; while other MOSs, such and train in those areas that improve as 13B, are under the supervision of the unit, section, or individual task battery commander.

6-11 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

The particular method chosen depends know what is expected of them. It is vital upon the situation. The important point that a command have an organized is to select a method that is the most system for planning and programing efficient and effective and that will close training. This can be accomplished in training gaps. The keystone of this any number of ways. A suggested method process is to keep striving for the overall would be to outline on a milestone objective: sections and batteries—a schedule specific items required to battalion—that can perform ARTEP produce effective training. For example, 3 tasks. weeks before a designated training To focus attention on unit training needs, period, a command should confirm the commander sets priorities and ranges and training areas, set up a allocates resources. He looks for rehearsal schedule, and brief all leaders weaknesses that are recurring and that and instructors on what the training are requisite building blocks for a objectives are. Two weeks before well-trained unit. For example, if the unit training, rehearsals should be conducted, has faulty registration procedures, this backup training planned, and the troops will impact on a variety of other tasks briefed. The week before training should such as fire-for-effect missions, be reserved for adjusting the planned irregularly shaped targets, and, in training. While this approach may not be general, the accuracy of any fires. Thus, suitable to every unit, it is a systematic teaching registration procedures should approach to programing training. carry a high priority in the commander's Another important step in the planning plan. process is to design a feedback or management information system so the BATTALION COMMANDER'S manager can manage training—and know what is going on. Currently, there KEY RESOURCES is no requirement for any training records. However, the training manager Soldiers must be able to account for training Time progress. Funds (ammunition, fuel, PLL) Training materials and areas He can do this several ways. One way is by continually and informally Designing a functional training SOP evaluating the training done by unit insures that both managers and trainers leaders. Another method is for each

UNIT: Battery A MAJOR MISSION OPERATION: Tactical operations Task GO NO GO Date Hasty displacement (night) 31 Oct Terrain march (day) X 31 Oct Deliberate displacement (day) X 7 Nov

6-12 HOW TO TRAIN TO FIGHT FM 6-20-1

headquarters element (battery, To manage individual skill information, battalion) to chart its major mission each NCO supervisor maintains a job operations and ARTEP tasks and to book for each soldier. Below is an extract record progress. from the 13E job book. Or, firing batteries may chart the progress of their six cannon sections.

Emplace ARTEP Emplace Lay Emplace Prefire Aiming Boresight Tasks Cannon Cannon Collimator Checks Posts

Cannon Sections

DETERMINATION OF BASIC FIRING DATA

Task GO NO GO Date

-1258 Determine basic firing data for an HE (2-16) projectile with a GFT/GFT fan (fuze quick, time, and VT)

-1259 Determine basic firing data for an HE (2-18) projectile with a GFT (high angle)

-1261 Construct a GFT setting and apply (2-20) deflection corrections to a GFT/GFT fan

-1262 Determine basic firing data for a (2-23) projectile with a GFT setting applied (GFT or GFT fan)

6-13 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

sea "1-~ViliinM'Liî« i»'iiTVnmitfi f|

• Perform all ARTEP tasks at night

• Use 50 percent radios

• Use simulated PNL and basic load

• Wear CBR equipment TRAIN AS YOU FIGHT • Operate with allies • Use realistic CSS

Training. Just as fire support spent by soldiers actually doing the task. coordination is implementing a fire plan, An example task is shown below. training is executing a training plan For training, there should be a .50 caliber based on valid training evaluations. The machinegun for every two soldiers. If training can be centralized or there are more than eight soldiers decentralized. Regardless of the method training, assistant trainers should be used, training must be realistic, present. The trainer talks the soldiers performance oriented, and self-paced to through each step of setting headspace accommodate differences in training and timing (training), allowing the levels. soldiers to perform each step as the trainer talks. As each soldier masters the Performance-oriented training means skills required, he reports to the trainer that training and evaluating occur at the and demonstrates that he can perform same time. Further, a minimum amount the task to the standard required of time is spent talking about how to do a (evaluation). Another example task is task, and a maximum amount of time is shown below.

.50 CALIBER MACHINEGUN

Task GO NO GO Date

Set and check headspace and timing on a .50 caliber HB M2 machinegun.

CANNON SECTION Task GO NO GO Date

Boresight the cannon

6-14 • HOW TO TRAIN TO FIGHT FM 6-20-1 For this task, the section chief insures that each member of the section knows and understands how to do his part of the task. The section practices the task until the standards are met, with the trainer evaluating the section's ability to perform the task against the standard. ft

Self-paced or section-paced training means that individuals within a section or sections within a battery may all be training to perform different tasks at the same time. For example, if all 13E fire direction personnel are training under the supervision of the battalion chief computer, each soldier may be training to perform a different soldier's manual task based on particular weaknesses revealed by a previously administered diagnostic test. Some soldiers may be using a TEC lesson, others may be studying a field manual or a correspondence course, and others may be working in a small group using peer instruction techniques. As each soldier masters the particular task he is working on, he demonstrates his proficiency to the trainer, who verifies The training crosswalk. that the task standards are being met before the soldier goes on to the next task. In the same manner, all howitzer sections within a firing battery may be training to There are over 500 collective training perform different ARTEP tasks. As each tasks in ARTEP 6-365 alone and about section masters the task, it demonstrates 280 individual training tasks in the skill its ability to perform to ARTEP level 1/2 13B soldier's manual. The standards for the chief of firing battery or number of training combinations and gunnery sergeant before starting to train permutations from just these two on the next task. Tasks can be integrated manuals is incomprehensible. This can into unit field training exercises (FTX) to be complex and confusing to trainers and demonstrate proficiency for other training managers unless they know how evaluators. to use the manuals.

6-15 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION • transfer limits (fuze time)." This is a task MAIN TRAINING POINTS that requires participation by many different people and sections in the battalion.

• Understanding how to crosswalk To refine further what training tasks are between the ARTEPs and soldier’s required, he next refers to section II of manuals to determine what and who chapter 3 in the ARTEP to determine must be trained. what tasks the batteries must perform to • Selecting groups of individual and collective tasks to correct a training support the battalion task. deficiency. • Not becoming bogged down in trying to Next, the trainer refers to section I in train to all standards at the same time. chapter 3 of the ARTEP to determine what section tasks are required to The ARTEP is the cornerstone because accomplish the battery tasks. the collective tasks the battalion must perform relate directly to the battalion's At this point all collective tasks required ability to fight effectively. This is how the to accomplish the battalion task have training crosswalk works. ARTEP 6-365, been identified. The final step is to review 155 SP, Direct Support Cannon Units, the soldier's manual for each MOS in and the soldier's manuals for MOS 13B, each section that must participate in 13E, 13F, and 82C will be used as accomplishing the battalion task. examples. It is assumed that the Using this process, related tasks at eacl^^ battalion cannot transfer outside echelon from the soldier to the battalion transfer limits effectively. are identified. The ultimate benefit from The trainer begins by referring to this process is that deliberate, coherent, ARTEP 6-365, chapter 3, section III, and effective, and realistic training to correct reading the task entitled, "Conduct a a training deficiency can take place at battalion FEE on a target outside every echelon simultaneously.

Begin Crçsswalk

LION

£7 % m m Conduct a battalion FFE on a target outside transfer o(limits (fuze time).

6-16 HOW TO TRAIN TO FIGHT FM 6-20-1 I

Firing Battery Headquarters - Lay the battery with an aiming circle. Install communications wire lines. Determine executive officer's minimum quadrant Communicate information. :HA elevation (QE). \ FIRE 3 p DIRECTION Prepare and process executive officer's report. Prepare for operation and operate radio set CENTER v ÏT. AN/VRC-46. FM 6-13F CHAP 3 Prepare a firing chart. ftSMS Update a firing chart. Install and operate radio remote control equipment. Skill Level 1 èfcdTlÔ'l'if ÄÄffra Communicate information over tactical radio nets. rrrtwiri—» Determine reg corr from a low angle precision reg Determine direction within the target area. (fuze quick and time). Enter and leave a radio net. Locate a target by grid coordinates. Solve a concurrent met. Transmit conduct of fire information. Transmit conduct of fire Information. Command "CHECK FIRING" when unsafe Battalion Survey Compute data on a target and transmit calls for fire Prepare and operate switchboard SB-22/PT. conditions exist. Request and adjust area fire (HE: Q, VT, Tl; ICM) Prepare survey plan. Compute a single chain of triangles with the SR-56. for an FFE mission. Determine the altitude of a point using a map. Cannon Section Install and operate field telephone TA-312/PT. using successive bracketing procedures. Establish survey control. Compute a three-point resection with the SR-56. Battalion Operations and Fire Direction Install and operate field telephone TA-312/PT. Perform operator checks and services on field Compute azimuth from a sun/star altitude Skill Level 2 Emplace cannon. Perform position area survey. Center Prepare for operation and operate radio set telephone TA-312/PT. observation with the SR-56. Lay cannon for direction. Perform area survey. Determine adjusted firing data from a low angle AN/VRC-46. Operate vehicle intercommunications set AN/VIC-1. Compute horizontal distances measured by Prepare a firing chart. Emplace collimator. impact and time registration. Install and operate radio remote control equipment. distance measuring equipment (DME) with the SR- Update a firing chart. Boresight cannon. Skill Level 2 Determine and apply low angle GFT setting and Communicate Information over tactical radio nets. 56. Determine battalion reg corr from a low angle Perform prefire checks. FM 6-82C deflection corr to graphical equip. Enter and leave a radio net. Lay the cannon for the initial direction of fire. Compute azimuth from a sun hour angle precision reg (fuze quick and time). Prepare nonnuclear ammunition for firing. Skill Level 1 Determine a new G FT setting in transfer from a map- Verify direction of fire with reciprocal check. observation with the SR-56. Skill Level 2 Conduct Indirect fire missions. spotted firing chart to a surveyed firing chart. Aline collimator/aiming posts. Mark survey stations. Compute distances for surveying equipment, Boresight the panoramic telescope using a distant Set up/march order an aiming circle. FM 6-13E Determine and announce firing data using special Select and occupy observation post. distance measuring, electronic (SEDME). Skill Level 1 Select registration points and reference points. aiming point (DAP). Meagre horizontal and vertical angles with an Plot a graphic resection. corrections. Conduct an Impact and time registration. FM 6-13B Set/lay the cannon for deflection. almi^j circle. Compute azimuth and distance between known Prepare and transmit messages to observer. Determine piece displacement for TGPC. m Set up/march order a theodolite T2/T16. Skill Level 1 Refer the piece. coordinates. Prepare a surveyed firing chart. Compute and announce TGPC. Measure horizontal and veritcal angles with the 0.2- Skill Level 3 Compute a traverse and closing data. Plot targets, determine and announce chart data and Determine and apply position corrections with an Prepare a position to receive/emplace cannon. mil theodolite. Compute an intersection. angle T. M10/M17 plotting board. Engage/disengage travel lock. Establish section priorities for preparing the weapon Set up/march order an azimuth gyro (ABLE). Compute a three-point resection. Construct terrain gun position correction (TGPC) Determine and announce fire commands for a mass Emplace/recover spades on the M109/M109A1. for firing. Measure azimuth with an azimuth gyro (ABLE). Compute azimuth from Polaris tabular observation fire mission. 0 Establish and maintain communications with FDC. Direct the personnel of the cannon section during Measure distances with a 30-meter steel tape. sectors. data. Determine firing data by solution of a met to a target. Emplace/recover collimator. emplacement. Perform a fifth-order astronomic observation. Determine basic firing data for an HE projectile with & Compute azimuth from simultaneous observation Emplace/recover aiming posts. Perform a fifth-order simultaneous observation. a graphical firing table (GFT) or G FT fan (fuze quick, Record the executive officer report. Verify emplacement of aiming points and recording data. C7y & Transport cannon ammunition on vehicles. of deflections. Perform a Polarls-Kochab observation. Convert to common control. time, and VT). Skill Level 3 1Ï, Operate the materiel handling hoist on the M548 Verify boresight performed with a DAP. Prepare field recorder's notebook for use. Construct a GFT setting and apply deflection & Determine a battalion comparative VE, group pieces Conduct a low angle precision registration (fuze cargo carrier. Render required reports to FDC. Record field notes. Skill Level 3 corrections to a GFT/GFT fan. quick and time). Store cannon ammunition at a cannon position. Direct the personnel of the cannon section during Record field notes for astronomic observations. according to comparative VE, and determine base Plan a traverse scheme. Determine basic firing data for HE with a GFT setting Conduct an FFE mission on a target outside transfer Monitor/relay and record fire commands. indirect fire missions. Prepare for operation and operate radio set piece comparative VE. Plan an astronomic observation. applied (GFT or GFT fan). limits (fuze time). Prepare separate loading ammunition for firing. Determine that the weapon is safe to fire. AN/PRC-77. Select survey stations. Compute and announce site, angle of site, and Skill Level 4 Set/lay the cannon for quadrant with the range Communicate information over tactical radio nets. Supervise a survey party. vertical angles. quadrant. Skill Level 4 Enter and leave a radio net. Insure that the FDC section is prepared to perform Load a prepared round for firing (separate loading Locate traverse errors. Complete the record of fire for low angle adjust fire Select a firing position for a cannon. its fire direction mission. Skill Level 2 Check survey field records. (fuze quick, time, and VT). ammunition). Insure that FDC is prepared to perform a fire mission 0 Direct the personnel in the firing battery during Select the position for an observation post. Ram a projectile with the power rammer on the Operate the hand-held calculator SR-56. Determine total corrections for solution of a & indirect fire missions. using manual procedures. M109/M1Q9A1. Compute azimuth and distance between known concurrent met message. «O •O Lay the firing battery using the M2 aiming circle by Skill Level 4 Perform net control station duties. & Fire the cannon. coordinates with the SR-56. Determine position corrections by solution of a CH the orienting angle method. Insure that communications equipment is properly Place unfired powder Increments in powder pit. Compute a traverse leg with the SR-56. Plan a survey concurrent met message. installed and operated. £ Clear powder chamber after firing. Compute survey closing data with the SR-56. Analyze a completed survey Install and operate field telephone TA-312/PT. &

6-17 FOLDIN I 6-17 CROSSWALK FOLDOUT FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

Key points

V'

The highest priority for the cannon battalion commander is training. Training evaluations must be valid. Training plans are based on training deficiencies determined from evaluation. Training is programed and executed on a systematic basis. Training management must be continuous to be effective.

6-17 FOLDOUT 6-18 FM 6-20-1

APPENDIX A:

Divisional and Nondivisional Cannon Battalions

Divisional cannon battalions.

ES 30 V «5 *) 0

æ

r a

A-1 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

Cannon battalion, 105-mm (T), batteries, and a service battery. The infantry division (fig A-l), is battalion has four fire support sections organized, trained, and equipped to organic to the headquarters and provide nonnuclear direct support fires to headquarters battery—one section for a maneuver brigade, to reinforce fires of the maneuver brigade and one for each of other field artillery units, and to provide three maneuver battalions. Fire support general support to the division. (FS) teams for the infantry companies The 105-mm (T) battalion is organized as are also organic to the headquarters and a self-sustaining tactical and adminis- headquarters battery to provide fire trative unit, consisting of a headquarters support and observer personnel at that and headquarters battery, three firing level. Fire support sections and FISTs are

FIELD ARTILLERY BATTALION, 105-mm (T), INFANTRY DIVISION lä TOE 6-155H

TOEÎ5-156H TOE 6-157H TOE (-159H [X] HHB m 105-mm (T) SVC TGI ACQ ASSETS INDIRECT FIRE WRNS SMALL ARMS

105-mm (T) HOW ....18 RIFLE, 5.56-mm....510 WLR.. 0 MG, 7.62-mm 43 MTLR. 0 LAUNCHER,40-mm 46 FSO... 4 AIR DEFENSE WRNS MG. 50-CAL 6 FIST... 8 LIAISON SEC 0 REDEYE TEAM 3 MET SEC 0

Figure A-1.

A-2

\ APPENDIX A FM 6-20-1 equipped by TOE with the necessary fires of other field artillery units. The radios, vehicles, and equipment to staffing of this battalion, commonly perform fire support and observer referred to as a composite battalion, is functions. similar to that of the infantry division Cannon battalion, 155-mm(T)/8- 105-mm battalion. The battalion has a inch (SP), infantry division (fig A- liaison section providing the capability 2), is organized, trained, and equipped to to establish liaison with a reinforced unit provide field artillery fires, to include when the 155-mm/8-inch battalion is nuclear fires, in general support of an assigned the mission of reinforcing the infantry division and to augment the fires of another field artillery unit.

FIELD ARTILLERY BATTALION, 155-mm (T)/8-INCH (SP), INFANTRY DIVISION

11 TOE 6-165H

TOE Ç-166H TOE 6-167H TOE 6-358H I TOE 6-159H

HHB 8-INCH(SP) svc 155-mm (T) TOT ACQ ASSETS INDIRECT FIRE WRNS SMALL ARMS 155-mm(T) HOW. 18 8-INCH (SP) HOW 4 RIFLE, 5.56-mm... .652 WLR 0 MG, 7.62-mm 51 MTLR 0 LAUNCHER,40-mm 54 FSO 2 AIR DEFENSE WPNS MG, 50-CAL 18 FIST. 6 LIAISON SEC 1 REDEYE TEAM 4 MET SEC 0

Figure A-2.

A-3 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

Fire support sections and FISTs for the to include nuclear fires, to a maneuver armor battalion and the infantry brigade and to augment the fires of other (mechanized) battalion in the infantry field artillery units. division are assigned to this battalion by TOE. The organization of the 155-mm (SP) battalion is similar to that of the 105-mm (T) battalion. Significant differences are Cannon battalion, 155-mm (SP), in mobility, range, and caliber. Since the armored or mechanized division battalion is normally employed in the (fig A-3), is organized, trained, and direct support role, it has organic fire equipped to provide direct support fires, support sections and FISTs.

FIELD ARTILLERY BATTALION, 155-mm (SP) ARMORED/INFANTRY (MECH) DIVISION

TOE 6-365H

TOE 6-366H TOE 6-367H TOE 6-369 —I_ -L_

SVC HHB 155-mm (SP) TGT ACQ ASSETS INDIRECT FIRE WPNS SMALL ARMS

155-mm(SP)HOW ...18 RIFLE, 5.56-mm. .556 WIR.. 0 MG. 7.62-mm 29 MTLR. 0 LAUNCHER,40-mm 55 FSO... 4 AIR DEFENSE WPNS MG, 50-CAL 50 FIST... 9

LIAISON SEC 0 REDEYE TEAM 3 MET SEC 0

Figure A-3.

A-4 APPENDIX A FM 6-20-1

Cannon battalion, 8-inch (SP), (SP) general support battalion of the armored or mechanized division infantry division. Significant differences (fig A-4), is organized, trained, and are in the firing battery configurations. equipped to provide field artillery fires, to This 8-inch (SP) battalion has three include nuclear fires, in general support firing batteries, each with four 8-inch of an armored or mechanized division (SP) howitzers; the 155-mm (T)/8-irich and to augment the fires of other field (SP) has three firing batteries with six artillery units. 155-mm (T) howitzers each and one firing battery with four 8-inch (SP) howitzers. The organization of this 8-inch battalion Armor divisions are authorized 11 is similar to that of the 155-mm (T)/8-inch maneuver battalions and infantry

FIELD ARTILLERY BATTALION, 8-INCH (SP), ARMORED/INFANTRY (MECH) DIVISION -II (Z) TOE 6-395H

TOE 6-396H TOE 6-397H TOE ¿-399H i (JD CD HHB 8-INCH (SP) SVC TOT ACQ ASSETS INDIRECT FIRE WPNS SMALL ARMS

WIR 0 8-INCH(SP) HOW 12 RIFLE, 5.56-mm....524 MTLR 0 FSO(ARMOR) 3 MG. 7.62-mm 43 FSO(MECH) 2 LAUNCHER,40-mm 57 FIST(ARMOR) 9 FIST(MECH) 6 AIR DEFENSE WPNS MG. 50-CAL 27 LIAISON SEC 1 MET SEC 0 REDEYE TEAM 3

Figure A-4.

A-5 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

(mech) divisions are authorized 10 airborne brigade. Organization of this maneuver battalions. Fire support battalion is similar to that of the 105-mm sections for the additional maneuver (T) battalion of the infantry division. battalions (above nine) and the Differences in TOE result because this divisional cavalry squadron are assigned battalion must be capable of being to this battalion by TOE. completely air dropped. The head- Cannon battalion, 105-mm (T), quarters and service elements of the airborne division (fig A-5), is battalion are consolidated into a organized, trained, and equipped to headquarters, headquarters and service provide nonnuclear field artillery fires in battery. The battalion has organic fire direct support of a divisional or separate support sections and FISTs.

FIELD ARTILLERY BATTALION, 105-mm (T), AIRBORNE DIVISION dË TOE 6-205H TOE 6-206H TOE 6-207H

HHB/SVC 105-mm (T) TGT ACQ ASSETS INDIRECT FIRE WRNS SMALL ARMS

105-mm (T) HOW ....18 RIFLE, 5.56-mm....488 WIR.. 0 MG, 7.62-mm 28 MTLR. 0 LAUNCHER,40-mm 45 FSO... 4 AIR DEFENSE WPNS MG, 50-CAL Q FIST... 9

LIAISON SEC 0 REDEYE TEAM 3 MET SEC 0

Figure A-5.

A-6 APPENDIX A FM 6-20-1

Cannon battalion, 105-mm (T), infantry division. TOE differences result airmobile division (fig A-6), is from the requirement that this battalion organized, trained, and equipped to be 100 percent air transportable. The provide nonnuclear direct support to an headquarters and service elements of the airmobile brigade and to augment the battalion are consolidated into a fires of other field artillery units. The headquarters, headquarters and service organization of this battalion is similar battery. The battalion has organic fire to that of the 105-mm (T) battalion of the support sections and FISTs.

FIELD ARTILLERY BATTALION, 105-mm (T). AIRMOBILE DIVISION

JLL TOE 6-705H

TOE '6-706 H TOE 6-707H m _L_ HHB/SVC 105-mm (T) TGT ACQ ASSETS INDIRECT FIRE WRNS SMALL ARMS

105-mm (T) HOW....18 RIFLE, 5.56-mm....453 WIR.. 0 MG, 7.62-mm 23 MTLR. 0 LAUNCHER.40-mm 26 FSO... 4 AIR DEFENSE WRNS MG, 50-CAL o FIST... 9 LIAISON SEC 0 REDEYE TEAM 3 MET SEC 0

Figure A-6.

A-7 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

Cannon battalion, 155-mm (T), in TOE result from the requirement that airmobile division (fig A-7), is this battalion be 100 percent air organized, trained, and equipped to transportable. Consequently, there is no provide field artillery fires, to include 8-inch (SP) battery in this battalion. nuclear fires, in general support of an airmobile division and to augment the fires of other field artillery units. Separate brigade cannon battalions. This battalion is organized similar to the 155-mm (T)/8-inch (SP) battalion of the Cannon battalion, 105-mm (T), infantry divison. Significant differences separate infantry brigade (fig A-8), FIELD ARTILLERY BATTALION, 155-mm (T), AIRMOBILE DIVISION dö TOE 6-715H TOE i>-716H TOE 6-717H I TÖFJ-719H L Ú2 X HHB 155-mm (T) SVC TGI ACQ ASSETS INDIRECT FIRE WPNS SMALL ARMS

155-mm(T) HOW.....18 RIFLE, 5.56-mm....518 WLR 0 MG, 7.62-mm 31 MTLR 0 LAUNCHER,40-mm 28 FSO o AIR DEFENSE WPNS MG, 50-CAL 0 FIST. 0 LIAISON SEC 2 REDEYE TEAM 3 MET SEC 0

Figure A-7.

A-8 APPENDIX A FM 6-20-1

Ts organized, trained, and equipped to battalion. Minor differences in TOE exist provide nonnuclear artillery fires in because this battalion does not have a support of a separate infantry brigade parent FA headquarters (division., and to augment the fires of other field artillery) and is therefore authorized artillery units. additional personnel/equipment to provide a meteorological and target Because this battalion is usually acquisition capability, which would employed in the direct support role, it is normally be provided by division organized essentially the same as the artillery for divisional field artillery infantry division 105-mm (T) FA battalions.

FIELD ARTILLERY BATTALION, 105-mm (T), INFANTRY BRIGADE (SEPARATE) Ji TOE 6-185H

TOE 6-186H TOE 6-157H TOE 6-159H ¡X]L HHB 105-mm (T) SVC TOT ACQ ASSETS INDIRECT FIRE WPNS SMALL ARMS

105-mm (T) HOW ...18 RIFLE, 5.56-mm....560 WIR.. MG, 7.62-mm 37 MTLR. 1 LAUNCHER,40-mm 42 FSO... 4 AIR DEFENSE WPNS MG, 50-CAL 0 FIST... 9 LIAISON SEC 0 REDEYE TEAM 4 MET SEC 1

Figure A-8.

A-9 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

Cannon battalion, 105-mm (T), difference between this battalion and the separate light infantry brigade infantry division 105-mm (T) battalion (fig A-9), is organized, trained, and is that the headquarters and service equipped to provide nonnuclear artillery element of the battalion are combined fires in direct support of a separate light into a headquarters, headquarters and infantry brigade and to augment the fires service battery. This battalion is also of other field artillery units when authorized personnel and equipment to required. The battalion has organic fire provide a meteorological and target support sections and FISTs. The acquisition capability.

FIELD ARTILLERY BATTALION, 105-mm (T) LIGHT INFANTRY BRIGADE (SEPARATE) 11 TOE 6-115H

TOE 6-116H TOE 6-117H

HHB/SVC m 105-mm (T) TOT ACQ ASSETS INDIRECT FIRE WPNS SMALL ARMS

105-mm (T) HOW ....18 RIFLE, 5.56-mm.. .531 WIR 0 MG, 7.62-mm 31 MTLR 1 LAUNCHER,40-mm 32 FSO 4 AIR DEFENSE WPNS MG, 50-CAL 0 FIST. 9

LIAISON SEC 0 REDEYE TEAM 4 MET SEC 1

Figure A-9. • APPENDIX A FM 6-20-1 Cannon battalion, 155-mm (SP), armored or mechanized 155-mm (SP) separate armored brigade (fig A- battalion. Differences in TOE exist 10), is organized, trained, and equipped to because this battalion does not have a provide direct support fires, to include parent headquarters (division artillery) nuclear fires, to a separate armored and therefore must have the capability to brigade and to augment the fires of other provide its own target acquisition and field artillery units. This battalion is meteorology. organized essentially the same as the

FIELD ARTILLERY BATTALION. 155-mm (SP). ARMORED BRIGADE (SEPARATE) II TOE 6-375H

TOE 6-376H TOE 6-367H TOE &-369H L muti miL HHB 155-mm (SP) SVC TGT ACQ ASSETS INDIRECT FIRE WPNS SMALL ARMS

155-mm(SP) HOW ...18 RIFLE, 5.56-mm....592 WIR.. 1 MG, 7.62-mm 34 MTLR. 1 LAUNCHER,40-mm 54 FSO... 4 AIR DEFENSE WPNS MG, 50-CAL 38 FIST... 9 LIAISON SEC 0 REDEYE TEAM 4 MET SEC 1

Figure A-10.

A-11 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

Nondivisional cannon battalions. support sections and FISTs. Corps cannon battalions each have one organic liaison section, providing the capability to establish liaison with other field Nondivisional (corps) 105-mm, artillery units when the battalion is 155-mm, and 8-inch cannon employed to reinforce the fires of those battalions are organized similar to units. Figures A-ll through A-14 show those of divisional or separate brigade the organization of corps 105-mm, 155- field artillery battalions except that corps mm (T and SP), and 8-inch cannon battalions do not have organic fire battalions.

FIELD ARTILLERY BATTALION, 105-mm (T)

TOE 6-405H

TOE'6-406H TOE 6-407H I TOE ¿-409H Ö L dr HHB 105-mm (T) SVC TGT ACQ ASSETS INDIRECT FIRE WPNS SMALL ARMS

105-mm (T) HOW ....18 RIFLE, 5.56-mm .432 WIR 0 MG, 7.62-mm 40 MTLR 0 LAUNCHER,40-mm 31 FSO 0 AIR DEFENSE WPNS MG, 50-CAL 0 FIST 0 LIAISON SEC 1 REDEYE TEAM 3 MET SEC 0

Figure A-11. APPENDIX A FM 6-20-1

These cannon battalions are organized, trained, and equipped to provide fires in general support of a force or to reinforce the fires of other field artillery units (corps FA 155-mm and 8-inch battalions are also capable of delivering nuclear fires). These battalions can be employed in direct support of a maneuver force if augmented with communication equipment.

FIELD ARTILLERY BATTALION, 155-mm (T)

11 TOE 6-425H

TOE 6-426H TOE 6-427H TOE ¿-429H

HHB 155-mm (T) SVC TGT ACQ ASSETS INDIRECT FIRE WPNS SMALL ARMS

155-mm (T) HOW. 18 RIFLE, 5.56-mm....503 WIR.. 0 MG, 7.62-mm 47 MTLR. 0 LAUNCHER,40-mm 58 FSO... 0 AIR DEFENSE WPNS MG. 50-CAL 0 FIST... 0 LIAISON SEC 1 REDEYE TEAM 3 MET SEC 0

Figure A-12.

A-13 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

FIELD ARTILLERY BATTALION, 155-mm (SR) II TOE 6-455H

i 1 TOE 6-456H TOE 6-457H TOE 6-459H Ö Ö HHB 155-mm (SP) SVC

TOT ACQ ASSETS INDIRECT FIRE WPNS SMALL ARMS

155-mm(SP) HOW . .18 RIFLE, 5.56-mm. .501 WIR Q MG, 7.62-mm 48 MTLR 0 LAUNCHER,40-mm 54 FSO 0 AIR DEFENSE WPNS MG, 50-CAL 38 FIST. 0 LIAISON SEC 1 REDEYE TEAM 3 MET SEC 0

Figure A-13.

A-14 APPENDIX A FM 6-20-1

FIELD ARTILLERY BATTALION, 8-INCH (SP) 11 TOE 6-445H

T0E'6-446H TOE 6-447H TOE ¿-449H Ö HHB 8-INCH (SP) SVC TGT ACQ ASSETS INDIRECT FIRE WPNS SMALL ARMS

8-INCH (SP) HOW....12 RIFLE, 5.56-mm. .464 WIR 0 MG, 7.62-mm 48 MTLR 0 LAUNCHER,40-mm 36 FSO 0 AIR DEFENSE WPNS MG, 50-CAL 15 FIST 0 LIAISON SEC 1 REDEYE TEAM 3 MET SEC 0

Figure A-14.

A-15 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

Gun battalion, 175-mm (SP) (fig A- This battalion, like other corps cannon 15) is unique in that this caliber is not battalions, has no FSO nor FIST organic to divisions or separate brigades. capability but does have a liaison section. This section provides the The battalion is organized, trained, and capability to establish liaison with other equipped to provide general support to a field artillery units when the battalion is force. reinforcing the fires of those units.

FIELD ARTILLERY BATTALION, 175-mm (SP)

û TOE 6-435H

TOE ^-436H TOE 6-437H TOE 6-439H ö HHB 175-mm (SP) SVC TGT AGO ASSETS INDIRECT FIRE WPNS SMALL ARMS

175-mm(SP) HOW.....12 RIFLE, 5.56-mm....441 WIR Q MG, 7.62-mm 45 MTLR 0 LAUNCHERJO-mm 36 FSO 0 AIR DEFENSE WPNS MG, 50-CAL 15 FIST. 0 LIAISON SEC 1 REDEYE TEAM 3 MET SEC 0 i

Figure A-15.

A-16 FM 6-20-1 APPENDIX B:

Functions Of The Primary Staff

The battalion staff.

CANNON BATTALION COMMANDER AND STAFF

CSM BjOO US BN CDR

Si S3 X

CHAPLAIN S5 (CIV-MIL OPS) SU EON

NOTES NOTE 1 NOTE 3

CESO MOT OFF AMMO OFF RSO/TAPLT LOR

NOTE 2 NOTE 4

Notes. 1. When authorized by MTOE; otherwise, commander should designate another staff officer to perform this function. 2. Target acquisition platoon is authorized in FA battalions organic to separate brigades. 3. In nondivisional units only. In divisional units a warrant officer (physician's assis- tant) is provided. 4. Assigned to service battery. 5. In nondivisional units only.

B-1 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

The battalion staff assists the carried out in the manner intended. Also, commander to command control and it is often the command sergeant major coordinate all battalion activities. The who recognizes which of the command- commander organizes his staff as he er's policies are in need of modification or deems necessary and assigns functions change. to the staff to accomplish the mission. Staff officers are not commanders. Staffs The executive officer. The executive exist to support commanders, so it is officer's functions and responsibilities necessary for the commander to tell the are similar to those of a chief of staff. He staff what it is they are to do, at least in may be directed to coordinate and general terms. Staffs assist all supervise staff activities, represent or act commanders in the battalion. Staff for the commander when directed to do sections gather information and furnish so, and—as second in the chain of appraisals and advice to commanders. command— he must be prepared to take Staff sections, working in coordination command of the battalion at any time. He with each other, with battery may also serve as a deputy commander commanders, and with staffs in other for administration and logistics, organizations, convert the commander's overseeing the Si and S4 and their decisions into plans and orders, which attendant sections in the performance of they disseminate to the command. their support duties and concentrating on administration, resupply, maintenance, The command sergeant major. and battalion trains. The command sergeant major is the senior enlisted man in the battalion. He has his fingers on the pulse of the Staff functions. command and advises the commander on enlisted matters. He is often the one who The following pages describe functions of first discovers that the commander's the primary staff that pertain to common decisions and policies are not being tasks of the cannon battalion. STAFF RELATIONSHIPS

Section I. Personnel

TASK SI S4 S2 S3

1. Maintenance of unit strength. a. Loss Maintains a contin- Furnishes antic- Considers estimating. uous loss estimate ipated effects of impact of antic- balanced against enemy mass ipated losses forecast replace- destruction on courses of ments. weapons. action.

B-2 APPENDIX B FM 6-20-1

TASK SI S4 S2 S3

b. Personnel Supervises system of Considers personnel Considers reports and records and reports strengths in plan- personnel records. showing status of ning requirements strengths in personnel matters for logistics formulating including strength operations. plans and reports, casualty determining reports, and person- vulnerabil- nel requisitions. ities.

c. Replace- Determines require- Recommends prior- Recommends Recommends ments. ments; supervises ity of assignment to disposition of priority of requisitioning combat service specially assignments procedures; support elements trained intelli- when replace- recommends alloca- when strength is crit- gence person- ments are tions; establishes ical; provides logis- nel. critical. policies and proce- tic support of dures for pro- replacement system. cessing; plans for movement.

2. Personnel Classifies and management. assigns personnel.

Prisoners of Plans for and super- Provides food and Estimates the Considers war. vises custody, emergency clothing; number and requirements administration, provides transporta- capture rate of for tróop units utilization, and tion and coordinates PWs; desig- as guards for treatment of prison- evacuation. nates detention large numbers ers of war and civil- areas; insures of PWs; coor- ian internees. screening and dinates mili- initial interro- tary police gation of select- (MP) support. ed PWs.

3. Develop- Exercises staff ment and responsibility for maintenance of postal, finance, morale. religious, exchange, welfare, and legal services, and rest and leave.

a. Decora- Recommends poli- Procures decora- tions and cies for decorations tions as required. awards. and awards; insures that recommenda- tions for awards are made promptly.

B-3 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

TASK S1 S4 S2 S3

b. Graves Exercises staff Coordinates registration. responsibility for transportation. planning and super- vising graves regis- tration activities.

4. Health Develops estimate of Provides additional Provides S1 Provides plan service. injury, sick, and transportation as with enemy of operations wounded rate for required. situation and and present future operations; capabilities and dispositions recommends policy characteristics for planning for evacuation and of the area of for evacuation hospitalization of operations that and hospitali- casualties due to may affect zation; fallout contamina- evacuation or requests at- tion and chemical or hospitalization tachment biological warfare. plans. of medical units and/or facilities when ap- proved by the commander; requests Army aviation for evacuation requirements.

5. Maintenance Exercises staff Furnishes statistics Monitors Includes cor- of discipline, responsibility for on trends of loss or matters of dis- rective meas- law, and order. matters of discipline, damage to equip- cipline, law, ures in train- law, and order; ment due to and order for ing programs arranges for courts- carelessness. impact on secu as directed. martial within com- rity clearances. mander's jurisdic- tion and desires.

6. Headquar- Coordinates logis- Assists SI and Coordinates ters manage- tics support, includ- HQ battery the general ment. ing shelter, repair, commander in location, time, construction, and planning for and conditions maintenance for the counterintelli- of movement headquarters. gence measures of the HQ for movement, and overall location, and defense of the operation of the HQ area with headquarters. HQ battery commander.

B-4 APPENDIX B FM 6-20-1

TASK S1 S4 S2 S3

7. Message Coordinates center the internal operations. distribution of Incoming mes- sages and use of motor mes- sages with the CESO.

Section II. Intelligence

TASK S2 S3 S4 S1

. Collection of information.

a. Recon- Originates air recon' Recommends area naissance. naissance requests for air reconnais- and disseminates sance. results.

b. Target Plans target acquisi- Informs commander acquisition. tion in coordination of plans that affect with S3; coordinates target acquisition the actions of organ- activities; evaluates ic and attached tar- potential targets get acquisition per- developed by the S2; sonnel and equip- assesses target ment; exchanges in- location, surveil- formation with in- lance reports, and telligence sections of intelligence from higher, adjacent, FISTs and FSOs to and supported units; S2. receives and ana- lyzes shelling reports (SHELREP) and crater analysis reports; provides derived target infor- mation to S3.

B-5 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

TASK S2 S3 S4 S1

c. Prediction Receives informa- Monitors fallout pre- Estimates the Uses fallout as of fallout for tion on location, diction information effect pre- a factor in nuclear weap- height of burst and evaluates impact dicted fallout estimating ons employed (HOB), and yield of on operations; esti- will have on casualties and by enemy or enemy-delivered mates the effect of logistical sup- replacement friendly forces. weapons; dissemi- predicted fallout on port and initi- requirements. nates this informa- the area of opera- ates actions to tion to staff. tions. minimize effect; estimates vul- nerability of trains areas to predicted fall- out and initi- ates plans to minimize vul- nerability.

d. Technical Uses technical Intel- Receives and Evaluates tech- intelligence. ligence in studies; requests technical nical intelli- disseminates techni- intelligence that gence material cal intelligence. may affect operation that affects of battalion. logistics.

e. Weather Requests and dis- Analyzes weather Analyzes Analyzes information. seminates weather information for weather infor- weather infor- information; obtains effect on operations mation for mation for and distributes and training; effect on logis- effect on meteorological mes- informs S2 of re- tics activities. health of sages; prepares quirements for mete- personnel. meteorological plan orological messages. when authorized a met section.

2. Production Obtains, analyzes, Analyzes plans and Passes any of intelligence. and disseminates In- area of operation to intelligence formation on area of determine map received from operation; prepares coverage required. handling PWs and disseminates to S2. intelligence esti- mates as required; prescribes allow- ances for maps and map substitutes (in coordination with S3); requests and dis- tributes maps and map substitutes. APPENDIX B FM6-20-1

TASK S2 S3 S4 SI

3. Develop- Collects and recom- Recommends EEI ment of essen- mends to the com- pertaining to tial elements of mander essential potential targets. information. elements of infor- mation (EEI) for inclusion in bat- talion Intelligence collection plan; disseminates ap- proved EEI to staff and subordinate units.

4. OPSEC. Provides informa- Designates areas tion as to what the and activities requir- enemy's intelligence ing OPSEC counter- collection capabili- measures; plans and ties are in the battal- supervises imple- ion area of opera- mentation of OPSEC tion; supervises per- countermeasures. sonnel and document physical security.

5. Intelligence Prepares intelli- Implements intelli- training. gence training pro- gence training, grams; establishes including electronic requirements for security and elec- intelligence training tronic counter- material; coordi- countermeasures nates EW training (ECCM). with CESO.

Section III. Operations

TASK S3 S2 S4 SI

1. General Advises commander Provides command- Advises com- Advises com- operations. . on organization and er and staff with cur- mander/S3 on mander/S3 on training; maintains rent intelligence sit- ability to sup- ability to sup- information on uation; supervises port operation. port opera- friendly tactical intelligence and tion. situation. counterintelligence activities.

♦ B-7 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

TASK S3 S2 S4 S1

2. Training. Prepares and super- Supervises and eval- Recommends, Recommends, vises execution of uates intelligence supervises, and supervises, training programs; training; provides S3 evaluates logis- and evaluates supervises the plan- with training tical training, administra- ning and conduct of recommendations. particularly tive, person- field exercises; maintenance nel, Uniform determines require- training. Code of Mili- ments for, procures, tary Justice and distributes (UCMJ), and or assigns training medical aids and facilities; training. plans, conducts, and coordinates training evaluation; estab- lishes requirements for and specifies training for battal- ion and battery teams; if assigned FSOs and FISTs, prepares and super- vises their training.

3. Operations.

a. Opera- Based on the com- Provides S3 with Informs S3 of Informs S3 of tions estimate. mander's planning intelligence estimate capability to capability to guidance and on and analysis of area support mis- support mis- information from of operations. sion and per- sion, of logistics other staff officers, sonnel limita- limitations, and prepares operations tions and may may recom- estimate, which cul- recommend mend course of minates in a recom- course of action from mended course of action from logistics action. personnel viewpoint. viewpoint. APPENDIX B FM 6-20-1

TASK S3 S2 S4 sr

b. Tactical Conducts tactical Provides S3 with Advises S3 of Advises S3 of plans. planning to include continuing intelli- logistical limi- personnel lim- supervision and gence and recom- tations that itations that coordination of sup- mends revisions to may affect the may affect the porting plans; pre- the plan as intelli- tactical plan tactical plan. pares alternate gence information and prepares operation plans as changes; recom- plans for sup- required; recom- mends signal secu- ply, particular- mends allocation rity policy; coordi- ly of ammuni- and priorities for nates enemy EW tion. personnel, supplies threat with CESO (including RSR), and S3; plans for equipment, and processing and eval- positions. uation of PWs, cap- tured documents, When battalion is and equipment. assigned DS mis- sion, develops the FA support plan; keeps other staff officers informed of plans that affect their areas; incorpo- rates electronic security and ECCM into plans; estab- lishes NCS for each battalion net; estab- lishes priorities for air defense of battal- ion elements; recom- mends immediate action status of bat- teries for various phases of the plan; coordinates battal- ion and battery defense plans; estab- lishes policy on attack of targets.

B-9 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

TASK S3 S2 S4 S1

c. Tactical In coordination with Advises S3 concern- Receives trans- Supervises movements. S4, plans, coordi- ing counterintelli- portation movement, nates, and super- gence aspects of requirements internal vises displacements; movements; provides from S3 and organization, in coordination with information on allocates trans- security, and CESO and headquar- weather, terrain, and portation as- allocation of ters commandant, enemy situation. sets; deter- shelter for selects general loca- mines priority headquarters tion of the battalion for movement troops and CP; conducts recon- of service bat- staffs. naissance. tery elements; supervises traffic control.

d. Execu- Supervises and coor- Provides targeting With assistance Maintains tion. dinates actions of information to S3; of ammunition records on and operations section prepares target officer, super- reports battal- (including FDC), acquisition capa- vises resupply ion strength; other staff sections, bilities information; of ammunition; reports and batteries; main- maintains situation informs S3 of casualties and tains and provides map; receives or pre- ammunition and requests information on loca- pares and dissemi- supply status of replacements; tion and status of bat- nates intelligence battalion; super- processes and teries; informs S4 of reports; directs bat- vises supply func- assigns ammunition require- talion counterfire tions to insure replacements in ments; supervises intelligence activities adequate procure- coordination preparation of opera- including coordinat- ment and proper with S3. tional records and ing radar operations, distribution. reports; prepares shell reporting, and orders for the com- crater analysis; pro- mander's approval; cesses PWs, cap- processes and coor- tured documents, dinates nuclear fire and material to missions; through obtain immediate FDOs, supervises intelligence battalion FDC and information. monitors actions of battery FDCs; coor- dinates defense of the battalion against ground, air, and artil- lery attack.

B-10 APPENDIX B FM 6-20-1

Section IV. Logistics

TASK S4 S3 S2 S1

1. Supply. Determines supply Recommends alloca- Provides S4 with Provides unit requirements; pro- tion and priorities for information on ' strengths and cures supplies by equipment and sup- enemy capabilities loss estimates to requisition on the plies having an for Interfering with S4 as a basis for supply base of sup- impact on training or logistic support logistic support port; insures proper tactical mission; and on character- forecast; pro- receipt, storage, and recommends pre- istics of area of vides S4 with an distribution of sup- scribed loads for operations that estimate of num- plies; determines equipment and sup- may affect logistic ber of replace- method of distribu- plies pertaining to support; provides ments for deter- tion; insures distribu- training tactical supply require- mination of tion schedules are mission. ments for prison- equipment and effective; insures ers and projects supply. availability of trans- future require- portation for dis- ments based on tribution; selects estimated capture supply routes. rates.

Transporta- Determines transpor- Provides S4 with Provides informa- Provides S4 with tion. tation requirements; requirements for tion on the area of requirements on coordinates required transportation for operations as it transport of transportation from training or tactical effects the use replacements assigned and purposes; coordi- of transporta- and PWs; coor- attached transporta- nates use of routes tion; keeps S4 dinates with tion assets or from with S4; may recom informed of S3 for use of those received from mend use of routes enemy capabili- military police superior headquar- be restricted for ties that may in- for traffic con- ters; consults with S3 tactical use only. terrupt routes. trol and disci- to determine alloca- pline, law, and tions and priorities; order responsible for enforcement. administrative move- ments to include selection of routes (in coordination with S3), highway regula- tion, and traffic control.

B-11 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

TASK S4 ST

3. Services.

a. Priorities Prepares general Provides S4 with re- Submits to the for employ- plan for service sup- quirements for cqm- S4 require- ment. port to include selec- bat service support; ments for com- tion and allocation may recommend pri- bat service of combat service ority of maintenance support. support assets (in effort. coordination with the operations offi- cer), plans for recov- ery and evacuation of vehicles and equipment, collec- tion and disposition of excess property; recommends evacua- tion and repair poli- cies; recommends amount and type of maintenance train- ing; provides com- mander and staff with evaluation of maintenance condi- tions, estimate of impact on planned operations, and recommendations for correction or improvement of conditions.

b. Movement Selects general loca- Provides S4 Coordinates and general tion of support area; with enemy sit- with S4 on location for designates time of uation and cap- general loca- combat service movement of service abilities affecting tion and time of support units; coordinates location of movement as activities. with supporting logistic activ- concerns activities. ities and time of administra- movement. tive activities.

i B-12 APPENDIX B FM 6-20-1

TASK S4 S3 S2 S1

c. Mainte- Supervises mainte- Coordinates with S4 nance. nance program; for inclusion of coordinates backup maintenance train- support for mainte- ing and supply econ- nance beyond the omy In training pro- capability of as- gram; CESO coordi- signed or attached nates COMSEC maintenance assets. evacuation and communlcatlons- electronlcs (CE) organizational maintenance and external support requirements.

d. Utilities Coordinates activ- for facilities. ities pertaining to maintenance and repair of utilities for facilities.

e. Collection Provides subordi- May recommend use, Collection and and disposition nate units with guid- allocation, and pri- disposition of of excess prop- ance for disposition ority of issue of captured enemy erty, salvage, of excess property, excess property. materiel are the and captured salvage, and cap- primary staff materiel. tured materiel; allo- responsibilities cates usable supplies of the S4 but and equipment (coor- coordination dinates with S3). with S2 and technical intel- ligence person- nel is required.

B-13

FM 6-20-1

APPENDIX C: Communications

To provide firepower at the right place and time, the cannon battalion must be able to communicate. Observers and fire support team chiefs must be able to transmit calls for fire and provide subsequent corrections without delay or interruption; fire support officers must be able to coordinate the attack of targets rapidly; and fire direction centers must be able to send fire commands to firing sections.

To establish a responsive and may reduce severely the efficient use of dependable communication system, the wire and messengers. cannon battalion communication system The battalion must be prepared to must overcome several limitations. operate in an environment where the enemy will expend numerous resources The battalion has a limited number of to destroy 50 percent of the battalion's FM radios to support requirements such radio communication capability. as a split operations FDC element. The battalion must be able to monitor multiple radiofrequencies concurrently while maintaining continuity of operation during displacement. The battalion must be capable of Communications-electronics communicating over long distances to many diverse elements, such as FISTs, responsibilities. FSOs, reinforcing units, and higher headquarters. Senior to subordinate. Each The battalion must be prepared to place commander is responsible for establish- nearly total reliance on radio ing communications with subordinate communications, as the speed of battle units.

C-1 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

Supporting to supported. A Communications-electronics supporting unit is responsible for staff officer. establishing communications with supported units. / Reinforcing to reinforced. A The CESO works under the staff reinforcing unit is responsible for supervision of the battalion S3 or establishing communications with executive officer. The CESO may also reinforced units. command the headquarters battery communications platoon. The communi- Lateral communications. Responsi- cations officer supervises all communica- bility for establishing communications tion activities, to include installation, between adjacent units may be fixed by operation, and maintenance of the next higher commander or standing communication systems and equipment operating procedure. If responsibility is necessary to support combat operations. not fixed by orders or SOP, the He is also responsible for the preparation commander of the unit on the left is of the battalion communications- responsible for establishing communica- electronics operation instructions and tions with the unit on the right. safeguarding of communications Restoration. All units must take security material. Principal duties of the prompt action to restore lost communica- CESO during tactical operations are tions. listed in figure C-l. ,

CESO RESPONSIBILITIES DURING TACTICAL OPERATIONS.

TASK CESO ACTIONS

1. Counterintelligence Advises commander and staff on ECCM and security of electronic emitters. Conducts signal security monitoring to determine vulnerabilities and insure personnel are employing authorized codes. 2. Training Recommends, supervises, and evaluates communicationtrainlng. 3. Tactical plans Plans battalion communication system to support tactical and displacement plans. 4. Tactical movements Recommends general location of CP from communication standpoint. 5. Execution Directs the installation, operation, and maintenance of battalion communication system.

Figure C-1.

C-2 APPENDIX C FM 6-20-1

Battalion communications The battalion platoon. telecommunications center.

Il There is a communications platoon in The battalion telecommunications center each headquarters battery. It is is the communication agency that organized with a platoon headquarters, a receives, transmits, and delivers wire section, and a radio section. The messages for the commander and the communications platoon installs, staff. Telecommunications center operates, and maintains the communica- procedures should insure accuracy, tion system for the cannon battalion speed, and security. Procedures that will command control and trains elements. meet the needs of the unit and conform to the specific requirements established by The platoon performs organizational higher headquarters should be included maintenance on battalion headquarters in the unit SOP. The battalion TOE and headquarters battery communica- provides the minimum number of tion equipment. It also provides personnel required to operate the center organizational maintenance for the under field conditions. During sustained subordinate units of the battalion. All operations, additional personnel may be elements of the battalion evacuate required to assist in operating the equipment for repair through the telecommunications center and perform communications platoon. as unit messengers. Detailed information on tactical telecommunications center The platoon installs and operates the procedures is in FM 24-17, Tactical battalion wire system. This system Telecommunications Center Operation. includes lines within the headquarters and trains area for the commander, staff, and elements of the headquarters and The battalion communication headquarters battery and lines to subordinate batteries and attached units system. when time and conditions permit. Priorities for installation of lines are Within the cannon battalion, the means normally established by SOP or as of communication available are radio, directed by the battalion commander or wire, visual signals, sound signals, and S3. The platoon operates AM radiotele- messengers. The battalion TOE and the typewriter equipment in the division commander's policies establish the artillery brigade RATT net(s). personnel and equipment available in the battalion for each of these means. Each The exact composition of the platoon means of communication has certain headquarters varies with each type of capabilities and limitations. The battalion. Two key personnel are the reliability of the communication systems platoon leader and battalion communica- can be enhanced by the use of all means. tions chief. Their duties and responsibil- Communication means are discussed in ities are outlined in FM 11-50, Combat FM 24-17 and in FM 24-1, Combat Com- Communications Within the Division. munications. '

C-3 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

Radio. Radio communication, both FM more time, men, and equipment to install and AM, is subject to interference such as and maintain than radio, but it affords static, undesired reception from other person-to-person conversation, radios (mutual interference), and teletypewriter communication, and less deliberate interference (jannniing). To vulnerability to EW. To reduce radio avoid detection by enemy direction- traffic and to increase survivability, finding equipment, the battalion must units should install wire at every use all other means to communicate until reasonable opportunity. it is absolutely necessary to use radio. The advantages of radio are that communication can be quickly Sound and visual communica- established, and it can be employed while tions. These signals may be used to send moving. prearranged messages over short distances and to pass information quickly to a large number of persons. FM radio. FM radio is restricted by Their proper use requires extensive intervening obstacles as well as by training because such signals are easily electronic line of sight. However, these misunderstood. Also, their use may be restrictions can be overcome by use of restricted by poor visibility, combat carefully selected retransmission sites or noise, or security requirements. aircraft retransmission facilities. FM Authorized signals are found in the unit radios are used by the battalion CEOI. Sound and visual communica- commander, battalion FDC, fire support tions may be included in the division personnel, organic batteries, and other CEOI extract and should be used at every authorized users for command control opportunity. Signals not included in the and for fire missions. FM radio users CEOI may be established for use within requiring secure communication are the cannon battalion provided they are provided secure equipment, TSEC/ understood by all and are changed KY-38s, with their FM radios. frequently to avoid compromise.

AM radio. AM radios have longer Sound communications include planning ranges than FM radios but vehicle horns, whistles, and voice. Sound have more complicated tuning and communications may range from simple operating procedures and are sensitive to SOP, such as three beeps from a vehicle atmospheric interference. In cannon horn to warn of hostile aircraft, to battalions, AM radios are used primarily prearranged recognition signals, such as in the operation of radio teletype writers. thumping two steel helmets together in Voice communication is not currently periods of limited visibility. securable with AM radio, but radiotele- typewriter messages are transmitted in the secure mode. Visual communications include pyrotechnics such as flares and smoke grenades, flags, hand and arm signals, Wire. Wire offers a very dependable and light signals. Visual signals may be means of communication. Wire requires SOP or prearranged and can be as simple

C-4 APPENDIX C FM 6-20-1

as signals for parking a vehicle to and numerical codes should be used. Low- sending extended messages by Morse power transmission, directional code or some other code using a flashlight antennas, and use of terrain to mask or vehicle headlights (white light or IR). signals from enemy DF equipment will When white light or IR is used, care must minimize risk of detection. Messengers be taken to conceal the light from enemy and wire, if available, should be used for observation. lengthy transmissions.

Messengers. Messenger communica- Direct support battalions. The DS tion is a very secure means of battalion requires five internal FM communication, and it is flexible and nets: command fire (CF) direction 1 reliable. However, it is slower than other (CF1), command fire direction 2 (CF2), means, may be limited by weather and and three fire direction nets (Fl, F2, and terrain, and does not afford person-to- F3). There is an additional requirement person conversation. It is effective for for an assigned retransmission delivering long messages over short frequency that is compatible with distances and for transporting large internal net frequencies. The battalion maps and documents. Speed depends on also operates on two external FM nets, the messenger's mode of travel, which the division artillery command/ may be foot, vehicle, or aircraft. intelligence net and the division artillery fire direction net.

Note. Ground surveillance radar can also be used The battalion CF2 net provides a means for communication. A patrol, for example, might of reducing traffic on the battalion CFl report its location by waving a reflector in a net and acts as an emergency or overflow prearranged sequence to a monitoring ground net. It is used with the CFl net, not as a surveillance radar (GSR). substitute net. The CFl net is the primary net of the battalion. All battalion stations open and operate in this net at the beginning of each new call sign and frequency period, unless otherwise Communications operations. directed by the battalion commander.

When the scheme of maneuver has been developed, the CESO makes a map The fire nets are monitored by reconnaissance and, if possible, a visual appropriate FDCs and FSOs but are used reconnaissance to determine any special only when there is a need to transmit communication requirements, wire time-sensitive traffic. They are the most routes when wire is to be used, and a critical nets of the battalion. Because of suitable location for the battalion TOC. the restricted communication capability of the FIST, its assigned fire net is the primary link for providing responsive When radio is used, transmission must be field artillery support to maneuver units. kept short. Secure means or operational These nets must be protected not only

C-5 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION OPERATIONS

from early exposure to enemy EW even the firing batteries may outdistance activities but also from net overload that their communications capability. The will reduce communication responsive- retransmission station acts as a quick ness. Figure C-2 shows a method of and responsive means to reestablish FM sequencing the use of nets to meet radio communications. The station is changing conditions. sited on terrain that will provide optimum communications between battalion and battery FDCs, FSOs, and The battalion retransmission station FISTs. It normally monitors the assigned (communications platoon AN/VRC-49) retransmission frequency and the CF must be positioned to provide continuous frequency. The station operates in the service to all subordinate stations. Fire manual retransmission mode and support teams, fire support officers, switches to the automatic mode only mobile command and staff sections, and when such service is requested or

FM RADIO NET SEQUENCING.

Condition CF1 CF2 FI, F2, F3

Low density traffic All FISTs and Monitored at Battery FDCs, battalion stations battalion FDC / battalion FDC, and No jamming (except those only. battalion FSOs monitoring corps (monitor only). artillery survey channel and air defense net) initially operate in this net.

Medium density Battalion FDC opens CF and directs those Individual FISTs or traffic stations not involved in operationally FDCs expose appro- urgent traffic on the CF net to enter the priate fire nets as Ineffective jamming CF2 net (e.g., service battery, target required by actual acquisition and survey elements, and air traffic demand. If defense (AD) elements). FISTs use ÇF2 or retrans for FDC entry, High density traffic Limited to urgent Battalion FDC they must return to CF operational (NCS) places or assigned fire net (If traffic noncritical opened) after use, stations on listen- unless otherwise ing silence. This directed by the bat- Moderate to heavy allows the CF2 to talion FDC. jamming , be a more credible overflow channel for operationally

Figure C-2.

C-6 APPENDIX C FM 6-20-1

directed. Customers who require In addition to the division artillery retransmission call on the retransmis- fire direction net (FM) and the divi- sion frequency and are handled on an sion artillery command/intelligence individual basis with priority to FIST net (FM), the DS artillery battalion stations. Normally, the retransmission operates in a minimum of one AM/RATT station will provide service on the CF net; division artillery command fire direction in the event of a fire mission, it will net (usually division artillery CF1). If the retransmit to the battalion or battery battalion has a nuclear capability, a FDC on any compatible frequency second AM capability may be authorized assigned to the battalion. A compatible for use in the division artillery CF2 frequency should have a minimum AM/RATT net. This net is used for all separation of 10 megahertz from the nuclear fire planning and the retransmission frequency and be checked coordination of operations of nondivision against the interfering frequency chart artillery operating in support of the in the VRC-12 series radio TM. division (fig C-3).

NORMAL RADIO CONFIGURATION-DIRECT SUPPORT BATTALION (ARMORED. INFANTRY. MECHANIZED (AIM) DIVISION).

KY-38 KY-38 Div arty comd/intel VRC-46 VRC-46 Bn CF1

KY-38 VRC-46 Bn CF2 Div arty F VRC-46 VRC-46 Bn FI

VRC-46 Bn F2

VRC-46 Bn F3

Div arty CF1 GRC 142

Div arty CF2 GRC 142

Figure C-3.

C-7 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

a

Whenever time and resources permit, the wire from the wirehead or old battery battalion should install a complete wire position, as appropriate. The wire team system to improve communication should operate primarily from the reliability and reduce use of radio. wirehead for quick response. Administra- Realistically, however, battlefield tive lines from battalion to batteries will dynamics frequently prevent installa- be installed as second priority when tion of an entire wire system. The normal resources and the tactical situation wire priorities for the four wire teams are permit. circuits to the supported brigade, organic batteries, and the reinforced field artillery unit. The method of installation from battalion to subordinate cannon —liM 'tMi' I I ~ batteries must be flexible. Depending on relative locations of the battalion and BATTALION WIREHEAD. cannon battery CPs, the use of a central wirehead may reduce installation time. Bn Comd Bn FDC The battalion wire team can install and maintain such a wirehead on a continuous basis. Use of a battalion wirehead (fig C-4) allows maximum flexibility in supporting organic cannon TM 184 batteries. Movement of batteries to new locations may be supported by extending

TM 184 Bn wirehead

FDC BOC FDC BOC C Btry FDC BOC A Btry (new pos) A Btry FDC BOC FDC BOC C Btry B Btry (new pos)

Figure C-4.

C-8 APPENDIX C FM 6-20-1

Wire circuits to subordinate batteries links make use of multiplexing—a provide a means of reducing the traffic system of transmitting multiple voice load on FM radio nets, and the wire and teletype circuits over one METHOD OF DISPLACING A DS BATTALION FDC-SPLITTING circuits to the supported force can serve transmission path at the same time. The THE BATTALION FDC FM RADIO NET COVERAGE. several purposes. Required communica- transmission path can be either radio or tion circuits with the brigade CP and the cable. Multichannel reduces wire and Bn Ops/FDC brigade FSO can be established through cable use, can be extended over great Bn Ops/FDC these wire circuits. An additional benefit ranges, and can be secured. (forward) (rear) is circuit access into the division multichannel system, which provides the Split FDC operation —DS. To insure critical radio net continuity during KY-38 KY-38 FDC with a link through division Bn FDC Bn FDC multichannel to the division artillery displacement, the commander must Div arty F TOC. The DS battalion normally establish priorities for coverage of the VRC-46 VRC-46 attempts to maintain four wire lines to nets lost by displacing vehicles and the supported force but can have radios. The commander identifies critical stations and directs which assets will be satisfactory alternative communications KY-38 even if only two are successfully used to reconstitute those stations when they are lost. Div arty comd/intel maintained. VRC-46 At the battalion level, the net control station radios of the battalion operations Bn CF PRIORITIES FOR WIRE LINES FDC are the most critical. If radios are VRC-46 VRC-46 redistributed to configure for a split FDC operation, the operations FDC should H Priority 1. To the supported force have the highest priority. Bn FI switchboard (providing switched telephone VRC-46 service to the force FSO, the division artillery Radios used to replace lost radios, or to / TOC, or adjacent DS battalion similarly configure for a split FDC operation, will interfaced). KY-38 be radios that are usually deployed in or ' H Priority 2. To the supported force J ** Bn F2 multichannel terminal (to interface with near the battalion headquarters or S3 *Bn X0 prerouted, strap-through circuits from the service areas. Radios that can VRC-47 VRC-46 division artillery TOC, thus establishing the temporarily provide required net DS battalion FDC to division artillery TOC wire coverage in the operations FDC are those Bn F3 line). that belong to the S3, battalion executive *HHB BC GRC-160 GRC-160 H Priority 3. To the supported force FSO officer, HHB commander, service battery (establishing a direct link from the DS battalion FDC to the brigade FSO). commander, battalion maintenance, and the battalion commander. For a short- *S4 or Hi Priority 4. An additional line to the Div arty supported force switchboard (to improve term basis, radios can be remoted into the GRC GRC \ motor switched telephone service for the DS operations FDC. During displacement, 142 CF1 or CF2 142 y officer battalion). CP radio resources are configured to insure continuity of essential communi- cations. Jump or forward battalion FDC Figure C-5. Multichannel systems are used to provide elements must have sufficient resources communications for combat operations to allow for adequate command control * Remote in FDC and to tie units into the area communications during displacement **S3 KY-38 gives secure capability for div arty communications system. Multichannel (fig C-5). comd/intel net

C-9 FOLDIIM FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

An alternate method of displacing the battalion operations FDC is to use a designated battery as the battalion FDC. For active stations in each requirement, the battalion must augment the selected battery's radio strength (fig C-6).

METHOD OF DISPLACING A OS BATTALION FDC (AIM DIV) USING AN FA BATTERY DESIGNATED AS BATTALION FDC ALTERNATE FM RADIO NET COVERAGE Bn Ops/FDC Battery Acting as (forward) Bn Ops/FDC Alt (rear) KY-38 KY-38 Bn CF1 VRC-46 VRC-47 BOC Bn CF 2 VRC-46

Bn FDC KY-38 BC Bn FI VRC-46 VRC-46 Bn F2 VRC-46 VRC-46 Btry FDC KY-38 Bn F 3 VRC-46 (monitor) VRC-47 KY-38 Div arty F . VRC-46

GRC Div arty F GRC 142 or CF2 142

Figure C-6.

C-10 APPENDIX C FM 6-20-1

Divisional general support consists of the battalion operating on the battalions. The divisional general division artillery CF2 AM/RATT net. If support battalion's internal FM net the battalion is assigned a mission of coverage requirements are fewer than reinforcing or general support those of the DS battalions. The GS reinforcing to a direct support unit, the battalion uses a command fire direction external net requirements increase. The net, one battalion fire direction net, and a battalion will operate on the reinforced retransmission frequency. The battalion's CF1 net and the division battalion's external FM net coverage is artillery CFl AM/RATT net if the the same as the direct support battalion has the equipment to enter this battalion's. External AM coverage net (fig C-7).

NORMAL FM RADIO CONFIGURATION TYPE GS BATTALION.

KY-38 VRC-46 Bn CF

VRC-46 Bn F

KY-38 VRC-46 Div arty comd/intel or FA bde CF

KY-38 VRC-46 ’Div arty F

VRC-46 ■ Reinforced bn CF

GRC •Div arty CFl 142

GRC •Div arty CF2 142

Figure C-7.

C-11 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

A general support TOE organized field artillery battalion, if required to assume a mission of direct support, can, through the redistribution of radios, operate in all nets normally associated with the direct support battalion (fig C-8).

TYPE GENERAL SUPPORT BATTALION RECONFIGURED TO A DIRECT SUPPORT BATTALION.

KY-38 KY-38 Div arty comd/intel VRC-46 VRC-46 Bn CF1

KY-38 KY-38 Div arty F VRC-46 VRC-47 ■Bn CF2*

VRC-46 Bn FI** Div arty CF1 GRC 142 VRC-46 ■Bn F2 GRC Div arty CF2 142 VRC-46 ■Bn F3

Figure C-8.

* S3's radio, remoted into FDC ** From bn assets, remoted into FDC APPENDIX C FM 6-20-1

Wire communications. The GS Nondivisional battalions. A battalions (divisional and nondivisional) nondivisional cannon battalion attached will enter at the nearest entry point to to the division artillery will operate on obtain switched telephone entry into the the same nets as a divisional general « division multichannel system. This point support battalion, depending on its could be at a forward area signal center, mission. maneuver brigade, division artillery, reinforcing field artillery brigade, or DS A nondivisional cannon battalion battalion. assigned to a field artillery brigade will Split FDC operation—GS. The same have the same basic net requirements as rationale for distribution of radio the divisional GS battalion in the general resources that applies to DS battalions support role. The only difference in the holds true for a GS battalion. Available nets is that the battalion monitors the radios are those not deployed away from field artillery brigade FM command fire the battalion area with the liaison officer net and AM/RATT nets rather than the (fig C-9). division artillery nets.

DISPLACING A GS BN (MISSION GSR).

Ops/FDC Ops/FDC m (rear) (forward) KY-38 KY-38 Reinf bn CF VRC-46 VRC-46 FDC FDC Bn F VRC-46 VRC-46

KY-38 Div arty comd/intel VRC-46 KY-38 Reinf bn CF HHB Cdr VRC-46 VRC-47 Bn S3 Div arty F or FA bde CF Bn X0 VRC-46

—* V 1 Figure C-9.

m C-13

FM 6-20-1

APPENDIX D:

The Cannon Battalion in Special Environments and in Support of Special Operations

For the cannon battalion, environments or operations are m deemed special when terrain, weather, the nature of the support operation, or a combination of these factors creates a need for alternatives in field artillery tactics or techniques, and there is a requirement for special equipment or skills to support the force. NOTE: References annotated by asteriskf*) areto bepublished.

SPECIAL ENVIRONMENTS ARE: PARAGRAPH ENVIRONMENT REFERENCE D-l Urbanized Terrain FM 90-10# 0-2 Arctic FM 90-11* 0-3 Desert FM 90-3 0-4 Mountain FM 90-6* 0-5 Jungle FM 90-5* 0-6 Nuclear and Chemical FM 100-50

D-1 0 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION # SPECIAL OPERATIONS ARE: PARAGRAPH OPERATION REFERENCE D-7 Airborne and Airmobile FM 90-2* and FM 9041 D-8 River Crossing FM 90-13 D-9 Support of Allied Maneuver Forces FM 100-5 D-10 Counterguerrilla FM 90-8* D-11 Amphibious LFM-01

Many of the considerations and actions the battalion must execute to support maneuver forces in offensive and defensive operations are the same as those applied in these special environments and operations. The intent of the material presented in the following paragraphs is to highlight special considerations for cannon battalion support in these areas.

Military operations on urbanized terrain.

Four categories of the urbanized terrain environment confront field artillery planners. • Village—area with population of 1,000 or less. • Strip area—area that connects a village with a town. • Town (small city)—area with popula- tion of up to 100,000 but not part of major urban area. • Large city—area larger than a town that may have a population in the millions and usually covers an area in excess of 100 square miles.

D-2 APPENDIX D FM 6-20-1

SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS FOR CANNON BATTALIONS SUPPORTING OPERATIONS ON URBANIZED TERRAIN

S2 S3 CESO S1/S4

Met/Survey/ Target Acquisition Registration Fire Planning Tactical Fire Control Plans and Orders Positioning Reconnaissance Displacement Communications css

Buildings can restrict Restricted line of High angle fires are Effects of almost Decentralized control FA units may be Reconnaissance will Urban areas can Building can reduce Munition consump- visual and electronic sight Impairs survey. common. every weapon in of batteries may be required to be more difficult. restrict movement. planning ranges for tions will Increase. observation. lethality and range required. position in or near radios. Maps become out- FA fires are used to can be reduced. urban areas. Cover and conceal- Displacement may be Landlines of com- Maximum use Is dated because of rubble and smoke S5 activities will ment for concentrat- by battery or gun Increased use of wire, munications can be made of aerial recon- construction. many areas. Delay fuzes will be Increase. Certain elements ing forces is readily section. messenger, and impeded. naissance platforms. used frequently. are positioned to available. visual signals will be High angle (HA) Many small units will support with required. Particular attention is registration Is become Isolated. Variable time/dual direct fires on In large urban areas, paid to covering dead used in the urban purpose improved strongpoints. the center and pos- Radio retrans will be space with some Counterfire targets conventional muni- sible entrapment by required. target acquisition may be located In the tions (VT/DPICM) Is Positioning out- rubble should be assets. Registration should urban area. used to clear rooftop side of urban area avoided. Low-power radios be to the rear If combat outposts Is preferable. are remeted from Most targets are possible. FA fires are used to (COP). Extensive route upper floors of build- generated by contaminate areas Urban areas favor reconnaissance is ing to basement for maneuver. Need for accurate and deny use to the White phosphorus the defender. required. Increased range and met/survey/registra- enemy. (WP) is employed for survivability. tlon Increases Separate gun Fires are planned to incendiary effect. because most targets section operations Established civilian are point targets. block exits and will become commo systems (e.g., reinforcements. common. police, cab, Local service station telephone ex- Fires are planned to maps are used If changes) are used. available. mask friendly movements.

FA fires are used to flush out enemy to be attacked by other means.

Assault fires may be used.

M D-3 FOLDIN FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

CHARACTERISTICS OF URBANIZED TERRAIN OPERATIONS

• Difficult command control. • Isolation of small units. • Excellent cover and concealment.

Arctic environment.

The one environmental element having the greatest effect on military operations is the climate. The climate affects personnel, equipment, survivability, operational mobility, and general effectiveness.

EFFECTS OF WINTER ON MILITARY OPERATIONS

• Extreme cold and snow drastically impair effectiveness of troops and equipment. • Extreme cold may force troops to spend much time surviving and very little time fighting. • Snow blindness and long periods of reduced visibility and darkness can reduce direct observation capabilities. • Deep snow can limit ground movement.

CHARACTERISTICS OF SUMMER

• Limited ground mobility during spring thaw. • Long periods of daylight.

D-4 I APPENDIX D FM 6-20-1

SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS FOR CANNON BATTALIONS SUPPORTING OPERATIONS IN AN ARCTIC ENVIRONMENT S2 S3 CESO S1/S4 3 iwatta. Met/Survey/ Target Acquisition Registration Fire Planning Tactical Fire Control Plans and Orders Positioning Reconnaissance Displacement Communications css

Observation for Survey control Is The need for an effec- During periods of Normally, batteries Frequent moves may Snowslides can be Track and wheeled Longer warmup Equipment Is difficult ground FO can be often absent and diffi- tive SEAD program heavy snow and will be widely be required due to the caused by artillery. vehicles will have periods are required to operate and In- restricted by snow, cult to establish. will Increase. spring thaw, muni- dispersed. vastness of the battle- great difficulty oper- for electronic equip- creased malfunc- Ice fogs, physical tion effects will be field. Ice fogs can form ating during deep ment. tlons/breakages can Impali'ment (white- Resection Is used to Smoke can lay close reduced (especially Dissemination of over weapons and snow and spring thaw be anticipated. Radios are often the outs/grayouts), and locate positions. to the ground for ICM). plans and orders may Firing platform units, revealing periods. primary communica- long winter nights. hours. be done by electronic stability Is a problem. locations. Vehicles must be tion means. Abrupt temperature Rates of fire are means. Airmoblllty will have winterized. Aerial observation changes affect During winter nights, usually slower. Emplacement In ava- great Importance. Battery and wire life means provide sur- ballistics. the expenditure of lanche prone areas will be reduced Improved landlines of veillance to great Illumination rounds Warmup rounds are must be avoided. during periods of communication may distance. The need for current will be high. needed more often. extreme cold. be nonexistent and met data Increases. High priority must be greatly extended. placed on the estab- Communications will be conducted over Maps may be Inac- lishment and mainte- More time will be extended ranges. curate or outdated. nance of an effective required to perform air defense. Electronic character- even simple tasks. Lack of good regis- istics change, caus- tration points may Security must be In- ing timing and power Clothing, shelters, require HB/radar creased during problems. tents, and other cold registration. periods of reduced weather equipment visibility. Breath will freeze must be available. Magnetic direction Is microphones; must unreliable. Positions must be use de-ice screen. Aerial resupply Is hardened. essential. Radio breathing or sweating may Weapons, units, and Slave cables are damage internal occupied areas must needed. components. be seasonally camouflaged and Ice must be kept off POL requirements maintained. antennas. will increase (per- sonal heaters, vehicle J Displacement Is warmup). slower because of frozen antenna Ammo resupply Is connections. difficult due to great- er distances and Grounding is difficult fewer routes. due to hard ground; may need to bore holes.

Routine maintenance by operators Is difficult due to small Items to be handled in this weather.

«KMWtîmBI . ¿jALrer-iC!

D-5 D-5 FOLDIN FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

Desert environment

War in the desert is characterized by rapid, mobile operations. These fast- moving battles are more suitable to heavy forces than light forces. The heat and blowing sand will cause tremendous maintenance and personnel problems.

EFFECTS OF DESERT ENVIRONMENT ON MILITARY OPERATIONS

Wide temperature ranges affect personnel and equipment adversely. Periods of draught followed by flash flooding restrict surface movement. Duststorms affect movement.

Weather changes (clear to sandstorm) are abrupt, sometimes closing down military operations. Camouflage and concealment in some areas are nonexistent. Attacks are made with the sun at one's back, low in the sky, or at night.

D-6 APPENDIX D FM 6-20-1

SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS FOR CANNON BATTALIONS SUPPORTING OPERATIONS IN A DESERT ENVIRONMENT

S2 S3 CESO S1/S4

Met/Survey/ Target Acquisition Registration Fire Planning Tactical Fire Control Plans and Orders Positioning Reconnaissance Displacement Communications css

FAAOs should be Astronomic observa- Final protective fires Many smoke and Units will be Aerial reconnais- Displacement may be Radio failures In- A larger supply of used whenever pos- tion may be used to (FPF) will be used Illumination missions dispersed. sance will be normal. frequent. crease because of tires, filters, coolant, sible because depth establish a common only to maintain key can be expected. sand and tempera- lubricants, and clean- perception Is poor for grid. terrain. Position areas se- Dead-reckoning ture variance. ing materials, and ground observers. HE ground burst lected must not techniques, sun com- electrical spare parts Survey control points Offset firing tech- effectiveness may be be stereotyped. passes, and night AM planning ranges Is required. IR detection devices will be few. niques should be reduced. celestial navigation may be reduced. will work better at used. Ingress/egress routes will be required. Increased water night. Resection Is used to are critical. Unidirectional, hori- supply Is a must. locate positions. Suppression pro- Most movement will zontally polarized Detection of water grams are essential, Camouflage and con- be at night. antennas are best. Night resupply will be resupply convoys Is Maps may not be especially SEAD. cealment are of prime common. Important. accurate or Importance. Noise and light disci- Antennas should be available. Fires are planned on pline are paramount. Installed using coun- Snakebite and antl- Location of ATOM any key terrain. Contours are used for terpoise (artificial pest/lnsect kits are and air defense artil- Good map readers positioning In Cross-country mobil- grounds). required. lery (ADA) sites Is are essential. defilade. ity Is excellent for critical. track vehicles and Visual comm (hand Survival training Is Radars and high- Firing platform stabil- poor for wheeled signals, flags) are required. Most targets will be burst registration ity In the sand may be vehicles. good on clear days. highly mobile. will be common. a problem. Heat and bum cases Importance of will Increase. Weather changes All-round security Is OPSEC Increases be- Asbestos gloves are rapidly In morning a must. cause of reliance on essential. and evening. FM radio. FA sound/flash explosive charge Grounding Is poor In decoys are used. the sand. Grounding plates should be Terrain gun position- burled and a salt solu- ing is used. tion poured In.

Radio range In- creases near oases because under- - ground water pro- vides a good ground.

D-7 FOLDIN FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

Mountain environment.

The important factors in mountain warfare are the need to control high terrain and restrictions caused by the geography. The geography restricts surface mobility, ground observation in some spots, positions available for field artillery, communications, avenues of approach, and large unit operations. On the other hand, it enhances fighting from high to low levels, using long-range organic fires from high spots, and ambushes on chokepoints. Infantry forces, especially airmobile, are the most effective in mountains. Available roads will be difficult to negotiate and cause many combat service support problems. Security for all convoys will be necessary. Use of air movements is to be expected.

CHARACTERISTICS OF OPERATIONS IN A MOUNTAIN ENVIRONMENT

Communication restrictions and the need for retransmission. Increased need for high angle fires. Munitions effects reduced by the terrain. Maneuver units fighting from the top down. Small unit operations (platoon, company) being the norm. Maneuver forces relying heavily on indirect fires.

D-8 APPENDIX D FM 6-20-1 )

SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS FOR CANNON BATTALIONS SUPPORTING OPERATIONS IN A MOUNTAIN ENVIRONMENT

S2 S3 CESO S1/S4

Met/Survey/ Target Acquisition Registration Fire Planning Tactical Fire Control Plans and Orders Positioning Reconnaissance Displacement Communications css

Visual and electronic Maximum use Is Support of small unit High angle fires will FA units may be An attempt will be Reconnaissance Air transport may be Wire should be used Equipment loads observation can be made of triangulation actions Is common. be required. attached to maneuver made to fight from the may be accomplished used extensively for extensively. should be as light as enhanced or reduced survey techniques. elements. top down. by map or air. relocating units, possible. dependent on terrain Defensive fires are Munition effects may FAAOs, retrans, and Retrans (AN/VRC-49) usage. May require HA regis- needed for security at be degraded. Time and space Reverse slope posi- Map distance plus 1/3 recons. Is used to overcome Landlines of commu- tration. night. factors are consid- tion areas should be equals actual ground terraln/llne-of-sight nication may be Maneuver generates Met needed more fre- Unobserved fires are ered In resupply. considered. distance. obstacles and Is severely limited mak- more targets with quently, since Isolated units must used more frequently. moved frequently to ing resupply difficult. ground surveillance weather changes have planned Positioning must be Alternate positions avoid detection. radar and sensors quickly. fires available. Smoke is especially on key terrain with are closer. Physical conditioning (REMS) on trails and Survey must be accu- effective along valley commanding fields of Enemy DF can be Is critical. valley floors. rate with emphasis on Snow and rock ava- floors in offensive fire. All-round security is reduced by position- accurate altitude. lanches are used on operations. critical. ing of antennas using Cold weather equip- Use of FAAOs will enemy units. Positioning to sup- mountains as a mask. ment may be Increase. Must monitor powder port isolated units Good cover and con- required. temperature fre- Alternate fire means and cover DS unit cealment must be Continual comm OPs are positioned at quently. are planned Into artil- dead space is critical. available. with subordinate ele- Aerial resupply may different heights. lery dead space. ments and adjacent be the norm. and supported units Variance in altitude Artillery blocking may be Interrupted Heavy wear on carbu- makes accurate fires combined with because of rugged retors, clutches, transfer of fire confining terrain may terrain. axles, and tires is difficult. trap the enemy. expected. Salt in rocky soil will improve the electrical Fewer ti and VT fuzes ground. are needed because of HA firing.

Troops eat more.

Increased altitude sickness Is expected.

D-9 FOLDIN FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

Jungle environment. t The two elements of jungle warfare i having the greatest effect on military operations are climate and vegetation. These combine to restrict surface moves, observation, fields of fire, communi- cations, surveillance, and target acquisition. Conversely, they enhance cover and concealment. Equipment used in the jungle requires more constant and thorough mainte- nance than is needed in most other areas. Light forces, supported by aviation, are the most productive in the jungle. However, elements of a heavy division may be used successfully in selected operations. Road networks are usually scarce, unsecure, and pose a constant threat o| enemy ambushes. " Air movements and air resupply oper- ations may be required.

CHARACTERISTICS OF JUNGLE OPERATIONS

• Restricted maneuver of mechanized forces. • Rapid weather changes.

• Close combat.

• Extremely limited visibility.

Difficulty in providing logistical support.

D-10 APPENDIX D FM 6-20-1

SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS FOR CANNON BATTALIONS SUPPORTING OPERATIONS IN A JUNGLE ENVIRONMENT

S2 S3 CESO S1/S4

Met/Survey/ Target Acquisition Registration Fire Planning Tactical Fire Control Plans and Orders Positioning Reconnaissance Displacement Communications css

Vegetation can re- Maps may be out- FA fires will be used Time, VT, and ICM Batteries can be Engineer support Is Excellent cover and Track and vehicle Planning ranges for Landlines of commu- strict visual and elec- dated or Inaccurate. more often to mark effects can be re- widely dispersed. required to establish/ concealment are movement Is radios may be nication are difficult tronic observation. targets for other fire duced by canopies. harden positions. available. restricted. reduced by foliage. to maintain. Survey control may support means. There Is Increased Should consider be difficult, if not Requests for Illumi- use of frag orders. Mutual support Is There Is Increased Alrmobility is of In- Radio relays may be Munition expenditure placing radars on Impossible. Small unit actions nation fires will In- desirable. emphasis on position creased Importance. needed (airborne). will be high. platforms to Increase should be antici- crease to support defense measures to coverage. Battalion observed pated, but major night operations. Firing platforms for Include direct fire. Maintenance prob- Health hazards due to firing chart tech- actions can be field artillery cannons lems Increase due to disease will Increase. Should make maxi- niques are used expected. Desensitizing caps on are needed In some moisture/rust In com- mum use of FAAOs. frequently. VT are used. areas (riverine munications. Water supply Is Im- Hasty fire planning Is operations). portant; use of purifi- Sound ranging and Radar registration more common. Delay fuze settings Battery life Is cation tablets Is adjustment may be Is used often. are used. Alternate and supple- shortened. considered. required to supple- Fires are planned for mentary positions are ment visual systems. Hasty survey position-oriented located closer. Most radio equipment High humidity will methods are used. defense. Is to be manpacked. affect personnel and Air and ground Local all-round equipment. observers collaborate security must be Wire deteriorates on adjustments. established. rapidly because of Maintenance needs heat ant* humidity. Increase In the Jungle. WP Is used In first Frequency of close round to Improve combat will increase. Antenna radiating Frequent operator observation. elements must be maintenance Is clear of Jungle emphasized. Good use Is made of foliage. Illumination and night Clothing and boots vision devices. wear out often.

Seals on ammunition powder must not be broken until needed.

D-11 FOLDIN FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

Nuclear and chemical MOPP that can provide the basis for a environment. portion of the TAG SOP is in FM 3-12, Operational Aspects of Radiological There are several functions that are Defense. adversely affected when operating in a The vulnerability of a unit to the nuclear nuclear and chemical environment. The threat can be decreased by the adoption overall result will be greatly reduced of a specific nuclear MOPP category. speed and responsiveness of the cannon Each category is described by one or more battalion. Functions most affected are MOPP statements listed in the TAG SOP. listed below. • Positioning will be characterized by Examples of MOPP Statements wide dispersion to avoid wholesaTe loss • All radios except those in the fire of field artillery units as a result of an enemy nuclear and chemical attack. direction center and tactical operations This causes a resultant decrease in center will be turned off, disconnected from antenna and power source, and ability to mass fires. stored in an armored vehicle. • Logistics resupply will be slowed down • Off-duty personnel will occupy to avoid contaminated areas. Personnel work habits will be greatly affected by foxholes with at least 18 inches of the use of protective equipment. overhead cover. • Communications in the areas of a • All messing will be accomplished only nuclear blast will be greatly affected by in enclosed areas. potential electromagnetic pulse effects. • Radiological survey teams will monitor • Continual danger of radiation and the area from date-time group to DTG. chemical contamination places an • All vehicles will be closed to dust with emphasis on early detection and all doors, windows, hatches, and treatment. Assignment of personnel to canvas tightly secured. survey and monitoring teams and other An example of category MOPP III in nuclear, biological, chemical defense standing operating procedures might be functions will affect unit operations a combination of the first three accordingly. Details for use of chemical statements above. missiomoriented protective posture are in FM 21-40, Chemical, Biological, Not all units will have the same nuclear Radiological and Nuclear Defense. MOPP category. The potential Nuclear operations include the hazardous effects to the unit will considerations listed in this section and determine the MOPP status. However, if the nuclear mission-oriented protective the batteries are close enough, a battalion posture. MOPP is that portion of the unit commander may choose to specify one tactical standing operating procedure category for all elements of the that enumerates the specific actions to be command. To facilitate the communica- taken to protect unit personnel and tion of the status, he may identify a equipment should intelligence indicate common alphanumeric code taken from the enemy is about to initiate the use of the CE01, which will indicate a given nuclear weapons or when the unit is to status. Likewise, higher level com- operate in a radiologically contaminated manders may also standardize a code for area. Detailed information on nuclear a given category.

D-12 APPENDIX D FM 6-20-1

SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS FOR CANNON BATTALIONS SUPPORTING OPERATIONS IN A CHEMICAL/NUCLEAR ENVIRONMENT

S2 S3 CESO S1/S4

Met/Survey/ Target Acquisition Registration Fire Planning Tactical Fire Control Plans and Orders Positioning Reconnaissance Displacement Communications css

Effects can reduce Survey may take Response times for SOPs must contain Hardened position Recon may be con- Movement may be Wire, radio wire Inte- Casualties will visual and electronic longer. conventional fire may Immediate action should be prepared. ducted by map only. restricted. gration (RWI), visual Increase. observation. be reduced. status. signal, and messen- Met data must be Positioning may be Passive measures for Displacements will be ger backup are Monitoring will be EEI and other intelli- current. Increased nuclear Chemical, biological, restricted due to personnel and equip- conducted on short required. required. gence requirements state of readiness In and radiological contamination. ment are critical. notice. (OIR) change. Nuclear registrations accordance with (CBR) reporting must EMP vulnerability Is Resupply, for a may be conducted. (IAW) FM 101-31-2. be emphasized. Positioning will be A nuclear vulnerabil- Preinitiation sensitive decreased. period, may cease. critical, since a bat- ity analysis may be units may be required Nuclear support talion may be respon- desired. to move from radlo- Munition security plans are reviewed. sible for firing a large logically contami- Increases. portion of the pulse. Dispersion may be nated areas. Increased. Redistribution of PNL may occur causing additional transport problems.

D-13 FOLDIN FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

Airborne and airmobile Airmobile. A key factor in airmobile operations. operations is the increased degree of mobility. This tactical mobility, not found in other units, gives a commander Airborne. Airborne forces are the ability to— available for introduction directly into battle over long distances from their • Rapidly concentrate, disperse, or home stations. Entries may be by redeploy forces. parachute or air landing. Resupply is • Influence a decisive point in battle usually by air. Field artillery support for quickly. airborne forces in an airborne assault • Mount mobile counterattacks, screen- must be capable of parachute assaulting ing actions, covering force operations, or air landing on held strips. Field and surveillance and reconnaissance artillery is usually attached to the actions. supported forces. Direct support battalions accompany their supported brigades. Planning for airmobile However, there are the following assaults is usually done in a sequence, tradeoffs for this mobility: which is the reverse of the way things will happen. Planning first centers around • Limitations because of weather, air- what is needed in the objective area and craft availability, and lack of organic works backward to the marshalling and heavy artillery. loading phase. Factors that have serious • Large requirement for logistical effects on the outcome of airborne support. operations include weather, operations • Vulnerability to air defense and security, air movement means,enemy air electronic warfare systems. defenses in the airhead area, and the fire • Helicopter lift capacity restrictions. support resources available. Linkup operations are also a major concern for Extensive training is required to execute planners. an airmobile operation effectively.

D-14 APPENDIX D FM 6-20-1

SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS FOR CANNON BATTALIONS SUPPORTING AIRBORNE AND AIRMOBILE OPERATIONS

Met/Survey/ Target Acquisition Registration Fire Planning Tactical Fire Control Plans and Orders Positioning Reconnaissance Displacement Communications CSS

Requesting augmen- Survey control will be SEAD Is critical. Backward planning Initially, there will be Rapid movement will Radio will be the Resupply will be tation assets Is difficult. sequence should be little flexibility. be by air. primary long-range primarily by air. considered. Close In and direct used. communication. Frequent use Is made fires should be antici- Mutual support with Terrain, weather, and Sorties available will FAAOs will be of observed fire pated. Attachment to the other cannon units visibility will impact Air messengers will be limited. required. techniques. maneuver force Is may be difficult. significantly on be required. Initial landing zones frequent. movement. Visual markings of Weapon locating (LZ) will be out of The battalion CP may Visual signals such as equipment can be radar Is used to artillery range. LZ Use of frag orders be collocated with Control of batteries Is smoke and panels are helpful. register. preps must come Increases. maneuver CP. decentralized during used. from other FS assets a move and regained Ammunition should planned by the All-round security after the move is be dropped beside appropriate fire sup- must be provided. completed. the cannons. port element (FSE). Forces are vulnerable Units provide their during the initial own rigging and tie- landing at dropping down equipment. zone (DZ) or LZ.

D-15 FOLDIN FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

River crossing operations. Hasty. The hasty crossing is I characterized by detailed planning, The main considerations for a force decentralized control, speed and surprise, involved in river crossing include the and minimum concentration of following: resources. Deliberate. The deliberate crossing is * Elements are canalized at crossing sites usually used when the hasty crossing has and become highly vulnerable. failed or is impossible. This crossing is ■ Crossing resources are usually limited, characterized by detailed planning, thus reducing courses of action avail- centralized control, a pause (assembly) able to the commander. on the near bank prior to crossing, concentration of resources, and the need * Crossing sites need extra protection. to clear the enemy from the riverline. • During crossings, the force's combat power is divided between both banks of Retrograde. The retrograde crossing the river obstacle. is made under enemy pressure and is characterized by deliberate planning, • Communications, command control, and traffic management are complex. centralized control, the enemy situation dictating maneuver actions, high risks, need for exit bank forces to provide The types of crossing’s requiring field overwatching fires, and a covering force artillery support include: to trade space for time.

I t

D-16 APPENDIX D FM 6-20-1

SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS FOR CANNON BATTALIONS SUPPORTING RIVER CROSSING OPERATIONS

S2 S3 CESO S1/S4

Met/Survey/ Target Acquisition Registration Fire Planning Tactical Fire Control Plans and Orders Positioning Reconnaissance Displacement Communications CSS

Visual means may be Hasty survey tech- Screening and Illumination fires to Plans may be Fire units will be well Recon may be Fire units can expect During hasty cross- Munition expendi- restricted due to niques may be obscuring smoke will assist observation at detailed, but should forward to range accomplished pri- to cross as soon as ings, radio will be the tures will be high smoke. required during hasty be used extensively night must be coor- allow for decentral- beyond the bridge- marily by map. enemy small arms primary source of (smoke, ilium). crossing. In support of selected dinated to preclude ized operation. head area. fire has been reduced communication. TA assets are ori- crossing sites. exposure of troops in Counterattacks on the far bank. Large quantities of ented on key over- Registration to the the crossing areas. Some GS units may Fire units will be should be expected. Wire communica- material may have to watching terrain. rear may be used as Responsiveness is fill DS roles tempo- positioned In depth. Tank/mech units will tions will be used as be palletized for part ot the deception critical. rarily while DS units Night occupations not leave their much as possible cross-river transport. plan. are crossing. Positioning should can be expected. organic gap crossing during deliberate Smoke is planned on facilitate rapid equipment In place. crossings. During deliberate "dummy" river cross- crossing. FA units require crossing, time is ing sites. engineer support Air messengers are available for good (armored vehicle used if possible. survey. Prep for dummy sites launched bridge are part of decep- (AVLB)) to cross Communication is tion plan. rivers. critical with unit on both sides of the river. Fires are planned to neutralize the bridge- head (series, groups).

Fires are planned to isolate the bridgehead.

Illumination fires of crossing sites are planned if needed.

D-17 FOLDIN FM 8-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION • Support of allied maneuver Communications. Problems of forces. language and availability of bilingual personnel, equipment differences, and terminology. The United States has many standard- Allied fire support doctrine. ization and mutual agreements already Dissimilarity of tactical fire control set up with potential allies in order to procedures, field artillery missions, and facilitate future operations. These fire coordination terms. agreements and standardization documents exist in the form of NATO Identification of friendly forces. Standardization Agreements, Quadri- Recognizing friendly personnel and partite Standardization Agreements for equipment as well as allied unit the union of America, Britain, Canada, boundaries. and Australia, and to a smaller extent Combat service support. Providing through the use of Korean Augmentation the necessary ammunition, repair parts, to US Army Forces. and maintenance assistance for the out- Operations with allied forces by out- of-sector unit. of-sector units (one operating away Tactical nuclear operations. How from parent headquarters in an allied the out-of-sector unit will support with zone) are greatly affected in five areas. nuclear firepower.

D-18 * APPENDIX D FM 6-20-1

SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS FOR CANNON BATTALIONS SUPPORTING ALLIED MANEUVER FORCES*

S2 CESO S1/S4

Met/Survey/ Target Acquisition Registration Fire Planning Tactical Fire Control Plans and Orders Positioning Reconnaissance Displacement Communications CSS

Sound and flash Cross-training Is Common graphics, Missions of GSR and Plans and orders will Engineer support Is FM voice will be In most cases 155- equipment Is similar; required. overlays, and maps relnf are different be written In a five- requested through nonsecure. mm projectiles and cross-training will are used extensively (see STANAG 2887). paragraph field order NATO territorial charges are take little time. Host countries can In Joint planning format. By mutual force command RATT Is secure and compatible. normally provide sessions. Federal Republic of agreement, plans channels. can be geared to 66 Allied force Identifi- survey parties. Germany (FRG) units may be In the lan- words per minute Resupply rates and cation Is critical. Applicable STANAGs engage targets with guage of the sup- FRG units position all (wpm). Items must be made Universal transverse are reviewed and battalions, not ported force. batteries In a 3 « 5 known. Electronic target In- mercator (grid) maintained. batteries. kilometer ellipse. NATO CEOI and key- formation Is similar. (UTM) Is NATO stan- Need for translators list are requested. Host countries have a dard reference for Call for fire format or an extensive field limited capability to survey. may be different standing operating Frequency range Is repair radars, survey among allies. procedure (FSOP) of 30-69 MHz. equipment, and NATO met format common words will radios. Is standard. Suppression mission be necessary. We may have to pro- Is not used by NATO. vide the supported Interface between US Registration pro- Necessary classified force with crypto/ and allied COSCOM cedures and fre- Observer determines documents must be secure FM may be necessary to quency may vary with number of weapons made available to communicators. Insure adequate different allies. and volume of fire to allied commanders. support. be used for smoke All communication Survey trig lists are missions. systems/methods are Fuels, lubricants, and exchanged with coordinated. some vehicles are allied units In area of US units may be common to US and operations. called on to fire Challenge and pass- allies. nuclear weapons for word cannot be the an allied commander. final determination of friendly or enemy Dedicated battery Identity. concept not used by NATO. Radiotelephone operator (RTO) pro- cedures are stan- dardized (see STANAG 2867).

It may not be possible to use the NEW SQUELCH ON position with low and medium power FM radios.

*Thls outline Incorporates STANAGs 2101 and 2129.

D-19 FOLDIN FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

Counterguerrilla operations.

Counterguerrilla operations are characterized by small unit operations, no established lines of battle, difficulty in identifying the enemy from the local population, and difficulty in fire support coordination.

FACTORS AFFECTING COUNTERGUERRILLA OPERATIONS

• Heavy vegetation in areas of operation. • Enemy units hiding in civilian areas (villages, towns). • Lack of good security. • Target acquisition limitations.

D-20 APPENDIX D FM 6-20-1

SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS FOR CANNON BATTALIONS SUPPORTING COUNTERGUERRILLA OPERATIONS

S2 S3 CESO S1/S4

Met/Survey/ Target Acquisition Registration Fire Planning Tactical Fire Control Plans and Orders Positioning Reconnaissance Displacement Communications css

Targets will be fleet- Survey control will be Requests for Illumi- Munition effects can Plans must consider Natural and man- Positions should pro- Movement may be by Radio relays may be Resupply may be ing and difficult to difficult. nation to support be reduced In built- civil affairs aspects. made features may vide for 6,400-mil land and/or air. required. done primarily by air. locate accurately. night operations will up and heavily vege- restrict positioning fires. Hasty survey tech- be high. tated areas. Planning must take alternatives. Frequent displace- Wire Is subject to Munition expendi- Night vision devices niques will be used No-flre areas and Into consideration ment will be common. being cut/monltored tures will be high. and sensors must be frequently. free-flre areas will be the fact that units Fire units may be by guerrillas. used. used frequently. may be widely dis- positioned with Landlines of commu- FAAOs may be persed and command maneuver forces. Any Isolated retrans nication may be diffi- required for control may be sites will need addi- cult to maintain. registration. difficult. Frequent use of tional security. earthmovlng equip- Effects of weather ment to harden posi- Extensive use Is made must be considered tions may be of authentication. when planning required. resupply activities.

Position should be hardened to with- stand fire and Infantry attack.

All-round security must be maintained.

* D-21 FGLDIN FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

Amphibious operations.

One factor having a great effect on these military operations is the requirement for detailed coordination with other services (Air Force, Marine Corps, Navy). This is reflected in the need for concurrent planning between the landing force and the amphibious task force and the coordination involved in the shift of fire support responsibility from the amphibious task force to the landing force. Military operations will be conducted according to written doctrine once the commander, landing force, takes over responsibility for the battle from the commander, amphibious task force.

CHARACTERISTICS OF AMPHIBIOUS OPERATIONS

• The element of surprise inherent with mobility of the attacker. • Reverse planning. • Joint operations. • Requirements to build up combat power ashore from zero to fall coordinated striking power. • Detailed planning among different type units.

D-22 APPENDIX D FM 6-20-1

SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS FOR CANNON BATTALIONS SUPPORTING AMPHIBIOUS OPERATIONS

ï r^ffiHiiWIriiMhr^ • igriTIHM S2 S3 CESO S1/S4

Met/Survey/ Target Acquisition Registration Fire Planning Tactical Fire Control Plans and Orders Positioning Reconnaissance Displacement Communications css

Initial targeting data Survey data will be Enemy AD assets Tactical and techni- Frag orders will Initial shore position- Initial recon will be The battalion may be Radios will provide Resupply and evacu- will come from Naval difficult to obtain must be suppressed. cal fire control will be be the norm on the ing should be out of the result of map and attached to a maneu- shlp-to-shore ation functions will be sources. until a beachhead Is decentralized beach. enemy small arms aerial reconnais- ver unit during pas- communication. done by ship, plane, established. Hasty Initial fire planning Initially. range, If possible. sance. sage and beaching. or helicopter. Most targets will survey Is used. with naval gunfire Decentralized control Wire should be laid as come from FIST/ (NGF) and CAS. during Initial phases Terrain positioning Weapons and units Firing elements enter soon as possible after Munition expenditure FSOs Initially. Hasty registration Is of assault Is used. will be vital. will be extremely vul- as early as situation beaching. will be high. used or GFT setting Is Interservice calls for nerable during the penfilts. FAAOs are used obtained from adjust fire will be common. Consideration for early stage of the Extensive planning/ Care must be taken In extensively. fire missions. firing on sand is beach assault. Some FA assets may coordination for unloading ammuni- CATF/CLF do con- Important. be Inserted by Interservice use of tion and distribution Prior coordination current planning. Advance parties helicopter. frequencies, call to units by proper with landing force FA assets may arrive with assault signs, operations caliber. headquarters for Lack of good Intelli- initially be positioned units. calls, and cipher available survey gence may place on an offshore island. systems Is needed. Assault units arrive Information Is vital. reliance on hasty fire with basic load planning. Tactical radios need divided among Ballistic met support protection against sections. may be obtained from saltwater. USN shipboard met stations In NATO Tactical radios are format. checked for opera- tion (i.e., open net) prior to landing.

Units providing sup- plementary fires must be provided the necessary CEOI.

D-23 FOLDIN t FM 6-20-1

APPENDIX E:

Road Marches

At times a unit not in support of maneuver operations may have to move long distances to be in position for future combat operations or to get from garrison to a distant training area. TTiese movements are called road marches. The purpose of this appendix is to provide information on how to plan a road march in wartime or peacetime.

Road March Planning Considerations

■«hrScvadPBgl

MISSION: How far must the battalion move? How soon must It arrive at Its destination?

What Is It to do when it gets there?

Is It moving as a part of a larger force?

ENEMY: What is the likelihood of enemy ground contact? What Is the likelihood of enemy air attack?

TERRAIN: What routes are available? Are they primary or secondary routes?

TIME AVAILABLE: A road march should be planned In as much detail as time permits to minimize the possibility of vehicles becoming lost and to provide for efficient movement. In peacetime, It may be necessary to plan road marches In great detail due to administrative and safety restrictions. In wartime, time and the mission may notallow detailed planning.

. E-1 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

Planning. Standing operating procedures.

Road march planning includes three The battalion should develop an SOP for steps that may be done concurrently: road marches and occupation of position determine movement requirements, areas. Some routine items that may be analyze organic and nonorganic included in the SOP are loading plans, movement capabilities, and establish serial and march unit composition, unit movement priorities. control measures, rates of march under

T ¡■i4'S;*I-' I vàrious conditions, formations, MOVEMENT PLANNING FACTORS communications, security measures, time intervals and distances, location of # Organization of units and their the command post during the march, equipment. timing and duration of halts, tasks # Assembly of units and transportation during halts, organization of quartering means. and reconnaissance parties, and reporting instructions. # Loading personnel and equipment. Similar vehicles used for similar # Enemy situation, geographic condi- purposes should have the same stowage tions, and weather. plan for equipment and ammunition. This prevents confusion during combat # Control, coordination, and combat operations, when personnel must move service support for the movement. from one vehicle to another, and during recovery operations. Sectors of fire for # Security measures before, during, and each vehicle-mounted weapon and after the movement. Redeye should be prescribed throughout 0 Assembly of units and equipment at the the column. Orders for a particular destination. movement need only modify or amplify the SOP to fit the requirements of a Training. particular situation.

The success or failure of a mission could Preparing for road marches. very well depend upon the ability of units to move rapidly and efficiently over great distances. Training is necessary to test and check unit loading plans, to develop March planning sequence. When and improve standing operating preparing for a tactical road march, the procedures, to prevent wasted time and following march planning sequence effort, and to maintain operational should be used if time permits: efficiency. The battalion should Prepare and issue the warning order integrate road marching and occupation as soon as possible to give batteries of position areas into other types of maximum preparation time. Include training whenever possible. reconnaissance party instructions.

E-2 «i APPENDIXE FM 6-20-1 Organize and dispatch reconnais- time is critical. The officer in charge of sance and quartering parties (should the quartering party must know the follow SOP). route, order of march, and when the main body will arrive. A battalion quartering Prepare detailed movement plans party usually consists of the quartering to: parties from each subordinate battery # Organize the march. and a security element. # Review reconnaissance information. It is desirable that the same soldiers be 9 Compute march data. used regularly on quartering party 9 Prepare a movement table. assignments. The quartering party Prepare and issue the march order. should have sufficient guides and markers and necessary equipment to Route reconnaissance. Route perform work in the new area. As march reconnaissance determines travel times, elements arrive and clear the release underpass heights and bridge capacities, point, quartering party members guide and culvert, ferry, and ford locations and them to selected or designated areas identifies critical points and obstacles. without stopping. Locating critical points before the march can prevent congestion and enhance security. March columns. A route reconnaissance can confirm and supplement data obtained from map studies, higher headquarters, and air A road march may be close column, open reconnaissance. column, or by infiltration. March techniques may be varied depending on Instructions to the route reconnaissance the situation. In dusty conditions, for party should state what information is example, vehicles must march at least required and when and where the report dust distance away from one another is to be submitted. for drivers to see. Quartering party (advance party). A quartering or advance party Close column. Normally, vehicles are should precede the main body whenever spaced approximately 25 meters apart possible. Normally, it is composed of an during daylight. At night, vehicles are officer in charge, a security element if the spaced so that the driver can see two tactical situation requires, communica- lights in the blackout marker of the tion and medical personnel, plus vehicle ahead. Close column is usually necessary staff section and subordinate used for marches during darkness, under representatives. Its mission is to blackout conditions. This method of reconnoiter the new area, make marching takes maximum advantage of necessary improvements to entrances the traffic capacity of the routes but and routes in the area, and guide march provides little dispersion. Vehicle density elements to and into the new area. It may is approximately 30 vehicles per »also perform route reconnaissance when kilometer along the route of march. FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

Open column. Distance between March organization. vehicles is increased to provide greater dispersion and varies from 50 to 100 meters, or greater if the situation A march column includes all elements requires. Normally; open column is used using the same route for a single during daylight. It may also be used at movement under control of a single night using infrared lights or blackout commander. A battalion may march over lights or when passive night vision multiple routes to reduce closing time. A equipment is available. Normal vehicle large column may be composed of a density is approximately 15 vehicles per number of subdivisions, each under the kilometer when vehicles are 50 meters control of a subordinate commander. apart, 12 vehicles per kilometer when the March columns, regardless of size, are distance is 75 meters, and 10 vehicles per composed of three elements: a head, a kilometer when the distance is increased main body, and a trail party. March to 100 meters. In choosing interval or columns are organized to maintain unit density, the planner must realize the integrity and to maintain an organiza- effect of column length and the time it tion consistent with mission require- will require to move. In close column, a ments. 155-mm SP cannon battalion is 3 km Head. The head is the first vehicle of the long; in a 100-meter open column, it is 10 column and sets the pace. km long. Main body. The major elements of the march column are serials and march units and constitute the main body, y Infiltration. Vehicles are dispatched A serial is a major subdivision of a individually, in small groups, or at march column, organized as a single unit irregular intervals at a rate that will keep under one commander for purposes of the traffic density down and prevent planning, regulation, and control. A undue massing of vehicles. Often the battalion usually forms into a serial. advance party is infiltrated. A march unit is a subdivision of a serial Infiltration provides the best possible and is normally a section, platoon, or passive defense against enemy battery. It moves and halts under control observation and attack. It is suited for of a single commander using voice, tactical marches when sufficient time visual signals, or radio when no other and road space are available and when means of communication can be used. maximum security, deception, and Trail party. The trail party follows the dispersion are desired. This method march column and includes personnel makes control difficult and increases the and equipment necessary for emergency chances of losing vehicles. Infiltration is vehicle repair and recovery, medical aid comparatively slow and complex and and evacuation, and unscheduled should be used only when the enemy refueling. The trail party must have FM threat makes it essential. radio communications.

E-4 APPENDIXE FM 6-20-1

March column control. serial reconnoiters its route to the SP and determines and announces the times for elements of its serial to arrive at and Column control is maintained through clear the start point. the chain of command. The commander has no prescribed place in the column but Release point. An RP provides all positions himself where he can best units in the march column a common control the operation or where problems point for reverting to their parent unit are likely to occur. Commanders of control. The RP should be on the route of serials and march units are responsible march and easily recognizable on both for controlling their elements. Ground the map and the ground. Guides should vehicles, aircraft, route marking guides, meet units as they arrive at the RP and and military police may be used to assist lead them to their new areas. Multiple in controlling the march. -, routes and cross-country movement from the RP to assembly and position areas Each unit marching as part of a larger should be used to enable units to disperse element maintains liaison with the rapidly. In selecting an RP, such terrain preceding unit. When appropriate, a features as hills, defiles, and sharp liaison officer travels with the preceding curves should be avoided. Furthermore, unit, keeps his commander informed of no unit should be required to that unit's location, and provides him countermarch or pass through another early warning and reason for any unit to reach its new position. unscheduled halt. \Normally, movement control is en- Critical points. Critical points on a hanced by an understanding of the route are those points used for reference following factors. in providing instructions, places where interference with movement might occur, such as road junctions, or places where timing might be a critical factor. The Start point. An SP provides all units of route reconnaissance report or a map a march column a common point for study should permit the march planner starting their movement. When units use to designate critical points along the more than one route, each route has a route of march and distances from one start point. The SP is a place along the critical point to another. There should be route of march that is easily recognizable uninterrupted movement through each on the ground, such as a road critical point. Road guides and signs intersection. An SP should not be a defile, assist in this endeavor; the presence of on a hill, or at a sharp curve in the road. It the commander and other key personnel should be far enough from assembly at some critical points assists in areas to allow units to be organized and movement control. moving at the prescribed rate when it is reached. No element of a march column Restrictions. Restrictions. are points should be required to march to the rear or along the route of march, such as bridges, through another unit to reach it. Before intersections, ferries, or bypasses, where starting a march, each major unit of a movement may be limited or obstructed.

E-5 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

The march planner should coordinate the Movements on multiple routes during move to avoid unnecessary delays. This periods of poor visibility and the can be accomplished by starting the existence of major intersections, defiles, move earlier, delaying the start of the and detours along routes increase traffic move, planning to halt the column along control problems. the route, or taking some other action Speed control. Elements in a column such as using other routes to avoid the of any length may encounter many restriction. different types of routes and obstacles simultaneously, resulting in different Communications. Messengers, road parts of the column moving at different guides, and personal contact are the speeds at the same time. This can produce standard means of communications used an undesirable accordion-like action or during road marches. Visual signals are whip effect. The movement should direct also useful for small elements. Because the maximum catchup speed to reduce the enemy has good radio direction- "column whipping." finding equipment, radio should be used in emergencies only and only if no other To control whipping, the lead vehicle means of communication can be used. must not exceed the authorized Road guides are ideally suited to pass maximum speed of the slowest vehicle in messages from one march unit to a the column.' To minimize vehicle following march unit. Because of the congestion on the near side of an need to avoid use of the radio, road guides obstacle, both vehicle commanders and are key to controlling the speed and drivers must be alert and maintain the interval of march units. prescribed minimum distance between vehicles. The standard 2-minute Traffic control. Traffic control is provided by the headquarters controlling intervals should also be maintained the march. Military police traffic control between march units. posts may be located at critical points Halts. Halts are made for rest, personal along the route to provide orientation and comfort and relief, messing, refueling, to minimize delays caused by other maintenance, inspection of equipment, columns, civilian or refugee traffic, allowing other traffic to pass, and congested areas, or difficult terrain. making adjustments in schedules. Road guides may be used to augment and Usually, the time and duration of halts support the military police effort. Road are established in the movement order or guides should be posted in pairs, one to prescribed in the unit SOP. direct traffic while the other provides Short hätte for rest usually are taken for security. Their equipment should provide 15 minutes after the first hour of for identification during hours of marching and for 10 minutes every 2 darkness. Normally, guides are posted by hours thereafter. The prescribed rate of an advance party of the moving unit. march includes the time required for They should be well briefed and should short halts. When possible, march insure that they direct only vehicles from elements using the same route should their unit. stop at the same time; however, route

E-6 APPENDIXE FM 6-20-1 characteristics may make it necessary commanders should take appropriate for the halt to occur in one particular part action to determine and eliminate the of the route rather than all elements cause of the halt. stopping at a fixed time. Halts for refueling should be scheduled in Long halts are planned in advance advance to enable the march unit requiring that additional time be commander to make definite plans for specifically allocated and added to the refueling. total travel time. Normally, locations for It may be desirable to clear the route of long halts are selected to allow all march temporarily to shorten the vehicles to clear the road and permit column. When terrain permits, units do proper dispersion. this by coiling up on each side of the Unit SOPs should prescribe actions to be route. A coil is a circle with weapons taken during halts such as the oriented outward. If sufficient area is not performance of during-operation available or condition of the terrain maintenance services. Whenever precludes coiling, a herringbone is unscheduled halts occur, vehicle formed. FORMING A HERRINGBONE

ê"

y pjf'

} -VL \ -WJ.lll A/

«to s,

The first priority at a halt is to establish posts guides to direct traffic, and reports local security. Observation posts are their status. If the crew is able to repair established and sectors of fire are the vehicle, it rejoins the rear of the assigned to each section or element. column. Vehicles that have been dropped from the column for any reason should be Disabled vehicles. Disabled vehicles returned to their positions only when the must be moved off the road to avoid column has halted. Until then these obstructing traffic. The crew of the vehicles are put at the rear of the column, disabled vehicle establishes security, just ahead of the trail element. If the crew

E-7 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION cannot repair the vehicle, the vehicle is Time and distance relationship. recovered by the trail party. Relationships between time and distance are the basis for march planning. The planner must determine how far the column is to travel (distance) and how long it will take to make the move (time). Road march planning factors. He must know the space (length of column) the column will occupy on the route. He must also include in his An understanding of certain march computations the safety factor of terms is necessary in order for the distance (road gap) or time (time gap) planner to develop detailed movement that must separate march columns and plans. These terms, together with basic their elements. Each term used for factors of distance, rate, and time are distance has its corresponding term for transformed into movement formulas. time. The length of a column in Formulas are applied to known data to kilometers has an equivalent pass time in derive information necessary to prepare minutes; the road distance, kilometers or a time schedule. The time schedule is used miles, has a corresponding time distance. to regulate departures and arrivals of The relationship between time and march elements. distance is as shown below.

TIME DISTANCE RELATIONSHIPS DISTANCE (LENGTH OF COLUMN) — ROAD SPACE -ROAD DISTANCE-

MARCH UNIT —LENGTH —

COLUMN ◄ GAP^

PASS TIME TIME GAP O o TIMEo SPACE -TIME DISTANCE-o TIME

E-8 APPENDIXE FM 6-20-1

Distance factors. halts and other short delays. It is expressed as miles or kilometers in the hour. Vehicle distance is space between two consecutive vehicles of an organized element of a column. Time factors. Column gap is space between two organized elements following each other Arrival time is the time at which the on the same route. It can be calculated in head of the column arrives at a units of length or in units of time as designated point. measured from the rear of one element to Clearance time is the time at which the the front of the following element. tail of a column passes a designated Traffic density is the average number point. of vehicles that occupy 1 mile or 1 kilometer of road space, expressed in Completion time is when the last vehicle of a column passes the release vehicles per mile or vehicles per point. kilometer. Length of a column is the length of Extra time allowance of 1 minute per roadway occupied by a column, including 25 vehicles is always allocated above the gaps in the column, measured from front calculated pass time (within a column to rear. moving under one identification serial ^oadgap is distance between two march number). In a column where the number elements. It is the length aspect of of vehicles is over 600, the EXTAL will be column gap, and since it is more 2 minutes per 25 vehicles. A serial of less significant when the column is moving than 25 vehicles is not allotted any extra than when it is halted, it becomes a factor time. EXTAL is equitably added to march of time rather than distance. unit pass times within a serial. Pass time of a column is actual time between the moment the first vehicle Rate factors. passes a given point and the moment the last vehicle passes the same point. Road clearance time is total time a Speed indicates actual rate of speed of a column requires to travel over and clear a vehicle at a given moment as shown on section of road. Road clearance time the speedometer (in kilometers per hour equals time distance plus column pass or miles per hour). time. Pace is regulated speed of a column or Time distance is time required to move element, set by the lead vehicle, to from one point to another at a given rate maintain the prescribed average speed. of march. It normally represents the Rate of march is average number of movement of the head vehicle of the miles or kilometers traveled in any given column from the start point to the release period of time, including short periodic point.

E-9 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

Time gap is time measured between rear Distance is found by multiplying rate by and front of successive vehicles of the time: D = R x T elements as they move past any given point. It is the time aspect of column gap Time is calculated by dividing distance and may also be the conversion of road ,, gap to time. There are no prescribed by the rate: T = ^ standard gaps. These depend on the size of serials and march units, the time available for the movement, and the tactics required for protection against air The march planner must determine pass and nuclear attack. time, time distance, arrival time, and Application of movement for- completion time. mulas. Distance, rate, and time are the Pass time. Pass time is calculated by basic factors for movement computa- dividing the total number of vehicles tions. If two of these factors are known, multiplied by 60 by vehicle density the third may easily be found by dividing multiplied by speed. To this figure are or multiplying one by the other. added EXTAL (see below) and time gaps Rate is determined by dividing distance between march elements. This formula by time: R = — may be used to calculate pass time for an entire serial or march column quickly.

i-i . Pass time formula .r

No. of veh x 60 No. of veh PST = — + Time gaps (min) Density * speed 25

L-HHWLZSÜ

150 x 60 150 PST = + + (2 x 5) 15 x 24 25 EXAMPLE:

Determine time distance of a serial traveling 9000 + 6 + 10 135 kilometers at a speed of 24 kmph (rate of 360 march 20 kmih). = 25 + 6 + 10

PST = 41 minutes. lawanniiis-waa Notes. 1. Round up fractions of minutes to next higher whole minute. 2. Extra time allowance is allocated on the basis of 1 minute per 25 vehicles added to serial pass time. EXTAL is equitably added to pass time of each march unit in the serial.

E-10 APPENDIXE FM 6-20-1

A pass time table, together with the extra time allowance table, can simplify march PASS TIME TABLE (SINGLE MARCH UNIT) planning. To prepare the time schedule for a serial, it is a simple process to PASS TIME (MINUTES AND SECONDS) determine pass time for any march unit regardless of vehicles, traveling speed, or Number 16 kmph—10 mph 24 kmph—15 mph 32 kmph—20 mph 40 kmph—25 mph 48 kmph—30 mph 56 kmph—35 mph column density. Extra time allowance is of Interval—Meters Interval—Meters Interval—Meters Interval—Meters Interval—Meters Interval—Meters then added to calculated pass time to Vehicles determine total pass time. in March 25 50 75 100 25 50 75 100 25 50 75 100 25 50 75 100 25 50 75 100 25 50 75 100 Pass time for a serial is determined by Unit adding march unit pass times together, including the time gaps between march 30 vpk 15 vpk 12 vpk 10 vpk 30 vpk 15 vpk 12 vpk 10 vpk 30 vpk 15 vpk 12 vpk 10 vpk 30 vpk 15 vpk 12 vpk 10 vpk 30 vpk 15 vpk 12 vpk 10 vpk 30 vpk 15 vpk 12 vpk 10 vpk units. Examples are shown in figure E-l :08 :15 :19 :23 :05 :11 :13 :15 :04 :08 :10 :12 :04 :08 :08 :09 :03 :05 :06 :08 :03 :05 :06 :06 below. :10 :30 :38 :45 :11 :20 :26 :30 :0B :15 :19 :23 :08 :15 :15 :18 :05 :11 :13 :15 :05 :09 :11 :13

:23 :45 :57 1:08 :15 :30 :38 :45 :12 :23 :29 :34 :11 :22 :23 :27 :08 :15 :19 :23 :07 :13 :17 :20 Figure E-1. :30 1:00 1:15 1:30 :20 :41 :50 1:00 :15 :30 :38 :45 :15 :29 :30 :36 :11 :20 :26 :30 :09 :18 :22 :26

:38 1:15 1:34 1:53 :26 :50 1:03 1:15 :19 :38 :47 :57 :18 :36 :38 :45 :13 :26 :32 :38 :11 :22 :27 :33 The Pass Time Table is used In conjunction with the Extra Time Allowance Table to calculate the pass :45 1:30 1:53 2:15 :30 1:15 1:30 :23 :45 :57 1:08 :22 :44 :45 :54 :15 :30 :38 :45 :13 :26 :33 :39 times for single march units of a battalion task force serial. The PST Table is based upon the number of vehicles in the march unit (density), the interval between the vehicles, and a specified vehicular speed. :53 1:45 2:12 2:38 :35 1:11 1:28 1:45 :26 :53 1:06 1:19 :26 :51 :53 1:03 :18 :35 :44 :53 :15 :30 :38 :45 The figures in this table are expressed in minutes and seconds. The Extra Time Allowance Table provides 1:00 2:00 2:30 3:00 :41 1:20 1:41 2:00 :30 1:00 1:15 1:30 :29 :58 1:00 1:12 :20 :41 :50 1:00 :18 :35 :41 :52 the EXTAL in minutes based upon the number of vehicles (density) in the march unit. 1:08 2:15 2:49 3:23 :45 1:30 1:53 2:15 :34 1:08 1:25 1:42 :33 1:05 1:08 1:21 :23 :45 :57 1:08 :20 :39 :48 :58

10 1:15 2:30 3:08 3:45 :50 1:41 2:05 2:30 :3B 1:15 1:34 1:53 :36 1:12 1:15 1:30 :26 :50 1:03 1:15 :22 :43 :54 1:05

15 1:53 3:45 4:41 5:38 1:15 2:30 3:08 3:45 SI 1:53 2:21 2:49 :54 1:48 1:53 2:15 :38 1:15 1:34 1:53 :33 1:05 1:21 1:36

20 2:30 5:00 6:15 5:00 1:41 3:20 4:11 5:00 1:15 2:30 3:08 3:45 1:12 2:24 2:30 3:00 :50 1:41 2:05 2:30 :43 1:26 1:48 2:09 EXAMPLE 1. To calculate the pass time for a battalion task force serial, add the march unit pass times together and include the time gaps 4:42 1:30 3:08 3:45 1:03 2:05 2:36 3:08 :54 1:48 2:14 2:41 Determine the PST fora march unit of 29 vehicles at 50-meter 25 3:08 6:15 7:49 9:23 2:05 4:11 5:13 6:15 1:34 3:08 3:55 3:00 between the march units. There will always be one less time intervals traveling at a speed of 40 kmph. Use the 40 kmph— 30 3:45 7:30 9:23 11:15 2:30 5:00 6:15 7:30 1:53 3:45 4:42 5:38 1:48 3:36 3:45 4:30 1:15 2:30 3:08 3:45 1:05 2:09 2:41 3:13 gap than march units. 25 mph division of the table and select the 50-meter interval 2:24 1:41 4:11 5:00 1:26 2:52 3:35 4:18 15 vpkm column. Find the PST for 25 vehicles, which is 3 40 5:00 10:00 12:30 15:00 3:20 6:41 8:20 10:00 2:30 5:00 6:15 7:30 4:48 5:00 6:00 3:20 minutes. Next, find the PST for 4 vehicles, which is 29 EXAMPLE 2. 50 6:15 12:30 15:38 18:45 4:11 8:20 10:26 12:30 3:08 6:15 7:49 9:23 3:00 6:00 6:15 7:30 2:05 4:11 5:13 6:15 1:48 3:35 4:28 5:22 seconds. Add the 3 minutes and the 29 seconds, then round Determine the PST for a serial of four march units, each with to the next higher minute for a total of 4 minutes. a PST of 5 minutes anda time gap of 2 minutes. Add 5 minutes Finally, using the EXTAL Table, determine the EXTAL for 29 (MU1 ) + 2 minutes (time gap) + 5 minutes (MU2) + 2 minutes vehicles, which is 1 minute. Add 1 minute EXTAL to the 4 (time gap) + 5 minutes (MU3) + 2 minutes (time gap) + 5 EXTRA TIME ALLOWANCE (EXTAL) TABLE (SINGLE MARCH UNIT) minutes PST for the march unit pass time of 5 minutes. minutes (MU4) = 26 minutes total serial PST.

Number of Vehicles In March Unit Oto 12 13 to 37 38 to 62 63 to 87 88 to 112 113 to 137138 to 162 163 to 187 188 to 212 213 to 237 238 to 262

Extal in Minutes 10

E-11 FOLDIN FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

Time distance. (See fig E-3.) Time Time distance formula distance does not include time for long delays or extended scheduled halts. Time stance distance is determined by dividing TDIS = Di Rate of march (kmih) distance to be traveled by rate of march.

TIME DISTANCE TABLE

Speed Rate of March Minutes to Minutes to Miles/Kilometers Miles/Kilometers Travel 1 Travel 1 per Hour in the Hour Kilometer Mile 10 mph 8 mih 7.5 16 kmph 12 kmih 15 mph 12 mih 24 kmph 20 kmih

20 mph 16 mih 2.4 3.75 32 kmph 25 kmih

25 mph 20 mih 1.84 40 kmph 32 kmih

30 mph 25 mih 1.5 2.4 48 kmph 40 kmih

35 mph 30 mih 1.3 56 kmph 46 kmih

40 mph 33 mih 1.13 1.8 65 kmph 53 kmih

This table provides the time required to travel 1 kilometer or 1 mile while using specified march speeds. The travel times are calculated based upon rates of march (miles/kilometers in the hour) and include time for scheduled short halts and time lost due to road and traffic conditions. The time for long halts must be added to the total travel time. Multiply the total distance to be traveled (miles or kilometers) by the travel time factor for 1 mile or 1 kilometer for the designated speed.

Figure E- 2.

E-12 APPENDIXE FM 6-20-1

gJKTO 135 (km) TDIS 6.75 hours 20 (kmih) EXAMPLE: TDIS 6 hours and 45 minutes Determine time distance of a serial traveling 135 kilometers at a speed of 24 kmph (rate of march 20 kmih). .75 (fraction) x 60 (1 hour) 45.00 (minutes)

Note. Fractional parts of an hour are converted to minutes by multiplying the fraction by 60 and rounding off to the next higher whole minute.

USES EXAMPLE: Determine TDIS for a column traveling 310 kilometers at a speed of 24 kmph. Multiply 310 (km) » 3 (min) = 930 minutes. Convert 930 minutes to 15 hours and 30 minutes.

A time distance table is a valuable tool for the march planner. It provides a list of factors used to calculate time required to travel certain distances at specified vehicular speeds. Travel rates are expressed in vehicular speeds and corresponding rates of march. Travel factors are derived from rate of march, which includes time for short periodic halts and other minor delays that might occur.

Arrival time. In march planning, the release point usually is designated as the terminal point of movement. Arrival time at the release point is determined by adding time distance and any long scheduled halts to the start point time. It may also be calculated by subtracting pass time from completion time.

E-13 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

Hours Minutes EXAMPLE: SP time 08 00 Determine arrival time for a serial with a start Time distance 6 45 point time of 0800 hours, time distance of 6 Scheduled halt 1 00 hours and 45 minutes, and a scheduled halt of 1T 45 1 hour. Arrival time is 1545 hours.

Completion time. Completion is calculated by adding pass time to arrival time. Completion time may also be determined by adding start point time, time distance, pass time, and any long or scheduled halts.

Hours Minutes Arrival time 15 45 EXAMPLE 1. Pass time 41 Determine completion time for a serial with an arrival time of 1545 hours and a pass time of 41 15 86 minutes. Completion time is 1626 hours.

\ Note. Convert 86 minutes to 1 hour and 26 minutes, then add it to 1500 hours.

Hours ' Minutes SP time 08 00 EXAMPLE 2. Time distance 6 45 Pass time 41 Determine completion time for a serial with a Scheduled halt 00 start point time of 0800 hours, time distance of 6 hours and 45 minutes, a pass time of 41 15 86 minutes, and a scheduled halt of 1 hour.

Completion time is 1626 hours.

E-14 APPENDIX E FM 6-20-1

Movement order. used, control points or checkpoints, and location of road guides. Certain items A movement order is a type of operation listed above often become standard, and order. It contains instructions for units include them in standing operating movement of units from one location to procedures. Repetition of these items is another within a stated time. not necessary in the order. Preparation of the order usually follows A strip map is a sketch of the route of reconnaissance. march and usually is included as an Information in the movement order annex to the movement order. Strip maps includes the situation of friendly and should be reproduced in sufficient enemy forces, destination, routes, rate of quantities that they may be given to key march, maximum speeds, order of march, personnel, including vehicle com- start point, start point times, details of air manders and route guides. The amount of and ground alert guards, scheduled halts, detail depends upon the intended purpose vehicle distances, time gaps, release of the strip map and the unit level at point, critical points, service support, which it is prepared. A strip map should communications, location of the contain the start point and release point, commander during the march, and strip restrictions, and critical points and maps. Other details included, as distances between them. An example necessary, are route or unit markers to be strip map is shown in figure E-3.

(CLASSIFICATION) ANNEX A (STRIP MAP) to 0P0RD 10-240 FA Reference: Map, series M501, sheet NM32-5 (FRANKFORT AU MAIN) edition 2-AMS, 1:250,000. Time Zone Used Throughout the Order: ALFA. 254 CP 2 GROSSENLUTER 240 LAUTERBACH 12 KM 254 276 60 KM E4 RP 457 275 ^ [455I FULDA 275 AA /RANSTADI 240 FA FRIEDBURG SELTERS 276 + SP FAUERBACH 457 CP NOT TO SCALE (CLASSIFICATION)

Figure E-3.

E-15 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

Road movement graph. and rate of march. Preparation of a road movement graph is not mandatory; however, it is of great value to the planner A road movement graph is a time space simply because it reduces mathematical diagram that visually depicts a calculations that would ordinarily be movement from start point to release required to prepare march schedules. point. It may be used during movement planning stages to avoid conflicts and Information derived from march discrepancies and prevent congestion formulas or obtained from march tables along the route of march. It may also be is transferred directly to the graph. To used to prepare and check the road complete the road movement graph, the movement table. It shows the relative planner must have already organized the time and location of the head and tail of march column into serials or serials into each march element at any point along march units; determined time distance,' the route, arrival and clearance times of arrival time, and completion time; and march elements at critical points, and computed pass times for each serial or restrictions, pass times, time distance, march unit as appropriate. (See fig E-4.)

TIME DISTANCE DIAGRAM ROAD CLEARANCE 90 E 8\OURS 18 Ml \IUTE: (AP) CDMPL :TI0N 80 VAt HwE m IW5 GROSSENLUDER ME (CP 2) 70 1215 mm HEA VTAIL LAUTERBACH 60

50

40 ATt-t F-MARCH

30

20 RANSTADT (CP 1) 0

FRIEDBURG (SP)

0700 0800 0900 1000 1100 1200 1300 WE

Figure E-4.

E-16 APPENDIXE FM 6-20-1

Road movement table. march elements, a list of serials or march units, and all other necessary information arranged in tabular form. ROAD MOVEMENT TABLE-EXAMPLE OF ANNEX Normally, a road movement table is an Data that has been transferred to the TO ARMOR BATTALION OPERATION ORDER annex to a movement order. It is a road movement table from the road convenient means of transmitting time movement graph. Of particular schedules and other essential details of importance to the march planner are the times at which serials or march (A guide only; modification or adjustment is necessary to suit specific cases) the move to subordinate units. It is units arrive at and clear critical points. particularly useful when the inclusion of (CLASSIFICATION) ANNEX B (ROAD MOVEMENT TABLE) lo 0P0RD 10-2-10 Armai such details in the body of the operation Other, information included on the road Reference: Mep. eeriee M501. Iheet NM32-5 (FRANKFURT AM MAIN), edition 2-AMS. 1.250,000. order would tend to make the order movement table is serial or march unit Time Zone Used Throughout the Order: ALFA. General Data: complicated or unduly long. Road number, date of move, units involved, 1. Speed- 24 kmph. 10 Critical Points' 2. Rate of March: 20 kmih a. Start Point- RJ 275 at MA839754 (FAUERBACH). movement tables consist of two parts: number of vehicles, load class of heaviest 3 Open Column. b. Release Point: RJ 254 at N8383038 (GROSSENLUDER). 4 Traffic Oensitv: 15 VPK. c. Other Critical Points' vehicle, routes to be used, and (in a 5. Time Gaps: 2 minutas between MU. (II RJ 457 and 275 at MA989780 (RANSTADT). 6. Halts. SOP (2) RJ 275 end 254 at NB27B102 (LAUTERBACH). • Data paragraphs reflecting general "remarks" section) any details not 7 Route: Annex A, Strip Map. d. Route Classification: 6 m i 60. B From: FRIEDBURG MAB12610. 11. Mam Routes to SP: Hy 3 to HY 275. information common to two or more covered elsewhere. (See fig E-5.) 9. TO- KLEINLUDER NB385005. 12 Main Routes (rom RP: Unnumbered secondary route.

March Load Route Unit Class Route Due Clear from Figure E-5. No. Hv Veh to SP (hr) (hr) RP (g)

Otr 4 Aug SI. Comm Pit, HHX XO. (9 above) Strip map (12 above) Move by infiltration. Party BC A. B. C Notes. 1. Only the minimum number of headings above should be used. Any information common to two or more movement numbers should be included under General Data paragraphs. Recon 4 Aug Recon Party Strip map (11 above) (12 above) Move by infiltration. (Columns (f), (g), (h), (i), and (m) could have been omitted in this example.) Party

2. Since the table may be issued to personnel concerned with control of traffic, the security aspect 4 Aug Btry A (9 above) Strip map SP 0700 0706 (12 above) Det. 1)4-ton qtr pty, sup trk to bn tns. CP 1 0751 0757 Atch: must be remembered. It may not be desirable to include dates or locations. CP 2 1048 1054 RP 1130 1136 PST: 6 minutes. 4 Aug (9 above) Strip map SP 0708 0713 (12 above) Det- 2)4 ton and 1-1)4-ton qtr pty 3. If the table is issued by itself and not as an annex to a more detailed order, the table must be CP 1 0759 0804 Atch: signed or authenticated in the normal way. CP 2 1056 1101 RP 1136 1143 PST' 5 minutes 4 Aug Btry B Strip map SP 0715 0721 (12 above) Det: 1)4-ton qtr pty. sup trk to bn tns. 4. Critical point is defined as "a selected point along a route used for reference in giving CP I 0806 0812 Atch: 1 CP 2 1103 1109 instructions." It includes start points, release points, and other points along a route where RP 1145 1141 PST: 6 minutes. interference with movement may occur or where timings are critical. 4 Aug (8 above) (9 above) Strip map SP 0723 0729 (12 above) Det: CP 1 0814 0820 Atch: CP 2 1111 1117 5. The movement number (column (a)) identifies a column (or element of column) during the RP 1153 1159 PST: 6 minutes whole of the movement. 4 Aug Strip mep SP 0731 0736 Det: 6 Cl III trks, 4 aid/evac vehs. CP 1 0822 0827 Atch. 3 co sup trks CP 2 1119 1124 6. If an annex has the same distribution as an operation order, it is not necessary to include the RP 1201 1206 PST: 5 minutes. headings shown in this example. 4 Aug Btry C (8 above) <9 above) Strip map SP 0738 0744 (12 above) Det: 1)4-ton qtr pty, sup trk to bn tns. CP 1 0829 0835 CP 2 1126 1132 7. To obtain due times for MU1, transfer directly from road movement graph or calculate using RP 1208 1214 PST' 6 minutes. Trail 4 Aug Strip map (II above) (12 above) Move by infiltration time distance table and strip map. Party Atch. 1 Cl III trk, 1 aid/evac veh 8. To obtain clear times, add MU pass time to due time. (CLASSIFICATION) 9. To complete the schedule for successive march units, add pass time plus time gap to due time. (Example: PST of MU1, which is 6 minutes, plus time gap between MU, which is 2 minutes, equals 8 minutes. Add the 8 minutes to the 0700 SP due time of MU1 to obtain the SP due time for MU2, which is 0708.)

E-17 FOLDIN • • • FM 6-20-1

T/ APPENDIX F:

1 Tactical Scenarios

1^—

The following scenarios are designed as a vehicle to discuss field artillery cannon battalion level command and staff functions in support of offensive and defensive operations. Situations and solutions are not unique and are intended only to allow application of "how to" principles and illustrate considerations. The scenarios address almost exclusively field artillery cannon battalions performing the tactical missions of direct support and reinforcing since they are the missions that are the most demanding and the most responsive to the needs of committed maneuver forces. Battalions with the tactical missions of general support reinforcing and general support are most responsive to the force artillery headquarters, and their fires are employed primarily in support of the entire force rather than to a committed element of the force. Met/survey/registration, reconnaissance, movement, and combat service support considerations discussed in these scenarios for DS and reinforcing battalions have equal applicability to GSR and GS battalions. Any cannon battalion can be assigned a DS mission. (See appendix C for necessary radio augmentation.) Consequently, material in the scenarios that specifically addresses the DS mission is applicable to all field artillery cannon battalions.

F-1 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

Movement to Contact Scenario

Situation. 41st FA, is DS to 2d Bde. 2d Bde is currently not in contact with enemy forces and the brigade commander has The 2d Bde, 53d Mech Div, is deployed in directed TF 2-81 and TF 2-83 to conduct a the southern portion of the division sector movement to contact; on order, be with the mission to attack to secure prepared to attack to secure objectives in objectives in zone and be prepared to zone. The situation overlay is shown continue the attack. The 2d Bn (155, SP), below.

2-41 FA (155,SP): DS 2d Bde T* 5 2-42 FA (155, SP): GSR, 2-41 FA; o/o DS 3d Bde 2-43 FA (8, SP): Reinf, 2-41 FA t LD

2d Bde ■5 OBJ IS5

CD TF 2-81

TF 2-83 n OBJ

DO 53 09-xx LD 52 PL BLUE PL GOLD

F-2 m APPENDIX F FM 6-20-1 As the 2d Bde commander develops his This concept drives the preparation of the plan for the employment of maneuver brigade fire support plan. forces for the movement to contact, he must visualize how his fire support will be used. The DS battalion commander, as The brigade fire support officer, working FSCOORD for the brigade, and the with the brigade staff and other fire brigade FSO, participate actively in the support representatives in the brigade planning stages of the operation by fire support element, develops the fire providing fire support considerations for support plan that outlines how available the maneuver commander's estimates, fire support will be employed to support decisions, and concepts. (FM 6-20, the scheme of maneuver. The first chapter 3 and appendix I, contain subparagraph of the fire support plan detailed information on how the addresses the employment of field FSCOORD interacts with the brigade artillery support. The FSO does not wait commander and his staff during the until the fire support plan is written, but planning stages of an operation.) immediately passes the known information to the 2-41 FA (DS 2d Bde) so As part of his concept of the operation that the battalion can begin its fire and based on recommendations from the planning effort. FSCOORD, the brigade commander issues his concept of fire support:

r Fire Support "I want suppressive fires planned during (1) Field Artillery the movement to contact. Priority of fires ^ There will be a PreP^i0n w will be to TF 2-81 initially. I'm concerned planned. Length ff *™*"* about the enemy's counterfire and ATGM be specified be a counter- capability, so plan fires to counteract

these threats. I'm also concerned about initially- „,„f10n for combat: the enemy's capability to reinforce In our zone. As targeting information develops, I 2-A2FA (155.SP1 ’»R want fires planned on known or ‘ 2-A1 FA DS Bd Bde suspected reserve locations and on (c) Special instructions: obvious reinforcement routes. Both of my lead task force commanders have requested dedicated battery support for the movement to contact. FSCOORD, get back to me with a recommendation on dedicated battery support."

£2

F-3 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

Field artillery organization for combat. POSITIONING As part of the initial planning effort, the DS battalion commander (2-41 FA) and PL PL his S3 must analyze the field artillery BLUE [BLUE organization for combat and the resulting implications:

• 2-43 FA (8, SP) is reinforcing 2-41 FA. Op oo 2-41 FA has first priority on its fires as X 2 53 jj 52 well as positioning and fire planning authority. • 2-42 FA (155, SP) is general support CFL 2d Bde I CFL 2d Bde reinforcing 2-41 FA, on order DS 3d -0900- I -0900- Bde. 2-41 FA has second priority on its fires. • Preparations should be made to receive LD. LD liaison officers from 2-42 FA and 2-43 FA. 12-41 • The three batteries of 2-43 FA (reinf) should be included in the field artillery 12-41 fire planning effort, giving 2-41 FA (DS) a a total of six batteries for which it can f 2-43 plan fires. 12-43 • 2-43 FA (reinf) should be an addressee for all plans and orders published by B 2-41 FA (DS). 2-42 FA (GSR) should also 2-43 be included as an "information" addressee. fllngfl2-42 2-41 Positioning considerations. U*

12-42 Early in the planning stages of the CBT|pgi]2-41 operation, the S3, 2-41 FA (DS), selects initial positions to support the movement 2-43 to contact and possible attack. In c. selecting these positions, he should— -•

• Select position areas as far forward as 2-41 practical to exploit the range of the 12 FLO weapons, to facilitate liaison and communications with FISTs and FSOs, and to reduce the number of displace- ments required as the brigade advances. \ N

F-4 APPENDIX F FM 6-20-1

* Select position areas in the zone of the perimeter. As part of the survey effort for brigade and coordinate with the the battery position, the survey section brigade to avoid interference with will extend control to the radar site. maneuver units. * Choose position areas from which batteries can displace forward easily. Two FAAOs have been designated by Also, in positioning the 2-41 FA (DS) division artillery to work in the 2d Bde and 2-43 FA (reinf), the S3 must zone under control of 2-41 FA (DS). The determine how he intends the S2 can plan FAAO missions to fill the battalions to move to support the areas where FISTs cannot observe due to brigade's movement to contact/attack. terrain masks. In addition to the * Place service or trains elements as far increased observed fire capability that forward as possible for responsive the FAAOs will provide, the S2 considers support of the fíring batteries. them as a significant target acquisition * Give priority of field artillery positions to 2-41 FA (DS) and 2-43 FA (reinf) in capability and will brief them prior to that order. If division artillery each mission regarding: positions elements of 2-42 FA (GSR) in • Nets and call signs to be used. 2d Bde zone, they will have third • Field artillery available in range of the priority. area in which the FAAO will be operating. • Known or suspected enemy forward air Employment of target acquisi- defense locations in that area. tion. • Any specific information desired from the area.

2-41 FA (DS) has one weapon locating The S2, 2-41 FA (DS), works closely with radar attached from the division artillery the S2, 2d Bde, to insure that target target acquisition battery. The battalion acquisition resources controlled by 2-41 S2 has recommended a general location FA (DS) are integrated effectively into for the radar and the S3 has agreed. The the overall intelligence collection plan of radar section chief will select the exact the brigade. The brigade S2 has site. The S2 will orient the radar and established the following as initial target assign sectors of scan and cuing acquisition priorities: instructions, based on current combat intelligence of enemy dispositions. As the • ATOM and ATG situation develops, sectors of scan for the • Artillery and mortars radar will be modified based on reports of • Reserves enemy firing received from FSO and • Air defense weapons FIST personnel. The initial position selected for the radar is near the center of The S2, 2-41 FA (DS), insures that these the brigade zone to provide maximum priorities are disseminated to all target coverage. The closest firing element is acquisition means controlled by the C/2-41 FA (DS), and the S3 coordinates battalion. (Normally, FISTs and FSOs with the battery commander to insure receive these priorities through that the radar is tied into the battery's maneuver channels.)

F-5 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

Dedicated batteries. brigade S3 has sent a frag order to the task forces notifying them of the approved dedication. The S3, 2-41 FA, alerts these battery commanders to be The battalion commander, 2-41 FA (DS), prepared for dedicated status. He also and his S3 discuss the brigade contacts the brigade FSO instructing commander's request for a recommenda- him to check on the availability of tion on whether or not to dedicate engineer support to assist in hardening batteries during the movement to the positions. The S3 insures that contact. Each favors dedication personnel within the battalion primarily because the enemy situation is operations/FDC understand that— vague and information regarding enemy strengths and dispositions within the brigade zone gives no indication as to • Fl and F3 will be the dedicated fire nets. where initial contact can be expected. The operations/FDC will monitor only. The need for 4edication is reinforced by • The battalion will not plan fires for the the fact that tfie reinforcing fires of 2-43 dedicated batteries as long as dedication is in effect. FA make it possible to dedicate two • No fire missions will be sent to the batteries and still have field artillery dedicated batteries from battalion until immediately responsive to the fire dedication is terminated. support needs of the total force. The • Data will be computed on all targets battalion commander therefore planned to support the lead company recommends to the brigade commander team to facilitate rapid augmentation of that two batteries be dedicated during the the dedicated battery fires. movement to contact. (FM 6-20, chapter 4, illustrates the decisionmaking process The S3 notifies the S4 of the pending the brigade commander and DS battalion dedicated status with instructions to commander must go through in respond quickly to class V requirements considering dedication.) The brigade for those batteries and to provide all commander directs that a battery be possible assistance in hardening the dedicated in the zone of each lead task battery positions. force. The commander, TF 2-81, designates Team A, and the commander, TF 2-83, designates Team B as the company team to receive dedicated support. The commander, 2-41 FA, Displacement. designates A/2-41 FA and B/2-41 FA as the dedicated batteries, since the positions that have been selected for these batteries are well forward and in The S3, 2-41 FA (DS), recommends that the zone of TF 2-81 and TF 2-83, both 2-41 FA and 2-43 FA (reinf) displace respectively. The brigade FSO notifies by echelon to the initial positions selected the battalion FSOs of the dedication, and to support the movement to contact. The they in turn notify the FISTs with Team battalion commander issues the A, TF 2-81, and Team B, TF 2-83. The following instructions to his XO and S3:

F-6 APPENDIX F FM 6-20-1

FA after 2-41 FA was in position and "I will be In the forward area to supervise had reestablished communications the occupation of position by the first with FISTs/FSOs. echelon and will remain there until □ Movement by battery requires the occupation is complete. I want dedicated greatest amount of displacement batteries to move in the first echelon to time. If the overriding consideration give them the maximum amount of time to during displacement had been prepare their positions. XO, you supervise the movement from our current positions. maximum field artillery in position I'll contact you when the first echelon is in to provide continuous support, the position and let you know when to move "battery" method of displacement the second echelon. S3, notify division could have been selected. Displace- artillery of our plan for movement." ment by battery as opposed to displacement by battalion or echelon is a tradeoff between speed and responsiveness. Since the brigade was not th¿n in contact, movement by battery was not a good choice.

Registration. In this situation, the commander decided to move by echelon. He did not elect to move by battery or The S3/FDO has a number of battalion for the following reasons: registration options available. In this situation, he decides not to register, but to shoot met + VE instead. (FM 6-40, chapter 5, discusses other registration options.) ^ Movement by battalion places the He bases this decision on the following total firepower of a field artillery considerations: battalion on the road at the same time. If speed had been the overriding consideration in this • Registration might compromise the displacement forward, the "bat- operation. talion" method of displacement • Survey will be provided to all fire units (location and directional control) in the could have been selected. 2-41 FA initial positions. (DS) would have displaced first and • Current met data is available from the 2-43 FA (reinf) would have division artillery met station located established communications with, approximately 6 kilometers to the rear and answered calls for fire from, of the firing battery locations. FISTs/FSOs until 2-41 FA was in • The battalion has calibrated recently position. 2-43 FA would have and muzzle velocities are relatively displaced forward on order of 2-41 current.

F-7 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

Immediate action status. B/2-41 FA are in position, have received and processed planned targets along the route of the movement to contact, and are The S3 recommends "move to alternate prepared to provide dedicated support to position" as the immediate action status Team A, TF 2-81, and Team B, TF 2-83. for 2-41 FA (DS) (except for dedicated Division artillery has displaced 2-42 FA batteries) and 2-43 FA (reinf) during the (GSR) forward and two of its batteries are movement to contact. He makes this positioned in 2d Bde's zone and can range recommendation based on the following the movement route. These positions considerations: have been coordinated with and • Reinforcing field artillery (2-43 FA) is approved by 2d Bde. The dedicated available to continue fire support if a batteries will suppress isolated security battery is required to move to its elements that could degrade forward alternate position to avoid losses due to momentum. After the lead company enemy incoming artillery. teams have passed these elements, 2-41 • Frequent moves are anticipated; FA (DS) will pick up the mission from the therefore, the time available to harden dedicated batteries. Suppression fires positions will be limited and protection will continue for as long as the target for personnel will not be fully constitutes a threat to the brigade's developed. movement. When FISTs call for fire, the • The enemy is defending. His logistics 2-41 FA battalion FDC monitors the call problems are minimized and there is nothing to indicate that he is and transmits target location and target experiencing shortages of class V. It description to field artillery units it can be assumed. that if he locates our controls that are in range. This positions, he has the capability to place transmission is conducted on a net other a heavy volume of fire on them. than the dedicated net or by wire if available. The designated units compute The immediate action status of "move to data for the target and stand by to fire on alternate position" is transmitted to all command of the FDO, 2-41 FA (DS). If the elements of 2-41 FA (DS). This authorizes fires of the dedicated battery are battery commanders to displace under sufficient, no further action is taken. If fire on their own initiative. The liaison the FIST ends the suppression mission officer, 2-43 FA (reinf), passes the (the company team has passed the enemy immediate action status to his battalion. element) and the target still requires (FM 6-50 contains additional informa- suppression, he will request 2-41 FA (DS) tion pertinent to "immediate action.") FDC to engage the target. Crossing the LD. Screening/obscuring smoke planned to support a lead At H-hour, company teams from TF 2-81 company team. and TF 2-83 move across the line of departure. 2-41 FA (DS) and 2-43 FA TF 2-81 and TF 2-83 have moved forward (reinf) have displaced forward and are from the line of departure with no laid and ready to fire. A/2-41 FA and significant contact. Team A, TF 2-81, has

F-8 APPENDIX F FM 6-20-1

been moving over brôken terrain that SCREENING/OBSCURING SMOKE provides little natural concealment. The FIST chief with Team A had anticipated this problem and planned smoke to PL PL BLUE [BLUE screen the company team's movement. He also requested that obscuring smoke be planned on high ground overlooking one of the company team's planned overwatch positions. 53 C 52 The FIST chief further requested that the DS battalion FDC provide the screening and obscuring smoke so that the CFL Zd B CFL 2d Bd» dedicated battery (A/2-41 FA) could -0900 ~ 4900 remain laid and ready to fire on planned suppressive targets in the company team's zone. The S3 directed that the LD mission be given to C/2-41 FA. The FIST is controlling the screening smoke and 2 « the S3 has directed one of the FAAOs to 2 41 control the obscuring smoke. The FIST 2 41 will terminate both missions when the U smoke is no longer necessary.

2-43 2 43 □ The situation above illustrates a I—• Bförfl way in which dedicated battery fires 2 43 can be augmented. The FIST has preplanned priority suppressive Ar^^2-42 targets in support of the company 2 41 team's movement and has a platoon Ci from the dedicated battery laid and ready to fire on each of these targets (three targets at any one time). As 2-42 CBTICJKJI2-41 the company team advances, targets ru o that are bypassed are canceled and the platoons lay on the next priority RXÍ12 43 L suppressive targets designated by the FIST. By using other than dedicated battery fires for the screening/obscuring smoke, the S3 2 FLDR^n2 41 is able to keep the dedicated battery oriented on the planned priority suppressive targets, ready to \ suppress immediately should the need arise.

F-9 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

Immediate suppression mission. IMMEDIATE SUPPRESSION

Shortly after the smoke mission is completed, first contact is made by Team BLUE BLUE B, TF 2-83. The FIST's fire request, IMMEDIATE SUPPRESSION- TARGETS 46 AND 47, comes over the dedicated net, and B/2-41 FA responds with immediate suppressive fires on the X 2 CNJ — 53 0 52 planned targets. The DS battalion FDO looks at the plot of the target in relation to / the fire unit locations and sees that C/2- CFL Znd fide ?nd Bde 43 (reinf) and C/2-41 (DS) can both -0900 - 99CÜ engage targets 46 and 47. He determines from monitoring the dedicated net that the company team is receiving ATG and LD ATGM fire from both locations. All targets on the target lists submitted by the FISTs with the lead company teams 4 were transmitted to all firing units in 2-41 m range with instructions to keep firing 2-41 data current for these targets. The liaison officer from 2-43 FA (reinf) alerts his 2-43 battalion to have Battery C come up on 2 43 m the DS battalion CFl net for a fire m mission. The DS battalion FDO contacts m C/2-41 (DS) on the DS battalion CFl net 2-43 and directs the battery to lay on target 46.

C/2-43 FA comes up on the CFl net and is A 1^12-42 also directed to lay on target 46. The ¿X5J 2 41 dedicated battery's fires suppress the t* enemy positions effectively, and the FIST requests 2-41 FA (DS) to neutralize the targets. 2-41 FA FDO fires two 2-42 CBT 2 4 batteries, one volley (HE/VT and PD) on target 46 using C/2-41 FA and C/2-43 FA, m then repeats the method of fire on target 2-43 47 using the same two batteries.

2 FID □ The FDO used the information in W" Joint Munitions Effectiveness Manuals and Graphical Munitions \ Effects Tables to assist him in

F-10 APPENDIX F FM 6-20-1

making this decision. The FDO The fire units will maintain current firing could also use the optimum data for these targets and be ready to shell/fuze combination and target respond with additional fires to the lead matrix as "a way" to help make company teams as needed. rapid and realistic "method of engagement" decisions. Field artillery fires for company Communications. teams that do not have dedicated field artillery support.

The only radio nets in use thus far in the movement to contact are the two The FISTs with company teams that do dedicated fire nets and the DS battalion not have dedicated support have also CFl net. The dedicated nets are used by planned suppressive and screening the FISTs with the dedicated batteries (smoke) fires for the movement to and their transmissions are as brief as contact. These targets have been passed possible to avoid detection. The DS through battalion FSOs to 2-41 FA (DS) battalion has not yet opened its CF2 or its FDC. The FDO assigns the suppressive third fire direction net and will not do so targets to the 2-43 FA (reinf) and the until necessary radio traffic exceeds the smoke targets to C/2-41 FA as on-call capability of the nets in use. The previous targets. The S3 directs that the batteries fire mission to the reinforcing battalion assigned the targets monitor the was transmitted over wire that was laid appropriate fire net so that the FISTs can between the DS and reinforcing artillery. call directly to the battery for the planned The DS battalion FDC is the net control suppressive fires. The FSO insures that station for the command fire and fire nets the FISTs know which battery will fire and should keep the nets "policed" of long their suppressive targets and which and unimportant traffic, and open nets batteries are 8-inch. C/2-41 FA (DS) selectively as the need for radio traffic cannot cover all of the planned smoke increases. targets, so the FSO assigns these targets not covered by the battery to the maneuver battalion mortars. Purging targets. Hasty attacks as part of a The movement to contact continues with movement to contact. lead company teams making good progress. As planned suppressive targets are passed, the DS battalion purges these As the movement to contact continues, targets from the target list and replaces enemy resistance increases in both task them with new priority suppressive force zones. TF 2-81 reports contact with targets submitted by the FISTs. Each a reinforced enemy platoon and the task new target is passed immediately to other force commander has launched a hasty fire units of 2-41 FA (DS) and 2-43 FA attack to overcome the enemy force and (reinf) within range as on-call targets. further develop the situation. (FM 71-2, FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

chapter 4, contains a detailed positions. The FDO passes these targets explanation of hasty attacks.) The hasty to 2-43 FA (reinf) to be fired by A/2-43. attack is launched without hesitation as A/2-43 FA is directed to enter and an extension of the movement to contact. monitor the FSO fire net to insure rapid The FISTs with Teams A and B (Teams A response when these targets are called and B will conduct the attack), TF 2-81, for. As TF 2-81 closes with and overruns develop hasty fire plans consisting of the enemy position, field artillery fires on-call suppressive fires and screening are shifted to targets that have been smoke to support the TF commander's planned by the FSO while the hasty scheme of maneuver. To increase attack was in progress. These targets responsiveness, the FDO, 2-41 FA, consist of likely enemy assembly areas, instructs the FIST chiefs with Teams A chokepoints, and counterattack routes. and B to transmit their on-call targets As a result of the decisive, rapid actions directly to A/2-41 FA and B/2-41 FA, taken by fire and maneuver elements in respectively. 2-41 FA FDC monitors these this situation, the hasty attack is transmissions and records the target successful, and TF 2-81 continues the descriptions and locations. The FSO with movement to contact to further develop TF 2-81 has also submitted on-call targets the situation. planned on suspected enemy overwatch

Key points

In the movement to contact, field artillery tasks are accomplished by providing:

• Immediately responsive dedi- • Suppressive targets that were cated battery support to lead shifted forward as lead company company teams. teams advanced.

• Smoke to screen friendly • Fires in support of company movement. teams that did not have dedi- cated support. • Priority suppressive targets • Fires to support hasty attacks. planned and fired in support of lead company teams.

F-12 APPENDIX F FM 6-20-1

Deliberate Attack Scenario

Situation continued.

The 2d Bde is conducting a deliberate attack. Field artillery organization for combat and the brigade operation overlay follow:

2-41 FA (155, SP): DS 2d Bde > o 7, 2-42 FA (155, SP): GSR, 2-41 FA; 17 o/o DS 3d Bde 2-43 FA (8, SP): Reinf, 2-41 FA t LD LC

2d Bde OBJ co ro

DO TF 2-81

” TF 2-83

CO ho OBJ

DO 53 XX PL GOLD LD/LC 52

F-13 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION • The commander, 2-41 FA, has returned to his CP after a conference with the brigade commander and other members of the brigade staff. He assembles his staff and issues the following guidance:

"Enemy forces have occupied defensive current met. The brigade commander positions along a line 4-6 km forward of expects the situation to move rapidly, so the lead company team's current location we need to be planning for a move and are attempting to reinforce In this forward in time to support the assault and area by moving forces forward. S2, consolidation on objectives 1 and 2. The contact the brigade S2. He has some new two lead task forces, TF 2-81 and TF 2-83, intelligence regarding possible enemy will make the attack. Target lists are being reserve locations and movement routes prepared by battalion and brigade FSOs from those locations to the defensive line. to support the attack and we should be receiving them shortly. "S3, call division artillery and request that they give us first priority on the fires of 2- "S2, the brigade S2 wants target 42 FA (GSR), so we can use them against acquisition means oriented on locating the enemy's reinforcing effort and still the enemy's forward defensive positions, have our battalion and 2-43 FA (reinf) to indirect fire systems, command control support the attack. elements, and reserves. FISTs and FSOs have this information through maneuver "The brigade commander wants a 15- channels. Make sure our batteries, WLRs, minute prep fired at H-5 to support the and FAAOs get the word." attack, so make sure it's ready to go with a

Note. If the division were being passed through a stationary force to conduct a deliberate attack, the considerations listed in chapter 2 for a forward passage would apply.

F-14 APPENDIX F FM 6-20-1

Disrupting the enemy's efforts to reinforce his defensive area is critical to the success of the attack and is the basis for requesting first priority on the fires of 2-42 FA (GSR). The request, if approved, will allow 2-41 FA (DS) and 2-43 FA (reinf) to handle immediate close support fire requests from attacking elements while 2-42 FA places effective fires on deep targets to impede the enemy's efforts to reinforce. Division approves the request, and transmits a frag order to 2d Bde, 2-41 FA, 2-42 FA, and division artillery. The frag order contains the following nonstandard mission for 2-42 FA:

2-42 FA: GSR 2-41 FA, o/o DS 3d Bde; % answer calls for fire in priority from:

2-41 FA Division artillery

This nonstandard mission modifies the priority in which 2-42 FA would answer calls for fire under the tactical mission of GSR. Nothing else has been modified or changed, so the DS battalion S3 cannot position 2-42 FA or plan their fires. He also should be aware that 2-42 FA still has the on-order mission of DS 3d Bde. Now that the enemy's initial line of defense has been identified, the number of targets for inclusion in the prep from FISTs and FSOs will increase significantly. Some of the "suspected" targets planned earlier will be purged as the situation develops and more reliable targets are acquired.

F-15 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

At some point prior to execution (10-15 situation exists and targets of minutes), the prep schedule must be com- opportunity appear that require pleted. This will allow fire units time to immediate engagement, the S3 (or compute data on the last targets received FDO) must take fire units from the and also allow time for battalion preparation to fire these targets. He operations/FDC personnel to make any will attempt to select those fire units last minute adjustments or refinements in range that are presently engaging to the prep schedule. (FM 6-20, appendix the lower priority targets in the prep. H, contains detailed procedures for He must also consider response time, planning preparation fires.) especially since the targets of The attack begins and lead elements of opportunity in this situation can TF 2-81 come under heavy fire degrade severely the forward immediately. The FIST chief with momentum of the supported Company A, TF 2-81, calls a fire mission maneuver force. If a fire unit is firing on an ATG position firing on the lead a preparation target in the vicinity platoon. At the same time, the FIST chief of the targets of opportunity, the with Company B, TF 2-83, calls a fire S3/FDO should consider pulling mission on an estimated enemy platoon that unit from the prep, giving it a of BMPs moving from the east 2,000 range or lateral shift correction to meters from his position. bring the rounds close to the target, and directing the FIST to make subsequent corrections to place steel on the target. Requests for immediate fires while the preparation is in □ Regardless of the thought process progress. used by the S3/FDO in determining fire units to be pulled from the prep, he must remember that those units Since the prep is still in progress, the reenter the preparation schedule at FDO employs the fires of A/2-41 FA and the time they finish firing the target B/2-41 FA against these targets of of opportunity and will begin opportunity. These batteries were not shooting the next target shown on scheduled in the prep and are available to the schedule. No attempt will be respond immediately to calls for fire. made to go back and fire the targets Both missions are "adjust fire." The missed in the prep. The prep is on a mission for TF 2-81 will be conducted on time schedule that has been fire net 1 (Fl) and the mission for TF 2-83 coordinated carefully with the on fire net 3 (F3). scheme of maneuver. Maneuver forces expect the prep fires to be □ If there are many targets to be lifted at a specific time. If units planned, the DS battalion might pulled from the prep do not reenter at find it necessary to include in the the current time indicated on the prep all fire units for which it has schedule of fires, their fires could fire planning authority. When this extend past the completion time

F-16 APPENDIX F FM 6-20-1

ordered by the commander and To facilitate field artillery fires on jeopardize the safety of maneuver portions of the target area while the CAS forces. The S3 notifies the requesting is delivered, the brigade FSO recom- agencies of targets not fired during mended an informal airspace coordina- the prep and, if the requesting tion area be established. The ACA calls agencies desire, takes action to fire for field artillery to be kept north of an the targets as soon as possible after east-west road running through the the prep is completed. target area during the time that the airstrike is being delivered. Details of the ACA are worked out jointly by the brigade FSO and the air liaison officer. The informal ACA is disseminated to all Immediate engagement of deep fire units with the effective date-time targets in conjunction with close group. (FM 6-20, appendix I, contains air support. additional information on informal ACAs.) As the CAS aircraft approach the target area, the forward air controller requests fires on four suppression of enemy air defense targets. These targets originated Thé S2, 2-41 FA (DS), and the S2,2d Bde, at the division FSE and had previously have developed targets behind the been sent to 2-43 FA (reinf) as on-call enemy's forward defensive positions targets and are fired under control of the from a variety of sources that consist FAC. Two batteries of 2-43 FA (reinf) and primarily of assembly areas and three batteries of 2-42 FA (GSR) are firing potential chokepoints along east-west SEAD in support of the CAS being high-speed avenues of approach. The S2, employed against the enemy's attempt to 2-41 FA, has directed that these targets be reinforce. Four batteries (2-41 FA (DS) sent to 2-42 FA (GSR) for immediate plus one battery from 2-43 FA) are also engagement (remember, 2-41 FA (DS) has firing in response to calls for fire from been given first priority on the fires of 2- FISTs. 42 FA). The brigade FSO has advised the brigade commander that these targets include armor vehicles that obviously are preparing to move forward to reinforce the enemy's hasty defense. He î recommends that the CAS be employed Immediate counterfire. in conjunction with the field artillery, since airstrikes are more effective against armor. Diverted CAS is inbound and a forward air controller is on station As the battle progresses, the 2-41 FA (DS) to control the strike. This CAS mission fire direction center receives a SHELREP could also be controlled by a ground FAC from B/2-41 FA reporting incoming or a FIST chief if the situation precluded mortar rounds on an azimuth of the use of an airborne FAC. approximately 1,750 mils frpm their

F-17 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

location. The FDC determines an orienting azimuth for the radar based on IMMEDIATE COUNTERFIRE the SHELREP information. The S2 checks his targeting map and identifies two suspected enemy mortar positions OBJ 2 within range of Battery B along the OBJ 1 reported azimuth. Both of these PL PL suspected mortar positions are part of the GOLD GOL • •• countermortar program and have been ••• assigned to two batteries of 2-43 FA S3 n■4 (GSR). A/2-43 is available and is directed El to fire immediately on the countermortar 52 targets it has been assigned. C/2-43 has just completed firing SEAD targets and is directed to fire immediately on the CFr2nd Bde _ _A^?nd_BJe _ other countermortar target. The DS -0300 - “ y yoaoiTj battalion S3 notifies division artillery LD/ LD TOC of the incoming rounds and the LC * LC action the battalion is taking. The weapon locating radar reports a fix on the enemy mortar position and the 2-4 location is sent to A/2-43 FA and C/2-43 2 41 FA. The two batteries shift their fires to O / the new location, and fire two volleys 2 43 each. B/2-41 FA reports the incoming rounds have ceased and the battery is in the process of loading up and moving to its 2 43 alternate location. Since the S3 is 2 42 planning to displace the battalion 2-41 forward, he orders the battery to disregard the alternate location and to move to a new primary position located 2-42 approximately 3 kilometers behind the CBT 2-4 current frontline trace and approxi- mately 8 kilometers west of objectives 1 2-43 and 2.

2 FLO 2-41 c 2 42 Displacement forward.

The S3, 2-41 FA, and the battalion V commander have previously selected new

F-18 APPENDIX F FM 6-20-1

positions forward to support the securing DISPLACEMENT FORWARD and consolidation of objectives 1 and 2. Their selection was based on a combined map and air reconnaissance and subsequent ground reconnaissance conducted by reconnaissance parties OBJ 1 OBJ 2 PL PL from the headquarters, service, and GOLDl GOLD firing batteries. The DS battalion commander directs the S3 to move both 2-41 FA (DS) and 2-43 FA (reinf) forward TF 2-81 53 $ 52 to the new locations. Movement will be by II echelon for each of the battalions since TF 2-B3 reinforcing field artillery is available and

CFL 2nd Bde CFL 2nd Bde 2-41 FA has first priority on the fires of 2- -0300- -0300- 42 FA. The weapon locating radar will iS*»l 2-41 displace forward with C/2-41 FA. The nil 12 41 12-41 positions selected for 2-41 FA (DS), 2-43 FA (reinf), and the WLR have been coordinated with and approved by the 2d 2-43 I m 12-43 Bde S3. The S3, 2-41 FA, requests that LD/I LD/I division artillery displace 2-42 FA (GSR) LCf “lél 2 43 LC forward and recommends position locations for the firing units. Division artillery orders 2-42 FA to displace 2-42 forward by echelon. The S3, 2-41 FA, coordinates all these moves to insure continuous fire support during displacement.

2-41 1^1 2 42

Fires planned in support of the C 2 42 CBT 41 [ÉI] - assault. i . ^2-43 r.

TF 2-81 and TF 2-83 are within 1 2 FLD kilometer of,objectives 1 and 2 and are 4 m ' receiving sporadic direct and indirect fire. The battalion FSOs have each submitted a target list containing targets short of, on, and beyond the objectives to support the assault. The FSOs specified

F-19 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

that these targets be planned as series to PLANNED FIRES be fired on call. Based on the positions of fire units, in relation to the planned targets, the S3, 2-41 FA, designates A/2-41 FA and C/2-41 FA to fire the series in support of TF 2-81-and B/2-43 f B ""‘MARGE FA and C/2-43 FA to fire the series in PLTv ■ew support of TF 2-83. Scheduling work- GOLD GOLD sheets are prepared for each series. Targets are transmitted to the desig- X 2 r-j — 53 J 52 nated fire units as series MARGE and MANDY to be fired on call. The request- ing FSO is informed. (FM 6-20, appendix CFL 2d Bde CFL 2d Bde I, discusses the procedures for planning -0300- -0300- a series of targets.)

2-41 2-41 2-41 The brigade FSO recommends that CAS be used to' strike the two objectives just prior to the assault. He informs the 2-43 2-43 brigade commander that field artillery LD/ fires have been planned short of, on, and LC 2-43 beyond the objectives. He briefs the brigade commander on the fires planned by the task force FSOs in support of the A >»?l2-42 assault.

2-42 2-41 m Personnel and equipment replacements.

ftgfl2 42

CBT 2-41

2-43 When the assault begins, series MARGE and MANDY are called for and fired. Fires beyond the objectives continue until the consolidation is complete. Five 2 FLO -^^12-41 howitzers have sustained significant damage but are reparable, and the battalion S4 requests direct support \ maintenance contact teams to repair the howitzers on site. He makes this request through the forward area support

F-20 APPENDIX F FM 6-20-1

¡Trr;—MARGE ' IAB0005 AIBr\ 0002 I y^_lAB2001 l_AB0

L I I. AB20V5...

tnt M» V/ft a á

c °o 10 Ute A m

VT

coordinator at the brigade trains. B/2-41 Objectives 1 and 2 have been secured. 2d FA had one howitzer extensively Bde receives a frag order terminating the damaged during an enemy indirect fire nonstandard mission for 2-42 FA attack. The howitzer was left in place (GSR),and the brigade FSO notifies the when the battery repositioned forward S3, 2-41 FA (DS). The FDO immediately and has since been recovered and checks the targets that have been sent to evacuated to the rear for major repair. 2-42 FA as on-call targets and transfers The battalion S4 has requested and those targets to batteries of 2-41 FA and 2- received a float howitzer from'the 43 FA (reinf) that are in range. division support command, and a team FISTs/FSOs are also notified of this from the battery is en route to the change. battalion's combat trains location to bring the howitzer forward in conjunction with a class V pickup.

F-21 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

Key points

During the attack, the cannon battalion accomplished the field artillery tasks in support of the attacking brigade by—

• Scheduling and firing a prepara- Firing to support the assault and tion. consolidation of the objectives.

* Answering requests for imme- Displacing forward as the diate fii’e. attack progressed while simul- taneously maintaining the * Engaging deep targets with capability to provide adequate, massed fires in conjunction with responsive fire support to the close air support. brigade. I

F-22 APPENDIX F FM 6-20-1

Exploitation/Pursuit Scenario

Situation continued. been ordered to exploit. The 2d Bde will conduct an exploitation in the southern portion of the division zone. 3d Bde will follow and support 2d Bde. The attack has been successful. The The following scenario will focus on 2d enemy is having recognizable difficulty Bde and 3d Bde to illustrate how a maintaining his positions, PWs have cannon battalion supports an exploiting increased significantly,' and the enemy brigade, and a follow and support has been abandoning serviceable brigade. Field artillery tactical missions equipment in place. The division has are shown below.

BWV-l'K-'iAt.TT

o // 2-41 FA (155,SP): DS 2d Bde. 2-42 FA (155, SP): DS 3d Bde. 2-43 FA (8, SP): Reinf 2-41 FA

Ms

ID 0“ X PL BLU Ist&j ¿2 > Ö¿3

LD PL BLUE

F-23 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

Initial planning considerations, The commander's guidance above is 2-41 FA. intended to highlight those considera- tions that the commander of a cannon battalion DS to an exploiting force must take into account when planning to In preparation for his tactical mission of support an exploitation. Considerations providing direct support to 2d Bde requiring further amplification are: (exploiting force), the commander, 2-41 Counterfire. The sound/flash base FA, assembles his staff and issues the provides a capability to detect enemy following guidance: artillery locations. The base is under division artillery control. Establishing a quick-fire channel between the base and "The division artillery plans to establish a 2-41 FA gives 2-41 FA the capability to sound/flash base In our zone. Getaqulck- respond immediately with counterfire fire channel established between our FDC against enemy indirect fire attacks. and the sound/flash base. Get our When 2-41 FA displaces forward (by weapon locating radar well forward. battalion), the quick-fire channel should be reestablished between the sound/ "S4, logistics is going to be a significant problem during the exploitation. Keep the flash base and 2-43 FA (reinf). combat trains as far forward as possible Initial displacement forward by and well stocked with class V, POL, and ; the battalion. As the brigade begins to repair parts. Make sure that we have our exploit, moves forward must be made as recovery vehicles located with the combat rapidly as possible. The battalion trains, and make sure the batteries have commander has elected to displace his tow bars. We may have to tow disabled entire battalion forward simultaneously vehicles forward and repair them when we can. and rely on the reinforcing battalion (2-43 FA) to handle fire requests from "We must make our first move forward as rapidly as possible; therefore, we will move by battalion. S3, coordinate with 2- 43 FA (reinf); I want them to monitor our CF net and the FD nets while we displace forward. Calls for fire from FISTs will go directly to them. Make sure that the FSOs brief the FISTs. When we are in position and ready to fire, I want 2-43 FA to move forward by battalion, but not until we have good FM communications with the FISTs. During the exploitation, leapfrog the batteries forward with no more than two of the six batteries on the road at any time. Coordinate this closely with 2-43 FA (reinf) and include it in your briefing to the liaison officer from 2-43 FA when he & L arrives."

F-24 APPENDIX F FM 6-20-1

FISTs/FSOs while the movement is in Field artillery fire planning for the progress. This is not a "rule of thumb," but rather a consideration that must be exploitation. weighed against: * The degree of enemy resistance The exploitation continues with the expected and the corresponding majority of the field artillery missions need for field artillery support fired being targets of opportunity. At this during the initial stages of the stage, very little fire planning can be exploitation. accomplished, since the enemy is moving * Routes available. rearward rapidly and targets are moving * The availability of reinforcing constantly. If the brigade leaves units in field artillery. position to fix bypassed enemy forces until follow and support forces arrive, 2-41 FA (DS 2d Bde) must make pro- Immediate counterfire. As lead visions to support the fixing force by— elements of 2d Bde move into the • Answering calls for fire on targets of exploitation phase, they come under opportunity from FSOs/FISTs with the enemy indirect fire attack. The S3, 2-41 fixing force. FA (DS 2d Bde), immediately orders the • Firing on escape routes to assist the countermortar program fired, and fixing force in containing the enemy contacts division artillery requesting force (FSOs/FISTs will designate counterbattery on all known or suspected where and when these fires are enemy artillery positions within range of needed). the brigade's lead elements. The weapon • Insuring that fire support coordination locating radar acquires locations of two measures are established to facilitate coordination of fires in support of the mortar positions, and the S3 pulls two fixing force and the follow and support batteries from the countermortar force. program to fire on these targets. The sound/flash base also acquires a fix on an enemy artillery location and this target is sent to 2-43 FA (reinforcing 2-41 Span of control problems during FA) and is fired as a battalion mass exploitation. mission. The enemy indirect fire attack ceases. The S3, 2-41 FA, notifies division artillery and 2-43 FA that incoming has ceased. The 2d Bde FSO recommends □ Span of control can become a that the three confirmed targets be problem during an exploitation or designated as priority targets with two pursuit, especially if the exploiting howitzers laid and ready to fire on each force is able to strike swiftly and target. The brigade commander directs deeply into enemy territory. Decen- that the priority remain in effect until 3d tralization of fire control may be Bde passes the target locations. The FSO appropriate during this type notifies 2-41 FA, and the S3 assigns the operation. If it becomes obvious that priority targets to 2-43 FA (reinf). the force artillery headquarters

F-25 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

(division artillery in this case) is so The pursuit. far behind the exploiting force that it cannot control artillery with the force effectively, the artillery should be attached to the force. If direct support and reinforcing artillery are moving with the exploiting force, □ Like the exploitation, field artillery formation of a battalion group would fire planning for the pursuit will be be a viable method of reducing span hasty and informal. Planning is of control problems. In this scenario, accomplished to support both the the division attaches 2-43 FA (reinf) encircling force and the direct to 2-41 FA (DS 2d Bde) to form a pressure force. battalion group and then attaches the battalion group to 2d Bde. Normally, the battalion group In the situation depicted below, 1st Bde is commander is the DS battalion maintaining pressure on the retreating commander. Command relation- enemy force while 2d Bde advances on ships are specified in the attachment the flank of the enemy force to encircle it orders. and cut off its escape routes.

THE^URSUIL

AN ENCIRCLING FORCE:

Note. RFL depicted as a red To envelop the line on overlays and maps fleeing force, So cut its escape MICH DIV) route, and in 1 X 2 conjunction with A DIRECT PRESSURE direct pressure FORCE: force, attack to To deny enemy units any destroy the - chance to rest, regroup, or ,> DIRECT enemy force. resupply; by keeping them PRESSURE FORCE in flight.

F-26 APPENDIX F FM 6-20-1

PLANNED FIRES 2-40 FA (DS 1st Bde) plans fires to—

• Slow and wear down the enemy force.

• Suppress enemy rear guard and strongpoint units so that 1st Bde can bypass them and maintain contact with the main force. • Mass lires on enemy forces concen- trated at chokepoints such as defiles and bridges.

+ + + + + + + ++ + 2-41 FA (DS 2d Bde) plans fires to—

53 1 X 2 • Slow and wear down the enemy force. VA CH • Suppress enemy positions so that the Xllrj ENCIRCLING brigade can bypass them rapidly. FORCE • Mass fires on the enemy main body when the encirclement is complete. • Support a flank attack by 2d Bde if 2d Bde is unable to outdistance the enemy main body.

» CS3 2-41

L# 2-4t To impede the enemy's rearward progress, the 2d Bde FSO and the brigade 2 41 S2 select targets that cover potential escape routes. The FSO and the air liaison officer work out a plan that uses a CICX) 2 43 combination of close air support and field artillery on these targets, and the FSO 2 43 briefs the brigade commander quickly. The commander approves the plan, and while the ALO initiates the immediate close air support requests, the brigade FSO passes the field artillery targets to

F-27 PM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

2-41 FA (DS 2d Bde). Since some of the targets on the FSO's list are out of range, the S3 elects to have 2-43 FA (reinf) remain in position to fire the targets in range while 2-41 FA displaces to positions selected by map reconnais- sance that are within range of the deepest targets on the FSO's target list. The move is made by echelon with two firing batteries in the first echelon and the remaining firing battery in the second echelon. If the brigade requires fires from more than one battery while the first echelon is moving, 2-43 FA (reinforcing 2- 41 FA) is available and in position to fire.

At the new positions, the batteries use hasty survey techniques to establish position and directional control. If met data is available and muzzle velocities are current, met + VE will be used to maintain the capability to mass fires accurately.

2d Bde completes the encirclement and 1st Bde is maintaining pressure on the enemy force, driving it into the 2d Bde. Division has established an RFL between 2d Bde and 1st Bde to facilitate coordination of fires. In conjunction with CAS sorties, 2-43 FA (reinf) is firing planned mass fires on gaps, escape routes, and on the encircled force.

F-28 APPENDIX F FM 6-20-1

Key points

An exploitation marks the begin- ning of the end for the enemy force.

The exploiting force advances rapidly into the enemy's rear, bypassing small pockets of resist- ance and destroying lightly defended installations and troop concentrations.

The pursuit focuses on total destruction of the enemy force.

Field artillery, when supporting forces in the exploitation/pursuit must keep up with the forward momentum of maneuver forces while maintaining the capability to provide responsive support.

The demand for combat service support will be continuous — especially for ammunition and POL.

F-29 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

Covering Force Scenario

Situation. covering force. He attaches the divisional cavalry squadron (1-23 Cav) and one tank-heavy task force (TF 1-3 Armor) to The 52d Mech Div has been given a the 201st ACR to round out the covering mission to establish a covering force and force. defend in sector. The division receives The 42d FA Bde is attached to the attachment of the headquarters and two division and the division commander squadrons, 201st ACR, and the division further attaches the field artillery commander has decided to employ the brigade to the covering force. The field ACR headquarters as the command artillery brigade consists of the field control headquarters for the division artillery battalions shown below. i

THE COVERING FORCE IS DEPLOYED AS SHOWN BELOW.

2- 6-5 FA (175, SR)9 97 FA (155, SR) 3- 1-43 FA (8, SR)9 97 FA (155.SP) 2-83 FA (8, SR)

H 42d x 53Ï 201st Sl _ 52 53 PL ( ) ELM ^02 ELM

$X X XI X X 2 X Xi 3 i r REAR I I AREA

F-30 APPENDIX F FM 6-20-1

Field artillery organization for combat. b - « ,rr 3B© D Insures representative calibers, 2-997 FA has been assigned the tactical enhancing the covering force's efforts in mission of direct support to TF 1-3. The deceiving the enemy as to the location of mission statement is as follows: the forward edge of the main battle area. 2-997 FA (attach one battery to 2-83 FA, receive one battery attached from 2-83 FA): DS TF 1-3 Armor; on order, GSR 1- On order, GSR 1-41 FA. This tells 41 FA. Upon change of control, attached the 2-997 FA that it will have a change of batteries revert to parent battalions. mission in the vicinity of phase line ELM.

The implications of this mission follow: Attach one battery to 2-83 FA. DS TF 1-3 Armor. Normally, one This tells the 2-997 FA that one of its artillery battalion is placed in direct batteries is to be attached to 2-83 FA. support of a maneuver brigade. However, The 2-997 FA has no reinforcing artillery; because of the wide frontages and fluid however, 1-41 FA, one of the MBA nature of the fight in the covering force cannon battalions, has the following area, the division commander's mission: organization for combat places an artillery battalion in direct support of each task force/squadron in the covering force. The DS battalion commander is the 1-41 FA (155, SP), DS 2d Bde, priority of FSCOORD for the task force and the task fires initially to 2-997 FA. force FSO becomes the assistant FSCOORD. Attach one battery to 2-83 FA, receive one battery attached from 2-83 FA. 2-997 FA is a 155-mm This mission tells 2-997 FA that it has battalion and 2-83 FA is an 8-inch first priority on the fires of 1-41 FA for as battalion. The cross-attachment of long as 2-997 FA has the mission of DS, 155-mm and 8-inch batteries within the TF 1-3. When TF 1-3 comes under control covering force artillery does two things: of 2d Bde, it receives its field artillery support from lj-41 FA. (D= . Missions assigned to field artillery Insures the most responsive fires by battalions supporting covering force precluding a "pure" 8-inch battalion in operations vary in complexity depending direct support of the task force. The on how the force commander envisions howitzer battery (155-mm) provides the fighting the battle and the field artillery capability to fire smoke and illumination units available. The missions assigned to in support of TF 1-3. These ammunition 2-997 FA and 1-41 FA are representative types are not available for 8-inch of the more complex missions that could howitzers. be assigned.

F-31 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION • Positioning. be positioned farther forward in the CFA than needed to fire on those targets that can be located accurately. Other considerations in positioning fire units in To support TF 1-3 in the initial stages of the CFA are: the covering force battle, selected FA locations are shown below. Batteries are • Defensible terrain. in position and all positions are being • Routes to next most likely position. hardened to the extent that resources • Routes for ammunition resupply. permit, and survey control has been • Potential enemy avenues of approach extended to the firing batteries. and fields of fire into the position. The major considerations for positioning • Alternate locations. field artillery fire units in the covering • Cover and concealment. force are the range at which targets can • Communications masks. be acquired and the ability to provide continuous support without excessive These considerations are amplified in displacement. Field artillery should not ., chapter 3.

2-83 2-997

2-997/>^ , / X / >3» ) 2 %/ X CBT0 -"L ( (S X rrr^ —w ' ,'lî/ FLO 2-997 . - -s PL A101 ELM =J1

F-32 APPENDIX F FM 6-20-1

Based on the maneuver commander's guidance, the battalion commander, 2-997 FA, meets with his S3, communica- tions-electronics staff officer, HHB commander, S4, and XO, and issues his guidance for initial positioning of the HHB and service battery.

'Tm concerned about the positions we spread out, so make sure we can talk. S4, select for the CP and the battalion trains. I put out field trains as close as possible to want a small headquarters element made the COSCOM forward support element. up of the S2, S3, operations/FDC We may be able to resupply class V by complex. Locate it as close as possible to helicopter, so insure that the combat TF 1-3's CP. Our fire units are pretty well trains area has a suitable helicopter landing site. Establish a recovery capability with the combat trains. I don't want any equipment left behind. If equipment must be left behind, make sure that the batteries have the capability to destroy or disable it in place. XO, I want the firing batteries light in everything except class V. Have all the ammunition sections consolidated under the ammunition officer's control. Tell him I want movement of single ammunition vehicles to and from the ASP as opposed to resupply convoys. This will reduce our vulnerability to enemy air attack."

Employment of target acquisition elements.

The S2, 2-997 FA, has coordinated closely with the TF 1-3 S2 in order to integrate field artillery target acquisition into the TF 1-3 information collection plan. The 2-997 FA has one weapon locating radar attached. The S2 has determined a

F-33 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

general location for the WLR that • Fires on the approaching enemy to slow provides coverage in the area of the main his advance and increase target enemy avenue of approach into TF 1-3 servicing time for the maneuver force. Armor's position. The radar section chief • Fires to assist the disengagement and will select the exact site. The S2 will repositioning of maneuver elements. orient the radar and assign sectors of • Fires on enemy penetrations. scan based on the current estimate of enemy dispositions. As the situation develops, sectors of scan for the radar will The FSOs submit targets to be included be modified based on reports of enemy in the above planning effort by wire (if firing received from FISTs and FSOs. available), by messenger, or by FM The S2 must monitor closely the communications, in that priority. The S3 does not wait until his field artillery developing enemy situation with respect to the position^ of the radar and plan for support plan is complete with targets and rearward locations for the radar as the schedules to transmit target data to fire battle develops. units. Target data is transmitted to fire units immediately. Most of the field artillery support plan, if published, will be written information that has already Field artillery fire planning. been passed verbally.

The field artillery fire planning effort is Met/registrations. an ongoing process within the 2-997 FA FDC under the supervision of the Two met stations have been established battalion S3. Initial target lists have in the covering force area (42d FA Bde's been received from the task force FSO organic met section and a forward met and have been incorporated into the field station from 52d Mech Div Arty). 52d artillery support plan. Initial target Mech Div Arty's met station is closest to information is sketchy at this point and 2-997 FA's fire units and within consists primarily of fires planned on communication range. Valid mets are likely approach routes beyond the direct being received and the battalion has fire range of the supported teams. Team calibrated recently so the S3 elects to fire B, TF 1-3, is astride the most likely enemy met + VE in lieu of registering. (Other avenue of approach into the task force registration options available are area. The task force commander has discussed in FM 6-40, chapter 11.) specified priority of fires initially to Team B. Whenever the number of targets Communications. exceed the battalion's capability for immediate engagement (to include reinforcing field artillery), the FDO must In anticipation that sufficient time would insure that targets called for in support of be available to lay wire from the Team B are engaged first. battalion to the batteries and to the FSO with TF 1-3, the S3 instructed the As the battle develops, the fire planning operations sergeant to open only the CF effort will focus primarily on: net initially. Additional FM nets will be

F-34 APPENDIX F FM 6-20-1 opened only as necessary to handle Location of 1-41 FA (MBA increased traffic as the situation battalion with priority of fires to 2- develops. Since wire has not been laid to the FISTs, all necessary radio traffic 997 FA). between the three FISTs, the FSO, and The S3, 2-997 FA, is concerned about the the battalion will be conducted on the location and status of 1-41 FA. For him to battalion CF net. The S3 is aware that exercise his first priority on calls for fire when contact is made, FM traffic will as early as possible, 1-41 FA must be increase. At this time, traffic should be positioned in forward supplemental minimal and consists of FISTs positions within FM communication transmitting target lists to the FSO. By range. S3, 2-997 FA, has recommended wire, the FSO passes consolidated target (through the field artillery brigade to lists, fire support measures, and division artillery) a position area maneuver control measures to the approximately 11 kilometers forward of battalion operations/FDC. Depending the MBA. This area i*s within FM on distances and time, this type traffic communication range of his location and could be carried by messenger. (2-997 FA still allows 1-41 FA to maintain is a corps field artillery battalion and is communication with division artillery authorized only one CF net and one FD and the brigade and battalion FSOs with net.) 2d Bde. From these supplemental positions, 1-41 FA fire units can range to

2-83 2-997

N W' \ 2-997

v -w

CBT R»*, X X X X t —w 8>' / FLD 2-997 B A101 PL -II PL ELM ELM 1-41 FA

F-35 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

4 kilometers beyond the initial line of contact. The 42d FA Bde confirms that 1-41 FA is moving to occupy supplemen- tal positions that approximate those recommended by the S3. Closing time and battery centers will be transmitted as soon as movement is completed.

Immediate action status.

The battalion commander directs an immediate action status of "stay in position." The S3 alerts the batteries that they will move to alternate locations only if their positions become untenable as a result of enemy indirect fire attacks. The commander analyzed the risks associated with the "stay in position" status against the temporary interrup- tion of field artillery support associated with the "move to alternate location" status. Based on this analysis, he ruled in favor of having maximum field artillery cannons in position and ready to fire during the critical initial stages of the battle. As the battle develops and the fires of 1-41 FA can be brought to bear on the advancing enemy force, the commander may reevaluate the status and consider going to "move to alternate location." Reconnaissance and combat service support considerations.

The commander, 2-997 FA (DS TF1-3), is concerned about the movement of his battalion during the covering force fight and about certain combat service support considerations that may affect the battalion's capability to provide adequate field artillery support. Reissues the following guidance to his staff:

F-36 APPENDIX F FM 6-20-1

"S3, we need to recon for new positions. of our three batteries In position to fire at As positions are selected, coordinate with all times. XO, you work with the S1 and the S2 to get the survey effort extended to the S4 to insure that personnel and the new positions. Based on the depth of equipment replacements that cannot be the covering force, we should plan on at brought forward are delivered to the least two moves on this side of the MBA. batteries as soon as possible following We don't have a reinforcing unit so plan occupation of positions in the MBA. S3, on moving by battery. I want at least two make certain that target damage assessment Is sent to firing batteries whenever possible. Let them know that their fires are, in fact, taking a toll on the enemy. SI, get locked in with theTF 1-3 SI regarding refugee control and make sure that you keep the S3 informed on movement of refugees through the covering force area. They could become a problem as the battle develops, and the last thing we need is a battery move delayed because the selected movement route is choked with refugee traffic."

Initial engagement of enemy forces.

Five to seven lightly armored vehicles and troops on motorcycles are moving toward TF 1-3 Armor's initial battle position. Rate of movement is estimated at 10 to 15 kilometers per hour, and their route is toward a location where remote sensors have been placed. The sensor locations were previously sent to the 2-997 FA FDC by the task force FSO to be planned as on-call targets. The FSO requests that 2-997 FA prepare to fire on the sensor locations. He determines that if the enemy force continues at its present rate, it will pass through the sensors within the next 5 minutes. B/2-83 FA and B/2-997 FA are both in range of the sensor locations and both batteries have firing data already computed since they had previously received these sensor

F-37 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION locations as on-call targets. The battalion FSO as on-call targets. The FSO assigned FDO specifies a battery three rounds the smoke targets to the task force HE/VT for B/2-83 FA and a battery three mortars and the HE targets to 2-997 FA. rounds for B/2-997 FA. When the sensors As Team B begins its disengagement, the are triggered, the task force FSO contacts FIST chief calls for the planned targets the FDO and the FDO directs Batteries A to be fired at his command. A/2-997 FA and B to commence firing. While this and B/2-997 FA are the units designated mission is in progress, the FIST chief to fire, and the FDO directs them to with Team A requests fires "at my contact the FIST on the fire direction net. command" on light tanks approaching (Fire requests and the volume of FM the vicinity of target 252 (this target was traffic have necessitated opening an submitted by the FIST on his initial additional FM net.) The FIST controls target list as an on-call target, and firing the mission, integrating the smoke batteries have computed data). As the targets from the task force mortars, and tanks approach target 252, the FIST Team B successfully breaks contact and chief gives the command to fire. A moves to its next position. The task force battery four rounds DPICM from FSO relays the new positions to the 2-997 A/2-997 FA causes the reconnaissance FA FDC. These control measures are element to slow down, button up, and plotted on all maps and charts and trans- disperse. mitted to the firing batteries and to force artillery headquarters.

Displacement—fire units and trains. Fires to support maneuver disengagement. As the covering force fight continues, maneuver forces and supporting field artillery have inflicted significant losses on the enemy force but relentless pressure As the battle continues, Team B, astride has forced covering force units back the main enemy avenue of approach, is toward the MBA. 2-997 FA has displaced engaging a large, tank-heavy enemy to new positions along and just forward force that is closing rapidly on its of battle position A87. position. To preclude the loss of freedom of maneuver, Team B is ordered to move to its next battle position. The FIST with Team B had planned smoke and HE fires The XO, 2-997 FA, briefs the commander to support the team's disengagement and on the current disposition of battalion submitted these targets to the task force trains.

F-38 APPENDIX F FM 6-20-1

"Sir, we have relocated the field trains In a Buildings In the area provide good cover small village close to the current location and concealment and sheltered areas for of the COSCOM forward support maintenance operations. In anticipation element. Roads in the area are adequate. of the necessity for rapid displacement, I have instructed the S4 to set up and occupy buildings along the edge of the village. The position offers good concealment from overhead observation and roads are adequate. We are clearing a small area for helicopter landings to handle aerial resupply of class V. Class V resupply has posed no significant problem yet, but our vehicles are taking a beating. The S4 is on top of this and has an ample supply of small repair parts with high usage rates on hand at both trains locations."

Immediate counterfire.

The FIST chief with Team B reports incoming mortar rounds and requests immediate counterfire. The S2, 2-997 FA, informs the WLR to orient to a new sector of scan that corresponds to the center of the task force area. 2-997 FA has a countermortar program planned, and the S3 orders it fired immediately. The FIST chief calls in an approximate azimuth to the enemy mortar location and the S2 plots this azimuth on1 his map. A suspected mortar location lies approximately 750 meters left of the azimuth and is being fired as part of the

F-39 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

countermortar program. The suspected the fighters arrive on station, the field location plots outside the sector of scan artillery fires are switched from the that the S2 had initially sent to the radar. obstacles to SEAD targets. These targets He directs the radar to adjust the sector of consist of known and suspected enemy scan and the radar acquires a fix on the air defense weapon locations along the mortar location. B/2-997 FA and B/2-83 routes to be used by the CAS aircraft and FA are massed on the target, and the air defense weapons in the area of the FIST chief reports that incoming has airstrike. As Team B moves into its new ceased. The TF commander designated position, the Team FIST continues to the mortar location as a priority target adjust field artillery fires on enemy until Team B moves from its present elements. The field artillery fires slow location. them down, increasing target servicing time for the tanks and TOWs with Team B. Field artillery fires planned to support obstacles. Priority of fires. Team B (still positioned astride the main enemy avenue of approach) is preparing to move to its next battle position. The TF Up to this point priority of field artillery commander had previously dispatched fires has been to Team B; however, when the attached engineer platoon to the Team A comes under attack by an team's current location with instructions estimated battalion-size enemy force, the to construct obstacles (ditches, felled task force FSO recommends, and the TF trees, and mines) on the north-south commander approves, shifting priority of roads and trails leading through the fires to Team A. The FSO immediately position. notifies 2-997 FA of the change and the FDO briefs all FDC personnel. Priority of 2-997 FA continues to fire on the fires will be critical during covering force advancing enemy force to slow them operations, and the FSO is a key adviser down and keep them buttoned up. The on this decision. The task force FSO designated field artillery targets to commander will decide the priority of support the obstacles and forwarded fires based on his FSO's recommenda- them to 2-997 FA to be planned as a group tion. As the TF commander repositions of targets and fired on call. Under his maneuver forces in response to the extreme pressure, Team B moves to its developing enemy situation, he and his next battle position, and as lead elements FSO must determine which team has the of the enemy force hit the obstacles, the most critical need for immediately planned groups are called for by the FSO. responsive fire support. Whenever the DS The groups are fired with a mix of field artillery battalion has more calls for HE/VT and DPICM. These fires and the fire than it can handle with the fire units obstacles slow the enemy's movement available, the FDC will respond first to significantly. Immediate close air calls for fire from the team that has support has been requested, and when priority of fires.

F-40 APPENDIX F FM 6-20-1

Preparations for change of mission. The covering force line of contact is along PL ELM. 1-41 FA has repositioned into the MBA but can still range beyond the line of contact. Division artillery has sent an MBA position area for occupation to 2-997 FA. The S3 outlines plans for the on-order GSR mission to 1-41 FA.

i establish a quick-fire channel with them. I "Sir, 1-41 FA is monitoring our fire nets have a chopper laid on for air and has communications with all of TF1 -3 reconnaissance of the new position area Armor FISTs and the FSO. As the task and the batteries have been alerted to force continues to fight back to the MBA, have reconnaissance parties ready to go. the FISTs will continue to request field Survey and wire laying will commence as artillery fires on the same nets they are soon as battery locations are selected. presently using. This will facilitate change The CESO has instructed wire laying of control and preclude the confusion of teams to dig in wire or install it overhead frequency changes during the passage. when possible. The XO is coordinating We will remain in our current positions with TF 1-3 on routes and passage points until change of control. When change of into the MBA. 2d Bde units will have control is ordered into effect, I guides stationed at the passage points to recommend that we move to our initial lead us through 2d Bde's forward MBA location by echelon. I have already defensive positions. We will move under dispatched a liaison officer to 1-41 FA to brigade control."

F-41 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

Key points

During the covering force fight, field artillery supports covering force elements by—

• Engaging enemy forces well • Providing immediate counter- forward of initial covering force fire. positions. • Planning fires as an economy of • Firing in support of disengag- force measure in less threatened ing/repositioning maneuver areas. forces. • Planning fires to support 9 Maintaining a continuous firing obstacles. capability during displace- ments. • Planning to provide continuous field artillery support during change of control. i

F-42 APPENDIX F FM 6-20-1

Main Battle Area Scenario

Situation. 1- 43 FA (8,SP) R 1-41 FA The 2d Bde is deployed in the MBA as shown below: 2- 997 FA (155.SP) GSR 141 FA

c!j*> fS) CJL) ra y

r A7^ ('¿'s'"* ('&*) y II ~ lw\r\* ,^r"N t01/ /tí'V —.

^ Bi3^ (''ciiT') ''u^ ( Al? ) M'9 ^ — r r B» } '-II

ii^ -w

( A31 1 r D69 ; V «9 )

F-43 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

The enemy is massing for his planning effort, giving 1-41 FA a total breakthrough attempt with two divisions of six batteries for which it can plan in the first echelon followed by two more fires. divisions in the second echelon. The • 1-43 FA should be an addressee for all enemy's main effort is directed at 2d plans and orders published by 1-41 FA. Bde's battle area. • 1-43 FA (reinf) was initially deployed as part of the covering force field artillery and may have suffered significant personnel and equipment losses. Until Field artillery organization for these losses can be replaced, the combat. battalion may be operating at less than full capability. As part of the initial planning effort, the • 2-997 FA (155, SP) is general support commander, 1-41 FA (DS 2d Bde), and his reinforcing 1-41 FA. 1-41 FA has S3 must analyze the field artillery second priority on their calls for fire. organization for combat and the resulting implications. Positioning considerations. • 1-43 FA (8, SP) is reinforcing 1-41 FA. 1-41 FA has first priority on their fires, positioning, and fire planning The commander, 1-41 FA, issues the authority. following guidance to his S3 regarding • The three batteries of 1-43 FA should be positioning of 1-41 FA (DS) and 1-43 FA included in the field artillery fire (reinf).

"The covering force has confirmed that -v- the main effort Is coming In 2d Bde's area. S3,1 want our next positions to be on the west side of that effort in 1st Bde's zone if necessary. Its zone is the least congested, and real estate shouldn't be at a premium. Coordinate this through the 1st Bde FSO. Coordinate the positions with the division artillery S3 to make sure they complement the overall lateral repositioning scheme. Plan to move by echelon and coordinate all moves with division artillery. Tell the batteries to move cross country when possible, Just in case lines of communication become congested with refugees and CSS elements."

F-44 APPENDIX F FM 6-20-1

Based on the commander's guidance, the S3 selected positions for 1-41 FA and 1-43 FA as shown below.

1-41

1-4 M] I-« B [>ü?11-41

M 1-43

X X 3 52 X 1 X X2 .A « 52 -43

Ml 1-43

Employment of target acquisition. 1-41 FA has one weapon locating radar attached from the division artillery target acquisition battery. The S2 has positioned the radar close to C/l-41 FA's location. The position is close enough to the FEBA to permit the S2 to orient the radar to where the enemy can be expected to concentrate his indirect fire systems. The location chosen for the radar is also in 1st Bde's zone. Coordination of the selected radar position should be coordinated with 1st Bde at the same time that the locations for 1-41 FA are coordinated.

F-45 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

Division artillery has positioned a sound/flash base in the approximate area of 1-41 FA's location (the position for the base was also coordinated with 1st Bde). The base will send target locations direct to division artillery.

Field artillery fire planning.

The initial fire planning effort will be directed toward assisting covering force elements as they move into the MBA. Both TF 1-4 and TF 1-3 will pass into 2d Bde's area and will be looking to 1-41 FA^^B (DS) for field artillery support. The FSOs with the task forces will be planning targets along designated movement routes and submitting them to 1-41 FA FDC to be planned as on-call targets. The 2d Bde FSO is planning on-call targets forward of the MBA. These targets are based on terrain analysis and targeting information received from covering force elements. The S3, 1-41 FA, has instructed the S2 and the operations sergeant to prepare a counterfire program on known or suspected enemy indirect fire systems. The brigade FSO inputs targets for the program based on where the brigade commander plans to concentrate his forces to react to the main effort. Covering force elements continue to fight toward designated passage points into the MBA. 1-41 FA (DS), 1-43 FA (reinf),

F-46 APPENDIX F FM 6-20-1

and 2-997 FA (GSR) have occupied 6F positions in the MBA; 1-41 FA has established FM communications with "We need to keep our countermortar FISTs in the covering force moving into program current. Make sure that we purge 2d Bde's area. The 2d Bde FSO notifies old mortar locations as the battle the S3,1-41 FA, that 2d Bde has assumed develops. Don't fire the program until you control of covering force elements can substantiate that the requesting unit is, In fact, under Indirect fire attack and forward of the brigade. not just taking a few sporadic rounds. Remember, the enemy likes to employ his 122 howitzers in the direct fire role. If the FISTs can visually locate 122s firing direct fire, we attack them immediately as visually acquired direct fire weapons, not Fires in support of an isolated counterfire targets." maneuver element. The FSO, TF 1-4, reports that elements of Team A and its FIST have been cut off and are isolated. TF 1-4 commander designates a restrictive fire area around the Team A location, and the FSO passes the RFA to 1-41 FA. The FIST with Team A and the team commander select targets to support the team's breakout and movement toward the MBA. These targets are to be fired as called for by the FIST chief and are assigned to A/l-41 FA and B/l-41 FA as TF 1-79 (2d Bde) reports heavy incoming on-call targets. The FIST calls for the artillery and mortar fire and the S3, 1-41 targets to be fired, and under cover of FA (DS), notifies division artillery and these fires, the team executes a breakout reports the type of incoming rounds and and moves toward the MBA. Team A's approximate azimuth (if known). The S2 route is covered by on-call targets. had both weapon locating radars oriented. He transmits cuing instructions to the radars and both radars begin scanning. One of the radars reports the locations of a mortar position and the FDO sends the grid to A/l-41 FA for engagement with a battery four, HE/PD Counterfire engagement. and VT. The sound/flash base also acquires two targets and division artillery is engaging them with GS and The S3, 1-41 (DS), briefs the FDO as GSR artillery. Nine minutes after the follows regarding counterfire planning indirect fire attack commenced, TF 1-79 and engagement. reports INCOMING CEASED.

F-47 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

FSiros iiou siuipp©irî off sî(r@[nigp©5in)Ss0 1-41 FA FDO transmits the targets to 1-43 FA (reinf) and 2-997 FA (GSR) and requests that they be planned as TF 1-36 is in a battle position that battalion "mass" missions. As the battle includes a strongpoint occupied by Team continues, 2d Bde receives a report of a A. The other two teams in the task force large armor formation moving at high are in positions on the flanks of the speed toward one of the predicted target strongpoint. Massed fires from 1-41 FA areas. The FSO, after briefing the are planned in the gaps between the brigade commander, contacts 1-41 FA strongpoint and flanking teams. Final FDC and requests that the battalion protective fires are planned around the stand by to fire the target with all perimeter and "fired in" by the FIST. available FA "at my command." 1-43 FA (FPFs are discussed in FM 6-20, appendix is on 1-41 FA CF net and monitors the H.) As enemy tanks and BMPs come into request. The liaison officer passes the sight, the FSO times their rate of advance request to 2-997 FA on the "quick-fire and requests a battalion mass, one channel." When the armor force volley, HE/VT, and DPICM from 1-41 approaches the target area, the FSO FA. The enemy force deploys, attempting gives the command to fire. Fires continue to bypass the strongpoint. The personnel until the CAS is on station and then fires manning the strongpoint open fire on the are shifted to suppression of enemy air advancing element along with the defense targets along planned routes flanking teams, 1-41 FA fires the gaps, while the airstrike is delivered. When the and the enemy force attempts to airstrike is completed, field artillery fires withdraw. The task force then shifts the are shifted back on the target area. The fires of 1-41 FA onto the remnants of the combined massed field artillery and CAS enemy force as the task force succeed in slowing the enemy advance counterattacks by fire. This combination and provide time for the 2d Bde of firepower eliminates the enemy force. commander to shift his forces to destroy the enemy in the penetration.

IMâssâinigj ffiiros Dim filhie MBÂ. FUeBcfl sirfioDDeir^ sypporß ff©ir As part of his planning effort, the 2d Bde ®c@in)©inri)^ @ff foir©@ giiresis. FSO in concert with the brigade S2 has planned mass fires on several targets located on avenues of approach that The division has economized forces in the could accommodate large armor 1st Bde area in order to concentrate forces formations. Based on the FSO's in the 2d Bde area. One FA battalion is recommendation, the 2d Bde has also DS to 1st Bde. The DS battalion can requested planned offensive air support request additional fires from GS and on these targets. The FSO sends the GSR artillery through division artillery, targets to 1-41 FA (DS) and requests that but it is doubtful that reinforcing they be planned on call, "all available." artillery would be available.

F-48 APPENDIX F FM 6-20-1

□ Field artillery support considera- • Fires should be planned ón avenues of tions in economy of force areas will approach that enter the flank of the not differ greatly from field artillery economy of force brigade from the area support provided to maneuver forces of the main effort. in the area of concentration. Special considerations for field artillery support in economy of force areas in the active defense are: • The economy of force brigade's capability to mass maneuver forces will be limited. The brigade will be dependent on massed field artillery and • Movement must be by echelon or battery mortar fires to "plug the gaps." This is since reinforcing field artillery is not especially true should a supporting available. attack develop in these areas.

Key points

V'

During the MBA fight, field artillery supports MBA maneuver elements by— • Firing defensive fires. • Firing in support of strong- • Planning and executing coun- points. terfire. • Massing fires on the enemy • Firing at attacking mechanized second echelon. forces at the request of FISTs/ • Providing field artillery support FSOs. to economy of force areas in the MBA. • Massing fires in the MBA. • Firing in support of isolated forces.

F-49

FM 6-20-1

APPENDIX G:

Glossary

ABCA American, British, Ca- BNCOC basic noncommissioned nadian, and Australian officer course ACA airspace coordination CATF commander, amphib- area ious task force AD air defense CAS close air support ADA air defense artillery CBR chemical, biological, and radiological ADFT artillery direct fire trainer CE communications- electronics AGI annual general inspection CEQI Communications- Electronics Operation AIT advanced individual Instructions training CEP circular error probablè ALO air liaison officer CESO communications- AM amplitude modulated electronics staff officer ARTEP Army Training and CF command fire Evaluation Program CFA covering force area ASP ammunition supply point CLF commander, landing force AT arrival time COMSEC communications ATG antitank gun security ATGM antitank guided missile COP combat outpost ATP ammunition transfer COSCOM corps support command point CP command post AVLB armored vehicle launched bridge CSR controlled supply rate BCT basic combat training CSS combat service support

G-1 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

CT completion time FASCO forward area support coordinator CTA common table of allowances FDC fire direction center: DAP distant aiming point FDD fire direction officer DF direction finding FEBA forward edge of the battle area DISCOM division support command FFE fire for effect DME distance-measuring FIST fire support team equipment FM frequency modulated DMMC division materiel FO forward observer management center FPF final protective fire DS direct support FS fire support DTG date-time group FSCOORD fire support coordinator DTO division transportation officer FSE fire support element DZ dropping zone FSO fire support officer ECCM electronic counter- FSOP field standing operating countermeasure procedure EDRE emergency deployment FTX field training exercise readiness exercise GFT graphical firing table EEFI essential elements of GMET Graphical Munitions information Effects Table EEI essential elements of GS general support friendly information GSR general support ELSEC electronic security reinforcing EMP electromagnetic pulse HA high angle EW electronic warfare HB high burst EXTAL extra time allowance HC/ti hexachloroethane (smoke)/time FA field artillery HE high explosive FAAO field artillery aerial observer HE/CP high explosive/ concrete piercing FAC forward air controller HE/PD high explosive/ FADAC Field Artillery Digital point detonating Automatic Computer HES high explosive spotting FASC forward area signal center HE/ti high explosive/time

G-2 APPENDIX G FM 6-20-1

HE/VT high explosive/variable MOS military occupational time specialty HHB headquarters and head- MP military police quarters battery mph miles per hour HOB height of burst MPI mean point of impact HQ headquarters MTOE modified table of HUMINT human intelligence organization and equipment IAW in accordance with MTLR moving target locating ICM improved conventional radar munitions march unit ICM/AP improved conventional MU munitions/ NATO North Atlantic Treaty antipersonnel Organization ICM/DP improved conventional NBC nuclear, biological, munitions/dual purpose chemical IR infrared NCO noncommissioned officer JMEM Joint Munitions Effec- tiveness Manual NCS net control station kmih kilometers in the hour NGF naval gunfire kmph kilometers per hour NSI nuclear surety inspection LC line of contact OEG operational exposure guidance LD line of departure i LFM landing force manual OIR other intelligence (Marine Corps) requirements LO liaison officer o/o on order LZ landing zone OP observation post OPORD operation order MBA main battle area OPSEC operations security MCC movement control center ops/FDC operations/fire direction center MCI meal, combat, individual ORE operation readiness MEDEVAC medical evacuation evaluation MMC materiel management ORT operational readiness center training MOPP mission oriented OSUT one-station unit protection posture training

G-3 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

PAC < personnel administra- SHELREP shelling report tion center SIGSEC signal security PD point detonating SOJT supervised on-the-job PL phase line training PLL prescribed load list SOP standing operating procedure PNCOC primary noncommis- sioned officer course SP self-propelled; start point PNL prescribed nuclear load SQT skill qualification test POL petroleum, oils and lubricants S&T supply and transportation PST pass time STANAG Standardization PX post exchange Agreement PW prisoner of war TA target acquisition Q quick (fiize) TAB target acquisition QE quadrant elevation battery QSTAG Quadripartite Stan- TAC SOP tactical standing dardization Agreement operating procedure TASC Training and Audio- RATT radioteletypewriter visual Support Center RDF radio direction finding TDIS time distance RFA restrictive fire area TEC training extension RFL restrictive fire line course RP release point TEWT tactical exercise without troops RSR required supply rate TF task force RT radius of target TGPC terrain gun position RTO radiotelephone correction operator TLE target location error RWI radio wire integration TOC tactical operations SAEDA subversion and espio- center nage directed against TOE table of organization the Army and equipment SEAD suppression of enemy TOT time on target air defense USAF United States Air Force SEDME surveying equipment, distance measuring, USAFAS United States Army electronic Field Artillery School

G-4 APPENDIX G FM 6-20-1

UTM universal transverse mercator (grid) VE velocity error VPKM vehicles per kilometer VPM vehicles per mile VT variable time VT/DPICM variable time/dual purpose improved con- ventional munitions WP white phosphorus WLR weapon locating radar WPM words per minute WP/PD white phosphorus/ point detonating

(

G-5

FM 6-20-1 APPENDIX H:

Relevant References

Department of the Army pamphlets. 310-3 Index of Doctrinal, Training, and Organizational Publications

Field manuals. 3-10 Employment of Chemical Agents 3-12 Operational Aspects of Radiologicál Defense 3-22 Fallout Prediction 5- Engineer Combat1 Operations 00

6- The Tactical Fire1 Direction System (TACFIRE)* 6-2 Field Artillery Survey 6-15 Field Artillery Meteorology 6-20 Fire Support in Combined Arms Operations 6-40 Field Artillery Cannon Gunnery 6-50 The Field Artillery Cannon Battery 6-121 Field Artillery Target Acquisition 6-141-1 Field Artillery Target Analysis and Weapons Employment (Nonnuclear) 7-20 The Infantry Battalion 11-50 Combat Communications Within the Division 17-95 Cavalry 20-22 Vehicle Recovery Operations

*To be published.

H-1 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

21-6 How to Prepare and Conduct Military Training 21-40 NBC Defense 24-1 Combat Communications 24-17 Tactical Telecommunications Center Operation 30-102 Opposing Forces Europe 71-1 The Tank and Mechanized Infantry Company Team 71-2 The Tank and Mechanized Infantry Battalion Task Force 71-100 Armored and Mechanized Division Operations 100-5 Operations 100- Nuclear Unit Operations in5 Combat 0 101- Staff Organization and Operations5 101-31-1 Staff Officer Field Manual: Nuclear Weapons Employment Doctrine and Procedures 101-31-2 Staff Officer Field Manual: Nuclear Weapons Employment Effects Data (U) Training circulars. 6-1 TACFIRE 6-4-2 The Threat—Organization, Tactics and Equipment 6-10-1 Field Artillery Communications 6-20-9 Field Artillery Cannon Battery Defense 6-20-10 FIST: The Fire Support Team 6-121 Field Artillery Target Acquisition 11-5 What's Up: Know How to Repair and Fabricate Antennas 21-5-7 Training Management in Battalions 100-10 CombatServiceSupport in Battle* Standardization agreements. 2101 Principles and Procedures for Establishing Liaison 2129 Recognition and Identification of Forces on the Battlefield 2099 Fire Coordination in Support of Land Forces

*To be published APPENDIX H FM 6-20-1

Army training and evaluation program 6-165 General Support Cannon Units 6-365 Field Artillery Battalion Direct Support Cannon Units

«

I

, H-3

FM 6-20-1 APPENDIX I Standardization Agreement 2129

NATO UNCLASSIFIED

STAN AG 2129 Agreed Engllsh/French Texts (Edition No. 3)

NAVY/ARMY/AIR

NATO STANDARDIZATION AGREEMENT (STANAG) RECOGNITION AND IDENTIFICATION OF FORCES ON THE BATTLEFIELD

Annexes: A. Suggested Methods of Challenges and Replies B. Challenging by Guards and Sentries Related documents: STANAG 2020(OP) - Operational Situation Reports. STANAG 2027(OP) - Marking of Military Vehicles. STANAG 2099(ARTY) - Fire Coordination in Support of Land Forces. STANAG 3736(TAO) - Offensive Air Support Operations - ATP-27. Allied Communications Publication 150 - Recognition and Identification Instructions, Air, Land, and Sea Forces.

NATO UNCLASSIFIED

1-1 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

NATO UNCLASSIFIED

AIM

1. The aim of this agreement is to standardize, for use by the NATO Forces, the procedures to be used for the recognition and identification of forces on the battlefield.

AGREEMENT

2. It is agreed that the NATO Forces are to use the procedures described in this STANAG for the recognition and identification of forces on the battlefield.

GENERAL

3. The scope of this agreement is to state the procedure for recognition and identification on the battlefield of the NATO Forces operating on land by: a. Personnel on the ground, either on foot or in vehicles, by day or night. b. Crews of airborne vehicles. 4. This agreement covers only the traditional means which are easily transportable and simple to operate.

DEFINITIONS

5. The following terms and definitions are used for the purpose of this agreement: a. Ground by Ground. Ground by ground is defined as the recognition by ground units of other ground objects, personnel, vehicles and units. It includes recognition of objects close to the land like hovercraft and elevated platforms.

b. Ground by Air. Ground by air is defined as the recognition by airborne sensors and visual reconnaissance of objects, personnel and vehicles located on or close to the ground.

NATO UNCLASSIFIED

1-2 APPENDIX I FM 6-20-1

NATO UNCLASSIFIED

STATEMENT OF DETAILS

6. Identification Signals. Identification may be established and recognition effected as follows: a. Appearance. (Personnel and Equipment). The silhouette, colour, markings, lay-out and general visual effect of elements conforming to prescribed arrangements. b. Behaviour. Direction and manner of movement, speed, use of armament and type of formation. Identification or recognition by behaviour requires a good tactical knowledge of the current situation, e.g. knowledge of the movement plan of friendly forces. c. Signals. By the use of: (1) Any type of signal used in accordance with a prescribed plan or key. (See AGP 150 and STANAGs 2027 and 3736). (2) The correct use of the challenge and reply. (See Annex B). d. Position. The knowledge of the location of friendly objects or elements in reference to clearly recognized terrain features and the limits of prescribed operating areas for specific friendly elements. Fire support coordination lines (FSCL) and artificial landmarks can be used for recognition and identification of ground elements. The method by which the FSCL is fixed and communicated to all forces is laid down in STANAG 2099 and forms part of the operational plan for air support. Ground elements are responsible for laying out artificial landmarks for ground by air recognition and identification after coordination of time and place with air commanders. Recognition of a unit designated by position and track may be determined by its coincidence, or the coincidence of its radar plot with: (1) A position received by a situation report (SITREP) (See STANAG 2020) or Forward Line Own Troops (FLOT) Message (See STANAG 3736). (2) The reported position of a unit designated as friendly or hostile by a competent authority. A

7. Procedures. The following steps apply: a. Detection. Detection includes the awareness, by any means, of a new object or activity in the area. b. Inspection. (1) This includes the inspection of the object or activity by any means and challenging if appropriate.

NATO UNCLASSIFIED FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

NATO UNCLASSIFIED

(2) The need to avoid attracting the attention of the enemy normally requires one party seeking to recognize another to observe without being seen, i.e. without making any visual or sound signal (one-sided direct observation). It is therefore necessary that all personnel be trained in the recognition of both friendly and enemy forces likely to be met on the battlefield, by a knowledge of the appearance of uniforms, equipment and vehicles. Vehicle markings are prescribed in STANAG 2027. c. Recognition. This is the determination by any means of the friendly or enemy character, or the individuality of another. The establishment of the friendly or hostile character of the object or activity may include the appropriate reply to a challenge.

8. Challenge and Reply Systems. Both challenge and reply systems should contain a variety of methods. The code must be periodically changed and be given a wide national and international distribution. Signal instructions provide the necessary means for this distribution. This procedure, which compels the challenging party to show themselves, entails a risk. Suggested challenge and reply methods are listed in Annex A. The selected systems must be effective by day, by night and in conditions of poor visibility. The method of challenging to be used by guards and sentries is at Annex B. 9. Limitations. Recognition and identification signals may become known to the enemy. They are therefore to be regarded as evidence but NEVER as proof of friendly character. Conversely, friendly personnel may not, in all instances, know the current reply to a challenge. Therefore, the failure to give a correct reply to a challenge must not be taken as proof of enemy character. No challenge is to be made until ready to take offensive action. The use of recognition or identification signals establishes the originator's friendly character to a friendly unit, and immediately indicates his hostile nature to an enemy. Normally, visual emergency identification signals are a low security means of indicating friendly character. Emergency identification signals must be verified by the prescribed signals if practicable. 10. Exchange of Information on Identification and Recognition. Positive recognition of friendly forces operating on the battlefield must be based on the exact knowledge of uniforms, equipment and vehicles used by such forces. 11. NATO nations should exchange among themselves and/or furnish to the Major NATO Commanders (MNC) and the Major Subordinate Commanders (MSC) all necessary information about the appearance and identification symbols of their forces and equipment when in a combat role.

NATO UNCLASSIFIED

1-4 APPENDIX I FM 6-20-1

NATO UNCLASSIFIED

12. Command Responsibility. All NATO Commanders have the responsibility to ensure that all personnel under their operational command are trained in the recognition of both friendly and enemy forces likely to be met on the battlefield. 13. The Supreme Allied Commanders, or Commanders designated by them, are responsible for prescribing the challenges and replies to be used. This includes the use of challenges and replies during operations, and for training purposes. Allied Communications Publication 150 provides additional information and guidance.

IMPLEMENTATION OF THE AGREEMENT

14. This STANAG will be considered to have been. implemented when the necessary orders/instructions putting the procedures detailed in this agreement into effect have been issued to the forces concerned.

ANNEX A TO STANAG 2129 (Edition No. 3)

SUGGESTED METHODS OF CHALLENGES AND REPLIES

CHALLENGES TO BE MADE BY A GROUND UNIT

1. Visual Challenges. These include, but are not limited to: a. Smokes. (Coloured smoke, shell bursts, pyrotechnics etc.). b. Lights. (Vehicle lights, spot lights, torches, Very lights, Signal flares etc.). c. Panels, flags, markings etc. 2. Sound Challenges. These include but are not limited to: a. Voice. b. Vehicle horns, sirens, bugles, whistles etc. c. Codes bursts of fire.

NATO UNCLASSIFIED

1-5 FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

NATO UNCLASSIFIED

3. Electronic Challenges. These include but are not limited to: a. Radio. b. Radar. c. Infra-red. d. Laser.

CHALLENGE TO BE MADE BY AN AIRBORNE VEHICLE

4. Challenges by crews or airborne vehicles include, but are not limited to: a. Significant behaviour, such as over-flying with dipping wings, aircraft light signals or particular flight pattern. b. Use of Very lights. (Signal flares). c. Loudspeaker challenge. 5. It is the responsibility of the crew of the airborne vehicle to initiate the challenge by a prescribed means.

REPLIES

6. The means for challenging listed in paragraphs 1, 2, 3 and 4 also are available for replies. 7. Additional means include, but are not limited to: a. Radio call on a stipulated frequency. b. The display of panels as prescribed in standard operating instructions. c. The pre-arranged display of individual panels by ground parties.

COMBINATIONS

8. It is necessary that the challenge and reply codes include several permitted combinations, in order that a friendly party without a particular equipment would not be considered hostile.

NATO UNCLASSIFIED APPENDIX I FM 6-20-1

NATO UNCLASSIFIED

ANNEX B TO STANAG 2129 (Edition No. 3)

CHALLENGING BY GUARDS AND SENTRIES

DEFINITIONS

1. The following terms are defined for the purpose of this annex: a. Password. A combination of two words, the first being the challenge, the second the reply. b. Challenge. The first word of a password. c. Reply. The second word of a password.

ETHOD

2. The verbal method of challenging (see paragraph 2.a. of Annex Ato STANAG 2129) is the one most commonly used to identify unknown persons approaching a position. It is based on a password, which changes daily at a specified time, and which is common within national formations, or within specified command groupings, or areas. 3. The words used to form a password should be easily pronounceable. The combination selected should not have an obvious connection from which, given the challenge, the reply could be guessed. 4. The password is decided upon at the highest applicable level of command, and notified in advance to subordinate formations and units. Neighbouring and higher formations are also to be informed. 5. When forces of two or more nations are in the same formation, or area, great care is necessary to ensure that the password chosen is pronounceable by the nationalities concerned. In these circumstances the phonetic alphabet could be used, i.e. Challenge - BRAVO Reply - FOXTROT

NATO UNCLASSIFIED FM 6-20-1 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTALION

NATO UNCLASSIFIED

It may be ordered, for the sake of clarity, that the challenge and reply each be repeated once.

PROCEDURE

6. The following procedure is to be used:

Action by Sentry Action by Persons or Group Challenged

Alerts his Immediate commander of the a. approach of a person/group, and covers him/them with hls weapon.

Walts until the person/group approach- Halts, raises hands. ing Is within audible range, but not so b. close that the position can be rushed, and then orders hlm/them to stop with the command "HALT-HANDS UP”.

c. Orders by voice or sign one person to Person (or group leader) advances approach - "ADVANCE ONE" towards sentry's position.

Allows the unknown person to approach halts. close enough for visual recognition, or to give the challenge In a quiet voice, and then orders him to stop - "HALT".

Gives the challenge quietly - e.g. Gives the reply - e.g. FOXTROT e- "BRAVO" - If he does not recognize the person. Calls forward the remainder of the group, Second unknown person, or the either as Individuals - "ADVANCE ONE" - remainder of the group, advances to be or altogether - "ADVANCE" - as the recognized by the sentry, assisted by the situation or hls orders dictate. group leader who stays with the sentry until all have passed.

FIRING BY SENTRIES

7. The circumstances under which a sentry is to be instructed to fire on persons or groups failing to heed a challenge is left to national authorities and must, necessarily, vary depending upon the particular situation and the laws of the countries concerned.

NATO UNCLASSIFIED

I-8 FM 6-20-1

5 JULY 1979

By Order of the Secretary of the Army:

E. C. MEYER General, United States Army Chief of Staff

Official:

J. C. PENNINGTON Major General, United States Army The Adjutant Genera!

DISTRIBUTION:

Active Army and USAR:To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12-11 A&B, Requirements for Field Artillery Cannon Battalions and Batteries (Qty rqr block no. 72); and Operations of Army Forces in the Field (Qty rqr block no. 405).

ARNG. To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12 -11 A, Field Artillery Cannon Battalions and Batteries (Qty rqr block no. 72).

Additional copies can be requisitioned from the US Army Adjutant General Publications Center, 2800 Eastern Boulevard, Baltimore, MD 21220.

3000015647

»